JP2021058331A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably suppressing a fraudulent act to an electronic component mounted on a board.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine includes a main control board 401 for performing control regarding a game. A GND line 405 and a GND contact part 407 are provided on the main control board 401. The GND line 405 and the GND contact part 407 are connected to a ground. A fraudulence detection line 406 and a fraudulence detection contact part 408 are provided in parallel to the GND line 405 and the GND contact part 407 on the main control board 401. Power is supplied to the fraudulence detection line 406 and the fraudulence detection contact part 408. A main-side CPU 64 executes abnormality notification processing when the GND line 405 makes continuity with the fraudulence detection line 406.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 47

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front surface of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided by a game ball launcher. It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is a game ball launching device. The game ball that has become surplus in the upper dish storage section is discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given the privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

These game machines include a control device that controls the main control of the game, and the control device includes a control board. The control board is configured by mounting electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and connectors on a printed wiring board (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-56284

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to suitably suppress fraudulent acts on electronic components mounted on a substrate, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably suppressing fraudulent acts on electronic components mounted on a substrate. is there.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems is a game machine provided with a control board for controlling a game.
The control board is
With the ground means connected to the ground,
A power supply means that is installed side by side with respect to the ground means and is supplied with power, and a power supply means.
With
The game machine is characterized by comprising a continuity-corresponding means for making a specific state when the ground means and the power supplied means are electrically connected.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably suppress fraudulent acts on electronic components mounted on a substrate.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of the symbol display apparatus (a)-(j). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of the symbol display apparatus (a), (b). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the composition concerning the discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a rear view of the inner frame. (A) A front view of the main control unit, (b) a front view of the main control unit showing an enlarged view of the fifth connector, and (c) a front view of the main control unit showing an enlarged view of the sixth connector. Yes, (d) is a front view of the main control device showing the seventh connector in an enlarged manner. (A) is a plan view showing an element mounting surface of a main control board, and (b) is a plan view of a main control board showing an enlarged connector group mounting area. (A) is a plan view of the first connector, (b) is a plan view of the second connector, (c) is a plan view of the third connector, and (d) is a plan view of the fourth connector. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 8 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the first connector, and (b) BB of FIG. 8 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the second connector. It is a line sectional view. (A) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 8 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the third connector, and (b) DD of FIG. 8 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the fourth connector. It is a line sectional view. It is a perspective view seen from the front side of the main control unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the main control unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of the main control unit. (A) is a front view of the front case body, and (b) is a front view of the back case body. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device when cut at the cut surface (line EE of FIG. 8 (a)) passing through the first connector and the sixth connector, and (b) the first guide portion is enlarged. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device shown by (A), (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device when cut at the cut surface (line EE of FIG. 8 (a)) passing through the first connector and the sixth connector in the process of assembling the main control device. is there. (A) Explain the positional relationship between the through hole formed in the front side first case fixing boss and the screw hole formed in the back side first case fixing boss before the front case body is guided upward by the second guide portion. (B) The through hole formed in the front side first case fixing boss and the back side first case fixing boss formed after the front case body is guided upward by the second guide portion. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship with a screw hole. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the connection mode of MPU and various electronic devices. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting contents of each terminal of 1st connector. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the setting contents of each terminal of 2nd connector, (b) it is explanatory drawing for explaining the setting contents of each terminal of 3rd connector, and (c) 4th connector It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting contents of each terminal of. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the distribution table for 1st special drawing, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the distribution table for 2nd special drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout side timer interrupt processing in a payout side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state reception processing in the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout output processing in a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing in a main CPU. (A) It is a front view of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the front view of the main control device which shows the 5th connector enlarged, and (c) the 6th connector is shown enlarged. It is a front view of the control device, and (d) is the front view of the main control device which shows the 7th connector enlarged. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the main control unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of the main control unit. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 34 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the first connector, and (b) BB of FIG. 34 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the second connector. It is a line sectional view. (A) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 34 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the third connector, and (b) DD of FIG. 34 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the fourth connector. It is a line sectional view. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device in the case of cutting at the cut surface (line EE of FIG. 34A) passing through the first connector and the sixth connector. (A) is a front view of the main control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the main control device showing the periphery of the first to fourth connectors in an enlarged manner. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the main control unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of the main control unit. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 40 (a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the first connector, and (b) BB of FIG. 40 (a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector. It is a line sectional view. (A) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 40 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the third connector, and (b) DD of FIG. 40 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the fourth connector. It is a line sectional view. (A) is a front view of the front case body, and (b) is a front view of the back case body. (A) Explanatory drawing for explaining the positional relationship between the through hole formed in the front side first case fixing boss and the screw hole formed in the back side first case fixing boss before the front case body is slid upward. (B) To explain the positional relationship between the through hole formed in the front side first case fixing boss and the screw hole formed in the back side first case fixing boss after the front case body is slid upward. It is explanatory drawing of. (A) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface of the main control board in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a plan view of the main control board showing a part of the MPU in an enlarged manner. (A) is a plan view showing a solder surface of a main control board, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 48 (a). It is a flowchart which shows the fraud detection process executed by the main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electric structure for monitoring the fraudulent activity in the power-off state in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on setting process executed by the main CPU. (A) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface of the main control board in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a plan view of the main control board showing a part of the MPU in an enlarged manner. (A) is a plan view showing the back surface of the main control board, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 53 (a). (A) is a plan view showing an element mounting surface of the main control board according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a plan view of the main control board showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the center. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how the power failure processing is executed. (A) is a plan view showing an element mounting surface of the main control board according to the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a plan view of the main control board showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the center.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. The guide rail is configured as. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate 55a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is provided with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39. Etc. are provided respectively.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, with respect to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, when a ball is entered, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls is entered into the first operating port 33, three prize balls are paid out and the balls are entered into the second operating port 34. One prize ball is paid out, and when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out and the special electric winning device 32 is entered. If so, 15 prize balls will be paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is smaller than that in the first operating port 33, but the specific number of prize balls is different from the above. Often, the number of prize balls may be the same in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be larger than that in the first operating port 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win a prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning the prize. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a normal map display of the normal map unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the part 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. In the open state of the general electric power, the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix display devices. In addition, as a pattern that is variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is held up to four, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the general drawing hold display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Then, the lottery result is clarified through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

Regarding the special figure unit 37 In detail, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a and a second special figure display unit 37b. The display area of the first special symbol display unit 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and similarly, the display area of the second special symbol display unit 37b is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Further, the area of the display area in which the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are combined is also smaller than that of the display surface 41a.

In the first special figure display unit 37a, a winning lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33, so that a variable display of a pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display unit 37b, a winning lottery is performed by using a winning prize in the second operating port 34 as a trigger, so that a variable display of a pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

The first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. The patterns displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b include a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters. Is displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 37, the first special figure reservation display unit 37c and the second special figure reservation display unit 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. .. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display unit 37c. Further, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the second operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display unit 37d.

Regarding the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the first special symbol display unit 37a performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is displayed accordingly. At the same time, when the second special figure display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the pattern based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed accordingly. .. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode, which will be described later, which shifts after winning the prize, etc. Is done.

The display contents when the symbol display device 41 performs variable display of the symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. 4 (a) to 4 (j) are diagrams showing individual symbols that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b) are display contents on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating.

As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (j), a pattern which is a kind of a pattern consists of nine kinds of main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface 41a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display surface 41a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display surface 41a. ..

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the display surface 41a based on winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol ends, if the result of the internal lottery is the 4R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 8R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 12R high-accuracy jackpot result A, or the 16R high-accuracy jackpot result, which will be described later, any of them. A combination of the same odd-numbered symbols or the same even-numbered symbols is formed on the effective line, and the result of the internal lottery is the 8R low-accuracy jackpot result, the 12R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 12R high-accuracy jackpot result B, which will be described later. If so, the same even-numbered symbol combination is formed on one of the effective lines. Further, when the result of the internal lottery is a 5R high-accuracy big hit result or a small hit result, which will be described later, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "3.4.1") is formed on one of the effective lines. To.

It should be noted that, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the display is started on any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41, and until the predetermined result is displayed and ended. Is equivalent to one game. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

When a big hit or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. Similarly, even if a big hit or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won.

Returning to the description of FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 includes a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when a hit result is obtained. It should be noted that, although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state.

The round display unit 39 displays the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode. Here, the opening / closing execution mode includes a round number specifying mode that occurs when a big hit is won and an opening / closing number specifying mode that occurs when a small hit is won. The round number regulation mode is an opening / closing execution mode that is executed up to a predetermined number of round games. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a special electric winning device 32. That is. The number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode differs depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 displays the number of times of the round game or the corresponding display. Further, the display on the round display unit 39 starts when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode is ended and a new game round is started. On the other hand, in the open / close number regulation mode, the round game is not set, the number of times of opening / closing of the special electric winning device 32 is the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric winning device 32. It is terminated based on the condition of either one of the above. In the open / close number regulation mode, the round display unit 39 is maintained in the non-display state.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of a game ball that has flowed down the game area PA.

As described above, the game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the ball, it will be discharged from the game area PA. A game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. .. The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed discharge passages 42 to 48, and become a discharge ball recovery part (not shown). Will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting the game ball are provided in the discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, discharge passage portions 42 to 44 exist corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 31. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, one for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the right. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. The second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a on the way through the first discharge passage portion 42, and the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 31 to the right of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a on the way through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join the two general winning openings 31 on the right side at an intermediate position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one outlet side region when the inlet side regions merge in the middle. doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the outlet side region in the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball that has entered any of the two general winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a on the way through the third discharge passage portion 44.

The fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists corresponding to the special electric winning device 32. The special electric power detection sensor 45a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball that has entered the special electric power winning device 32 is on the way through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first operating port 33. The first operating port detection sensor 46a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the fifth discharging passage portion 46, and the game ball that has entered the first operating port 33 presses the fifth discharging passage portion 46. It is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a on the way. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second operating port 34. The second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the sixth discharging passage portion 47, and the game ball that has entered the second operating port 34 uses the sixth discharging passage portion 47. It is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a on the way. The seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out port detection sensor 48a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball that has entered the out port 24a is on the way through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a.

The game ball that is the target of detection by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a is not the target of detection by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, the gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

As the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but the sensors used are arbitrary as long as the game balls can be individually detected. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to the main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. The relationship is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 formed by attaching the game board 24 having the above configuration to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. It may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described. 7 is a rear view of the inner frame 13, FIG. 8A is a front view of the main control device 60, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of the fifth connector CN5 included in the main control device 60. 8 (c) is a front view of the main control device 60 shown, FIG. 8 (c) is an enlarged front view of the sixth connector CN6 included in the main control device 60, and FIG. 8 (d) is a front view of the main control device 60. It is a front view of the main control device 60 which shows the 7th connector CN7 provided in the main control device 60 in an enlarged manner. The details of the 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 7, a main control device 60 and a voice emission control device 70 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). As shown in FIG. 8A, the main control device 60 has a function of controlling the main control of the game (specifically, MPU63 described later) and a function of monitoring the power supply (specifically, power failure monitoring described later). It includes a main control board 61 having a circuit 201). The main control device 60 is configured such that the main control board 61 is housed in the board box 62. The specific configuration of the main control device 60 will be described in detail later.

The voice emission control device 70 (FIG. 7) is a sound output control of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1), a light emission control of the display light emission unit 53 (FIG. 1), and a display control device described later, according to an instruction from the main control device 60. It is provided with a voice emission control board (not shown) for controlling. The voice emission control device 70 is configured by housing the voice emission control board in the board box 70a (FIG. 7).

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a control device collecting unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for performing an ON operation and an OFF operation of the power supply.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 78 that controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The back pack 72 is provided with an external terminal plate 79 in addition to the payout mechanism unit 73 and the control device collecting unit 74. The external terminal plate 79 is installed at the upper corner portion on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 on the rotation base end side of the back pack unit 15. The external terminal board 79 outputs a predetermined signal in order to make the management computer of the pachinko machine 10 recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10, and is a substrate for inputting a predetermined signal from the management computer of the game hall to the pachinko machine 10. Is. The management computer receives various information from the main control device 60 and the payout control device 77 through the external terminal plate 79.

<Structure of main control device 60>
Next, the configuration of the main control device 60 will be described. First, a specific configuration of the main control board 61 will be described. FIG. 9A is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. Note that FIG. 9A omits the illustration of the wiring pattern formed on the surface of the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the main control board 61 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and has a pair of long sides 61a and 61b and a pair of short sides 61c and 61d. The main control substrate 61 is an insulating plate, specifically, a paper phenol substrate produced by impregnating paper with a phenol resin, but the insulating plate is not limited to this, and is, for example, a glass cloth. It may be a glass epoxy substrate manufactured by impregnating with an epoxy resin.

The plate surface on one side of the main control board 61 is an element mounting surface 61e on which the MPU 63, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7, and various elements 91 to 94 are mounted. The main control board 61 is a double-sided board in which a wiring pattern is formed on the element mounting surface 61e and the back surface of the board which is the plate surface opposite to the element mounting surface 61e on the main control board 61. The main control board 61 is not limited to the double-sided board, and may be a single-sided board in which the wiring pattern is formed only on one plate surface of the main control board 61.

On one long side 61a side (upper side in FIG. 9A) of the main control board 61, a group of connectors on which the first connector CN1, the second connector CN2, the third connector CN3, and the fourth connector CN4 are mounted is mounted. Region 88 is provided. FIG. 9B is a plan view of the main control board 61 in which the connector group mounting area 88 is enlarged and shown. The first connector CN1 is a connector for electrically connecting the main control board 61 to the payout control device 77, the power supply / emission control device 78, and the external terminal board 79, and the second connector CN2 is connected to the main control board 61. The third connector CN3 is a connector for electrically connecting the first operation port detection sensor 46a and the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and the third connector CN3 is a connector for electrically connecting the main control board 61 and the second operation port detection sensor 47a. The fourth connector CN4 includes a main control board 61, a first winning opening detection sensor 42a, a second winning opening detection sensor 43a, a third winning opening detection sensor 44a, a special electric detection sensor 45a, an out opening detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a. It is a connector for electrically connecting electronic parts such as. The details of the connection mode between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and various electronic components will be described later.

The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are arranged in a row along one long side 61a of the main control board 61, and the connector group mounting area 88 extends along the long side 61a. As shown in FIG. 9A, the pachinko machine 10 is performed on the other long side 61b side (lower side in FIG. 9A) of the main control board 61 before being installed in the game hall. In the test firing test, the fifth connector mounting area 85a on which the fifth connector CN5 connected to the test firing test device (not shown), which is an external device, is mounted, and various display units (specifically, the first special figure display unit 37a). The sixth connector mounting area 86a on which the sixth connector CN6 connected to the second special figure display unit 37b, the normal drawing display unit 38a, and the round display unit 39) is mounted, and the sound emission control device 70 is connected to the sixth connector. A seventh connector mounting area 87a on which the 7-connector CN7 is mounted is provided.

The main control board 61 is an element in which a large number of surface mount components such as a resistor 91, a capacitor 92, a transistor 93, and an IC 94 are mounted in addition to the connector group mounting area 88 and the fifth to seventh connector mounting areas 85a to 87a. A mounting area 89 is provided. Although not shown, on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, a wiring pattern for electrically connecting the connectors CN1 to CN4 and various elements 91 to 94, and various elements 91 to 94 are electrically connected to each other. A wiring pattern for connecting to is formed. These wiring patterns are made of copper and are coated with an insulating resist so as not to be exposed on the surface. Note that these wiring patterns are not limited to copper as long as they have conductivity, and may be made of other metals such as gold.

Next, the configurations of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 will be described. 10 (a) is a plan view of the first connector CN1, FIG. 10 (b) is a plan view of the second connector CN2, and FIG. 10 (c) is a plan view of the third connector CN3. (D) is a plan view of the fourth connector CN4. 11 (a) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 8 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the first connector CN1, and FIG. 11 (b) is an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector CN2. 8 (a) is a sectional view taken along line BB, and FIG. 12 (a) is an enlarged sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 8 (a) showing the periphery of the third connector CN3. (B) is an enlarged sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 8A showing the periphery of the fourth connector CN4.

The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are female connectors, and the corresponding male connectors (not shown) are connected to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. As shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d), 11 (a) and 11 (b), and 12 (a) and 12 (b), the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 have a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. It is provided with housings 101 to 104 made of resin formed in the above, and terminals 111 to 116 which are bent pieces made of metal formed in an L shape. The housings 101 to 104 are electrically insulating, and the terminals 111 to 116 are conductive.

As shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d), the first to fourth housings 101 to 104 have a rectangular bottom plate portion 101a to 104a and an upper edge portion and a lower edge portion of the bottom plate portions 101a to 104a. Upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b, lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c, and left standing wall portions 101d to 104d integrally formed by vertically erecting portions, left edge portions, and right edge portions from the bottom plate portions 101a to 104a. And the right side upright wall portions 101e to 104e are provided. The bottom plate portions 101a to 104a and the upright wall portions 101b to 104b, 101c to 104c, 101d to 104d, 101e to 104e correspond to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 in the first to fourth housings 101 to 104. Receiving portions 101f to 104f are formed so as to be able to accept the male connector (not shown). As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b) and 12 (a) and 12 (b), the receiving portions 101f to 104f face the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 (FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (a) and 11 (b)). It is open toward b) and to the right in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b). The housings 101 to 104 have a square box shape that is open in the direction in which the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 faces as a whole.

Insertion holes 101g to 104g through which terminals 111 to 116 are inserted are formed in the bottom plate portions 101a to 104a. One end of each of the L-shaped terminals 111 to 116 is a contact portion 111a to 116a that electrically contacts the terminal (not shown) of the male connector corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The other end of the L-shape is a fixing portion 111b to 116b for fixing the terminals 111 to 116 to the main control board 61.

The contact portions 111a to 116a extend vertically from the bottom plate portions 101a to 104a to positions near the free ends of the receiving portions 101f to 104f. The fixing portions 111b to 116b exist between the bottom plate portions 101a to 104a and the main control board 61, and have a predetermined length dimension (specifically, a length dimension of about 2 mm).

The fixing portions 111b to 116b are fixed to the main control board 61 by soldering substantially the entire portion to a metal (specifically, copper) land 98 provided on the element mounting surface 61e. As a result, the terminals 111 to 116 are electrically connected to the wiring pattern (not shown) formed on the element mounting surface 61e. The fixing portions 111b to 116b are soldered by a surface mounting technique such as reflow soldering.

As shown in FIG. 10A, in the first connector CN1, the contact portions 111a are evenly spaced (specifically, the distance between the centers of the adjacent contact portions 111a) with the longitudinal direction of the first connector CN1 as the arrangement direction. The 17 end-side terminals 111 arranged in a row at an interval of 2.54 mm) and the contact portions 112a with the longitudinal direction as the arrangement direction are equally spaced (specifically, the center of the adjacent contact portions 112a). It is provided with 17 terminals 112 on the other end side arranged in a row at intervals of 2.54 mm. The row of terminals 111 on one end and the row of terminals 112 on the other end have a predetermined distance in the lateral direction of the first connector CN1 (specifically, the distance between the centers of the contact portions 111a and 112a is 2.54 mm. The rows of terminals 111 on one end side are arranged on one end side (lower standing wall portion 101c side) in the lateral direction, and the rows of terminals 112 on the other end side are the same. It is arranged on the other end side (upper standing wall portion 101b side) in the lateral direction.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the fixing portion 111b of the terminal on one end side is located below the center of the first housing 101 in the lateral direction (closer to the lower standing wall portion 101c) (first). It extends in the direction D1) and extends so as to straddle the lower standing wall portion 101c and the lower peripheral edge portion 156b of the first connector insertion hole 156, which will be described later, along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. doing. As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b) and 12 (a) and 12 (b), the first direction D1 refers to the upper standing wall portions 101b to 101b in the lateral direction of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The direction is from 104b toward the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11A, the fixing portion 112b of the other end side terminal 112 is located above the center of the first housing 101 in the lateral direction (closer to the upper standing wall portion 101b) (closer to the upper standing wall portion 101b). It extends in the second direction D2) opposite to the first direction D1, and the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 is between the upper standing wall portion 101b and the upper peripheral edge portion 156a of the first connector insertion hole 156 described later. It extends so as to straddle along.

As shown in FIG. 10B, the second connector CN2 includes two terminals 113 arranged at the center of the second connector CN2 in the lateral direction. These two terminals 113 are arranged at a predetermined distance (specifically, a distance such that the distance between the centers of the contact portions 113a is 2.54 mm) in the longitudinal direction of the second connector CN2. As shown in FIG. 11B, the fixing portions 113b of these two terminals 113 extend downward (first direction D1) from the central position in the lateral direction of the second housing 102, and stand upright on the lower side. It extends so as to straddle between the wall portion 102c and the lower peripheral edge portion 157b of the second connector insertion hole 157, which will be described later, along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 10 (c), the third connector CN3 includes two terminals 114 arranged at the center of the third connector CN3 in the lateral direction. These two terminals 114 are arranged at a predetermined distance (specifically, a distance such that the distance between the centers of the contact portions 114a is 2.54 mm) in the longitudinal direction of the third connector CN3. As shown in FIG. 12A, the fixing portions 114b of these two terminals 114 extend downward (first direction D1) from the central position in the lateral direction of the third housing 103, and stand upright on the lower side. It extends so as to straddle between the wall portion 103c and the lower peripheral edge portion 158b of the third connector insertion hole 158, which will be described later, along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 10D, in the fourth connector CN4, the contact portions 115a are evenly spaced (specifically, the distance between the centers of the adjacent contact portions 115a) with the longitudinal direction of the fourth connector CN4 as the arrangement direction. The ten end-side terminals 115 arranged in a row at an interval of 2.54 mm) and the contact portions 116a with the longitudinal direction as the arrangement direction are equally spaced (specifically, the center of the adjacent contact portions 116a). It is provided with 10 terminals 116 on the other end side arranged in a row at intervals (distances such that the distance between them is 2.54 mm). The row of the terminal 115 on the one end side and the row of the terminal 116 on the other end side have a predetermined distance in the lateral direction of the fourth connector CN4 (specifically, the distance between the centers of the contact portions 115a and 116a is 2.54 mm. The row of terminals 115 on one end side is arranged on one end side in the lateral direction (the end side of the first direction D1 in FIG. 10D) and the other end side. The row of terminals 116 is arranged on the other end side in the lateral direction (the end side in the second direction D2 in FIG. 10D).

As shown in FIG. 12B, the fixing portion 115b of the terminal 115 on one end side is located below the center of the fourth housing 104 in the lateral direction (closer to the lower standing wall portion 104c) (first). It extends in the direction D1) and extends so as to straddle the lower standing wall portion 104c and the lower peripheral edge portion 159b of the fourth connector insertion hole 159, which will be described later, along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. doing. On the other hand, the fixing portion 116b of the terminal 116 on the other end extends upward (second direction D2) from a position higher than the center in the lateral direction of the fourth housing 104 (closer to the upper standing wall portion 104b). It extends so as to straddle between the upper standing wall portion 104b and the upper peripheral edge portion 159a of the fourth connector insertion hole 159, which will be described later, along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As described above, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are mounted in the connector group mounting area 88 in a manner of arranging in a row along one long side 61a of the main control board 61. As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b), one end side terminals 111 and 2 of the first connector CN1 are mounted in the connector group mounting area 88 in a state where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are mounted. The fixing portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the terminal 113 of the connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4 are directed toward the first direction D1 (downward in FIG. 9B). It is extending. Further, the fixing portions 112b and 116b of the other end side terminals 112 and 116 of the first connector CN1 and the fourth connector CN4 are in the second direction D2 opposite to the first direction D1 (upward direction in FIG. 9B). Extends towards. The fixed portions 111b, 113b, 114b, 115b of one end side terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end side terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 are the same. As long as it extends in the direction, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are arranged in a row on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 may be arranged in two or more rows.

As shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d), the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c have the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. When the corresponding male connector (not shown) is connected, the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h for preventing the male connector from coming off and maintaining the connected state are integrated. It is formed. The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are provided near the center of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b) and 12 (a) and 12 (b), the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are on the standing tip side (free end side) of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. Is formed over a predetermined range. On the other hand, the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h do not exist on the base end side (bottom plate portions 101a to 104a side) of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c, and the base end side is a smooth flat surface. .. The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h project downward by approximately 1 mm from the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. The male connector corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 is locked when it is inserted into the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and connected to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. It includes a locking projection (not shown) that engages with the portions 101h to 104h, and a releasing operation piece (not shown) that is operated to release the engaged state. By operating the release operation piece, the locking projection is displaced in the direction away from the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h, and the engagement between the locking projection and the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h is released. This makes it possible to pull out the male connector from the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4.

As shown in FIGS. 8 (b) to 8 (d), the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are resins formed in a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, similarly to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The fifth to seventh housings 95a to 97a are provided, and terminals 95b to 97b which are metal bent pieces formed into an L shape are provided.

The fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are female connectors, and a corresponding male connector (not shown) is connected to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. The fifth to seventh housings 95a to 97a have a bottom plate portion 95c to 97c, an upper standing wall portion 95d to 97d, a lower standing wall portion 95e to 97e, and a left side, similarly to the above-mentioned first to fourth housings 101 to 104. The upright wall portions 95f to 97f and the right side upright wall portions 95g to 97g are provided, and the bottom plate portions 95c to 97c and the upright wall portions 95d to 97d, 95e to 97e, 95f to 97f, 95g to 97g form the fifth to fifth. Receiving portions 95h to 97h are formed so as to accept male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the 7 connectors CN5 to CN7. The receiving portions 95h to 97h are opened in the direction in which the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 faces. The housings 95a to 97a have a square box shape that is open in the direction in which the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 faces as a whole.

Male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7 are connected to the 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7 to the lower standing wall portions 95e to 97e. In this case, the locking receiving portions 95j to 97j are integrally formed to prevent the male connector from coming off and maintain the connected state. The locking receiving portions 95j to 97j are provided near the center of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 in the longitudinal direction. The locking receiving portions 95j to 97j are formed over a predetermined range on the standing destination side of the lower standing wall portions 95e to 97e. On the other hand, the locking receiving portions 95j to 97j do not exist on the base end side (bottom plate portion 95c to 97c side) of the lower upright wall portions 95e to 97e, and the base end side is a smooth flat surface. .. The locking receiving portions 95j to 97j project downward by approximately 1 mm from the lower standing wall portions 95e to 97e.

The male connector corresponding to the 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7 is locked when it is inserted into the 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7 and connected to the 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7. It includes a locking projection (not shown) that engages with the portions 95j to 97j, and a releasing operation piece (not shown) that is operated to release the engaged state. By operating the release operation piece, the locking projection is displaced in the direction away from the locking receiving portions 95j to 97j, and the engagement between the locking projection and the locking receiving portions 95j to 97j is released. This makes it possible to pull out the male connector from the 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7.

Next, the configuration of the board box 62 that houses the main control board 61 will be described. FIG. 13 is a perspective view seen from the front side of the main control device 60, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the main control device 60, and FIG. 15 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the main control device 60. It is an exploded perspective view. Note that in FIGS. 14 and 15, electronic components such as the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted on the main control board 61 are not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the substrate box 62 has a front case body 121 that covers the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 14) side of the main control board 61 and a side opposite to the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. It is provided with a back case body 122 that covers the back surface 61f (FIG. 15) side of the substrate, which is the plate surface of the above. The front case body 121 and the back case body 122 are made of a colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin. As a result, the element mounting surface 61e and the substrate back surface 61f of the main control board 61 housed in the board box 62 can be visually recognized from the outside of the board box 62. The material forming the front case body 121 and the back case body 122 is not limited to the transparent polycarbonate resin, and may be a transparent acrylic resin or may be colored and transparent.

16 (a) is a front view of the front case body 121, and FIG. 16 (b) is a front view of the back case body 122. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16B, the back case body 122 has a back side facing plate portion 123 formed in a substantially plate shape in a horizontally long rectangular shape facing the back surface 61f (FIG. 15) of the main control board 61. I have. The back side facing plate portion 123 has a board facing surface 123a facing the main control board 61. A pair of upper and lower partition walls 124 and a lower partition wall 125 are integrally formed on the back side facing plate portion 123 by projecting the upper and lower long side portions of the substrate facing surface 123a toward the main control board 61 side. Further, on the back side facing plate portion 123, the left first partition wall 126 and the left second partition wall 127 are integrally formed by projecting the upper and lower portions of the left short side portion of the substrate facing surface 123a toward the main control board 61 side. At the same time, the upper and lower portions of the right short side portion of the substrate facing surface 123a are projected toward the main control board 61, and the right first partition wall 128 and the right second partition wall 129 are integrally formed.

The upper partition wall 124 and the lower partition wall 125 face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Further, the left side first section wall 126 and the left side second section wall 127 and the right side first section wall 128 and the right side second section wall 129 face each other at predetermined intervals in the lateral direction. The back case body 122 is provided with a back side accommodating portion 131 capable of accommodating a part of the back side of the front case body 121 by the back side facing plate portion 123 and these partition walls 124 to 129.

On the back side facing plate portion 123, a columnar board fixing boss 132 to be used for fixing the main control board 61 to the back case body 122 on the left upper side, the left lower part, the right side lower part, and the right side upper part of the board facing surface 123a. 135 is integrally formed. The board fixing bosses 132 to 135 project from the board facing surface 123a toward the main control board 61, and screw holes 132a to 135a that allow the main control board 61 to be screw-fixed to the free ends of the board fixing bosses 132 to 135a. (FIG. 16 (b)) is formed. Further, in the upper left side, the lower left side, the lower right side, and the upper right side of the main control board 61 when viewed from the front, there are board fixing through holes 136 to 139 that allow the main control board 61 to be screwed to the board fixing bosses 132 to 135. It is formed. These four substrate fixing through holes 136 to 139 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the four substrate fixing bosses 132 to 135 described above. The main control board 61 is fixed to the front side of the back case body 122 by being screwed to the board fixing bosses 132 to 135 from the element mounting surface 61e side. As a result, the main control board 61 is integrated with the back case body 122. In this state, the back surface 61f (FIG. 15) of the main control board 61 faces the board facing surface 123a at a predetermined distance in the depth direction (front-back direction).

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16 (a), the front case body 121 includes the MPU 63 (FIG. 9 (a)) mounted on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 and various elements 91 to 94 (FIG. 9). It is provided with a horizontally long rectangular front facing plate portion 141 facing the element mounting surface 61e with (a)) in between. As shown in FIG. 15, the front facing plate portion 141 has an element facing surface 141a facing the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 14). A pair of upper and lower upright walls 142 and a lower upright wall 143 are integrally formed on the front side facing plate portion 141 by erecting the upper and lower long side portions of the element facing surface 141a on the back side (back case body 122 side). At the same time, the left and right short sides of the element facing surface 141a are erected on the back side (back case body 122 side) to integrally form a pair of left and right upright walls 144 and right upright walls 145. The upper upright wall 142 and the lower upright wall 143 face each other at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the left upright wall 144 and the right upright wall 145 face each other at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. The front case body 121 is provided with a substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped substrate accommodating portion 146 opened to the back side by a front side facing plate portion 141 and these upright walls 142 to 145, and can accommodate the main control substrate 61. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16 (a), the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 9 (b)) are located at positions facing the connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61 in the front facing plate portion 141. )) Is exposed on the surface of the main control device 60, and a recess 155 corresponding to the connector group is formed. As shown in FIG. 14, the connector group corresponding recess 155 is formed by recessing the front side facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 16A, the connector group-corresponding recess 155 is a horizontally long rectangular connector group whose bottom portion of the connector group-corresponding recess 155 faces the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 9A) of the main control board 61. The corresponding plate portion 155a is provided. The connector group corresponding plate portion 155a covers substantially the entire connector group mounting area 88 (FIG. 9 (a)) on which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 9 (a)) are mounted on the element mounting surface 61e. cover. As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b) and 12 (a) and 12 (b), the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a has the element mounting surface 61e and the front-rear direction (FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b) and (b)). They face each other with a predetermined interval (specifically, an interval of about 1.5 mm) in the left-right direction in FIGS. 12A and 12B, and the main control board 61 and the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a are opposed to each other. The fixing portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are present between them. There is some play between the fixing portions 111b to 116b and the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a.

As shown in FIGS. 8 (a) to 8 (d) and 16 (a), the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a is passed through the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a in the plate thickness direction to form a first connector. The first connector insertion hole 156, the second connector insertion hole 157, the third connector insertion hole 158, and the fourth connector insertion hole 159 through which the CN1, the second connector CN2, the third connector CN3, and the fourth connector CN4 are inserted are formed. ing. These first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are horizontally long rectangular through holes. The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are exposed to the surface of the main control device 60 by being inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, and correspond to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. It becomes possible to accept a male connector (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b) and 12 (a) and 12 (b), the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a to the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. The vertical dimension up to is set to be approximately 1 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the corresponding first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 to the lower end of the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h. Therefore, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159. The vertical dimensions of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are from the upper end of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b in the corresponding first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 to the lower end of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. Approximately 2 mm larger than the dimensions up to. Therefore, in a state where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a of the connector insertion holes 156 to 159 A total of approximately 2 mm of play occurs between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b of the connector insertion holes 156 to 159.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16A, the fifth connector CN5 and the sixth connector are located at positions facing the fifth to seventh connector mounting areas 85a to 87a of the main control board 61 in the front facing plate portion 141. A fifth connector-compatible recess 161, a sixth connector-compatible recess 162, and a seventh connector-compatible recess 163 are formed to expose the CN6 and the seventh connector CN7 to the surface of the main controller 60. As shown in FIG. 13, the recesses 161 to 163 corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors are formed by denting the front side facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. The fifth to seventh connector-compatible recesses 161 to 163 are horizontally long rectangular fifth connectors that face the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 14) of the main control board 61 at the bottom of the fifth to seventh connector-compatible recesses 161 to 163. It includes a corresponding plate portion 161a, a sixth connector compatible plate portion 162a, and a seventh connector compatible plate portion 163a.

As shown in FIGS. 8 (a) to 8 (d) and 16 (a), the fifth connector-compatible plate portion 161a is passed through the fifth connector-compatible plate portion 161a in the plate thickness direction to form the fifth connector. A fifth connector insertion hole 164 through which the CN5 is inserted is formed, and the sixth connector-compatible plate portion 162a is inserted through the sixth connector-compatible plate portion 162a in the plate thickness direction, and the sixth connector CN6 is inserted into the sixth connector-compatible plate portion 162a. A sixth connector insertion hole 165 is formed, and a seventh connector insertion hole through which the seventh connector corresponding plate portion 163a is passed through the seventh connector corresponding plate portion 163a in the plate thickness direction and the seventh connector CN7 is inserted is formed. 166 is formed. These 5th to 7th connector insertion holes 164 to 166 are horizontally long rectangular through holes. The fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are exposed to the surface of the main control device 60 by being inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 164 to 166, and correspond to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. A male connector (not shown) can be accepted.

As shown in FIGS. 8 (b) to 8 (d), the vertical dimensions of the 5th to 7th connector insertion holes 164 to 166 are the upper standing wall portions 95d to the corresponding 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7. It is set to be approximately 2 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of 97d to the lower end of the locking receiving portions 95j to 97j. Therefore, the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 164 to 166. The vertical dimensions of the 5th to 7th connector insertion holes 164 to 166 are from the upper end of the upper standing wall portions 95d to 97d in the corresponding 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7 to the lower end of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. It is approximately 3 mm larger than the size of. Therefore, in a state where the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 164 to 166, the upper standing wall portions 95d to 97d and the upper peripheral edges 164a to 166a of the connector insertion holes 164 to 166 A total of approximately 3 mm of play occurs between the lower upright wall portions 95e to 97e and the lower peripheral edge portions 164b to 166b of the connector insertion holes 164 to 166.

As described above, the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 are formed to be slightly larger than the corresponding connectors CN1 to CN7. This facilitates the work of inserting the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166 in the process of assembling the main control device 60.

Next, a configuration for assembling the main control device 60 will be described. In the process of assembling the main control device 60, the main control board 61 is screwed to the back case body 122 as described above. After that, the front case body 121 is combined with the back case body 122 so as to cover the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16A, the front side facing plate portion 141 has a front case body 121 as a main control board at four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side and upper right side) of the element facing surface 141a. Position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 used for position adjustment when the 61 is combined with the integrated back case body 122 are integrally formed. As shown in FIG. 15, the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 are formed in a cylindrical shape so as to project from the element facing surface 141a in the direction toward the main control board 61. Boss insertion holes 175 to 178 are formed at the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side and upper right side) of the main control board 61 to allow the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 to be inserted.

In the step of assembling the main control device 60, after the main control board 61 is screwed to the back case body 122, the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 of the main control board 61 correspond to the boss insertion holes 175 to 178. The free ends of the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 are inserted. After that, the front case body 121 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 123 while being guided by the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174. As a result, the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 penetrate the main control board 61 and project toward the back case body 122. As described above, in a state where the main control board 61 is screwed to the board fixing bosses 132 to 135, a predetermined distance is provided between the main control board 61 and the back side facing plate portion 123. Therefore, the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 can be projected toward the back side facing plate portion 123 from the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the lateral dimension of the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 is such that the front case body 121 moves laterally when the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178. It is set slightly larger than the diameter of the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 so as to be regulated. The boss insertion holes 175 to 178 are elongated holes extending vertically along the short sides 61c and 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimension of the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 is such that the front case body 121 is allowed to move approximately 1 mm in the vertical direction when the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 are inserted through the boss insertion holes 175 to 178. , The diameter is set to be approximately 1 mm larger than the diameter of the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174.

FIG. 17A is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device 60 when cut at a cut surface (line EE of FIG. 8A) passing through the first connector CN1 and the sixth connector CN6. As shown in FIG. 17A, the upper partition wall 124 of the back case body 122 has a front case body 121 that slides downward toward the back side facing plate portion 123 while being guided by the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174. The first guide portion 181 for guiding is integrally formed. The first guide portion 181 is provided on the upper partition wall 124 on the side opposite to the back side facing plate portion 123, and projects downward from the lower plane of the upper partition wall 124. As described above, the upper upright wall 142 of the front case body 121 stands up from the front side facing plate portion 141 toward the back case body 122. An upper outer edge portion 151 is integrally formed on the upper upright wall 142 by projecting the end portion of the upright tip upward.

FIG. 17B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device 60 showing the first guide unit 181 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 17B, the first guide portion 181 comes into contact with the upper outer edge portion 151 of the front case body 121 that slides toward the back side facing plate portion 123, and gradually lowers the front case body 121. It is provided with a first guide surface 181a for guiding the front case body 121 and a second guide surface 181b for maintaining a state in which the front case body 121 is guided downward. The first guide surface 181a is an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the rear (back side facing plate portion 123 side). The front case body 121 is guided downward by approximately 1 mm by the first guide surface 181a. The second guide surface 181b is a horizontal plane existing approximately 1 mm below the lower plane of the upper partition wall 124. The front case body 121 is maintained in a state of being guided substantially 2 mm below the lower plane of the upper partition wall 124 while the upper outer edge portion 151 is in contact with the second guide surface 181b.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the lower partition wall 125 of the back case body 122 has an upper front case body 121 that is guided by the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 and slides toward the back side facing plate portion 123. A second guide portion 182 that guides the user is integrally formed. The second guide portion 182 is provided on the back side facing plate portion 123 side of the first guide portion 181 so as to guide the front case body 121 in a state of being guided downward by the first guide portion 181 upward. It projects upward from the upper plane of the lower partition wall 125. As described above, the lower upright wall 143 stands up from the front side facing plate portion 141 toward the back case body 122. On the lower upright wall 143, the lower outer edge portion 152 is integrally formed by projecting the end portion of the upright tip downward.

FIG. 17C is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device 60 showing the second guide unit 182 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 17C, the second guide portion 182 comes into contact with the lower outer edge portion 152 of the front case body 121 that slides toward the back side facing plate portion 123, and gradually moves the front case body 121. The first guide surface 182a that guides upward and the front case body 121 are maintained in a state of being guided upward so as to be able to fix the front case body 121 to the back case body 122 in a state of being guided upward. It is provided with a second guide surface 182b. The first guide surface 182a is an inclined surface that is inclined upward toward the rear (back side facing plate portion 123 side). The front case body 121 is guided approximately 1 mm upward by the first guide surface 182a. The second guide surface 182b is a horizontal plane existing approximately 1 mm above the upper plane of the lower partition wall 125. The front case body 121 is maintained in a state of being guided approximately 1 mm above the upper plane of the lower partition wall 125 while the lower outer edge portion 152 is in contact with the second guide surface 182b.

The second guide portion 182 is provided at a position where the upper outer edge portion 151 of the front case body 121 comes into contact with the lower outer edge portion 152 of the front case body 121 after the state of contact with the first guide portion 181 is resolved. Has been done. Therefore, after the front case body 121 is guided downward by the first guide portion 181, it is in a state where it is not in contact with either the first guide portion 181 or the second guide portion 182, and then the second guide portion 182. Guided upwards by 182.

Here, regarding the flow of the process of combining and fixing the front case body 121 to the back case body 122 in which the main control board 61 is integrated, FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c) and FIGS. 18 (a). And FIG. 18 (b) will be described. 18 (a) and 18 (b) show the case where the main control device 60 is cut at the cut surface (line EE of FIG. 8 (a)) passing through the first connector CN1 and the sixth connector CN6 in the process of assembling the main control device 60. It is a vertical sectional view of the main control device 60.

As shown in FIG. 18A, in a state where the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 (FIG. 15) are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 (FIG. 15), the front case body 121 is attached to the back side facing plate portion 123. By sliding toward, the front case body 121 can be combined with the back case body 122 in which the main control board 61 is integrated while being guided by the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174. In the process of sliding the front case body 121 toward the back side facing plate portion 123, the upper standing wall 142, the upper outer edge portion 151, the lower standing wall 143, the lower outer edge portion 152, and the left standing wall 144 of the front case body 121. (FIG. 15) and the right upright wall 145 (FIG. 15) are the main control board 61, the upper partition wall 124 of the back case body 122, the lower partition wall 125, the left first partition wall 126 (FIG. 14), and the left side first. It enters between the two partition walls 127 (FIG. 14), the right first partition wall 128 (FIG. 14), and the right second partition wall 129 (FIG. 14). Then, the upper outer edge portion 151 of the front case body 121 comes into contact with the first guide portion 181 provided on the upper partition wall 124 of the back case body 122.

After that, the front case body 121 is gradually guided downward along the first guide surface 181a of the first guide portion 181, and the state of being guided downward by the second guide surface 181b is maintained. As described above, the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 are formed as elongated holes extending in the lateral direction of the main control board 61. Therefore, by sliding the front case body 121 toward the back side facing plate portion 123 in a state where the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the front case body 121 can be moved laterally. The front case body 121 can be guided downward by the first guide portion 181 within a range permitted by the shape of the boss insertion holes 175 to 178.

By guiding the front case body 121 downward by the first guide portion 181, the position of the main control board 61 with respect to the front case body 121 is moved upward, and the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159, The positions of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 (FIG. 8 (a)) with respect to 164 to 166 (FIG. 8 (a)) move upward. As shown in FIG. 18B, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 (FIG. 8A) are the corresponding connectors in a state where the front case body 121 is guided downward by the first guide portion 181. It is located at the center of the insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166 (FIG. 8 (a)) in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the front case body 121 is further back sided in a state where the front case body 121 is guided downward by the second guide surface 181b (FIG. 17B) of the first guide portion 181. When the front case body 121 is guided downward by the second guide surface 181b when slid toward the facing plate portion 123, that is, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 (FIG. 8A). ) Is located at the center of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 (FIG. 8 (a)) in the vertical direction, and is one of the free end sides of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7. It can be in a state of being inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166.

In this state, the play that exists between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Dimensions and play that exists between the lower upright walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. The size of is about 1 mm. Further, the play dimensions existing between the upper standing wall portions 95d to 97d of the 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7 and the upper peripheral edges 164a to 166a of the 5th to 7th connector insertion holes 164 to 166, And the dimensions of the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 95e to 97e of the 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7 and the lower peripheral edges 164b to 166b of the 5th to 7th connector insertion holes 164 to 166. Is approximately 1.5 mm.

In this way, the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178, which are elongated holes extending in the lateral direction of the main control board 61, to regulate the lateral movement of the front case body 121, and the first By adjusting the vertical position of the front case body 121 by the guide portion 181, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 are located at the center of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166 in the vertical direction. In addition to being in this state, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166.

In the configuration not provided with the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 and the boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the main control board is used to insert the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 into the corresponding seven connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166. It is necessary to appropriately adjust the position of the front case body 121 with respect to 61, which reduces the efficiency of the work of combining the front case body 121 with the back case body 122 in which the main control board 61 is integrated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after inserting the four position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 into the corresponding four boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the front case body 121 faces the back side along the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174. By sliding toward the plate portion 123, it is not necessary to finely adjust the position of the front case body 121 with respect to the main control board 61, and the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 correspond to the connector insertion holes 156 to 159,164 to. It can be in a state of being inserted through 166. The seven connectors CN1 to CN7 are located at the center of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 in the vertical direction of the seven connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 164 to Since it is inserted through the 166, the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIGS. 10A to 10D) and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are locked. Lower peripheral edge portions 156b of the connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166 (FIGS. 8 (a) to 8 (d)) corresponding to the receiving portions 95j to 97j (FIGS. 8 (b) to 8 (d)). It is possible to prevent collision with ~ 159b and 164b to 166b. As a result, in the process of assembling the main control device 60, the work of inserting the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 into the corresponding seven connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166 is simplified, and the efficiency of the work is improved. be able to.

After the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c), further When the front case body 121 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 123, the lower outer edge portion 152 of the front case body 121 comes into contact with the second guide portion 182 provided on the lower partition wall 125 of the back case body 122. To do. The front case body 121 slid toward the back side facing plate portion 123 was gradually guided upward along the first guide surface 182a of the second guide portion 182, and was guided upward by the second guide surface 182b. The state is maintained. As described above, the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 are formed as elongated holes extending in the lateral direction of the main control board 61. Therefore, by sliding the front case body 121 toward the back side facing plate portion 123 in a state where the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the front case body 121 can be moved laterally. The front case body 121 can be guided upward by the second guide portion 182 within a range permitted by the shape of the boss insertion holes 175 to 178.

As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b) and 12 (a) and 12 (b), the first to fourth connectors are inserted while the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide portion 182. The lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the holes 156 to 159 are in a state of being close to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Dimensions of lower play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Is from the dimension of the upper play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Is also small. The details of the lower play will be described later.

As described above, in a state where a part of the free end side of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166, the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 The dimensions of the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 95e to 97e and the lower peripheral edges 164b to 166b of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164 to 166 are the dimensions of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to. It is larger than the size of the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Therefore, when the front case body 121 is guided by the second guide portion 182 and moves upward, the lower standing wall portions 95e to 97e of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted into the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes. It does not come into contact with the lower peripheral edges 164b to 166b of 164 to 166 and hinder the upward movement of the front case body 121. As a result, the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are replaced with the lower standing wall portions 101c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, leaving it to the guidance of the second guide portion 182. It is possible to approach ~ 104c.

As described above, the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are formed on the standing tip side (free end side) of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c over a predetermined range. On the other hand, the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h do not exist on the base end side (bottom plate portions 101a to 104a side) of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c, and the base end side is a smooth flat surface. .. As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b) and 12 (a) and 12 (b), in the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a of the front case body 121, the front case body 121 is moved upward by the second guide portion 182. By being guided, it enters under the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h and approaches the smooth surface. As a result, the second guide until the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are sufficiently close to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The front case body 121 can be guided upward by the portion 182.

After that, when the front case body 121 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 123 along the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174, the free ends of the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 come into contact with the back side facing plate portion 123. As a result, the front case body 121 cannot be slid further toward the back side facing plate portion 123, and the slide for combining the front case body 121 with the back case body 122 is completed. The front case body 121 is fixed to the back case body 122 in a state where the slide is completed.

Next, a configuration for fixing the front case body 121 to the back case body 122 will be described. As described above, the left side upright wall 144 and the right side upright wall 145 stand up from the front side facing plate portion 141 toward the back case body 122. As shown in FIG. 16A, the left side upright wall 144 is integrally formed with the front side first case fixing boss 183 at the end of the upright point of the left side upright wall 144, and the right side upright wall 145 is formed with the front side first case fixing boss 183. The front side second case fixing boss 184 and the front side third case fixing boss 185 are integrally formed at the end of the standing tip of the right side standing wall 145. The front side first case fixing boss 183 is provided substantially in the center of the left side upright wall 144 in the vertical direction, and protrudes to the left from the left side upright wall 144. The front side second case fixing boss 184 and the front side third case fixing boss 185 are provided at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and project to the right from the right standing wall 145. Through holes 183a to 185a through which screws 179 for fixing the front case body 121 to the back case body 122 are inserted are formed in these case fixing bosses 183 to 185.

As shown in FIG. 16B, the back side facing plate portion 123 of the back case body 122 is integrally formed with the back side first case fixing boss 186 on the short side portion on the left side of the back side facing plate portion 123. The back side second case fixing boss 187 and the back side third case fixing boss 188 are integrally formed on the short side portion on the right side of the back side facing plate portion 123. The back side first case fixing boss 186 corresponds to the front side first case fixing boss 183, the back side second case fixing boss 187 corresponds to the front side second case fixing boss 184, and the back side third case fixing boss 188 corresponds to the back side third case fixing boss 188. It corresponds to the front side third case fixed boss 185. The back side first case fixing boss 186 is provided at a position between the left side first section wall 126 and the left side second section wall 127 in the vertical direction, and protrudes to the left from the back side facing plate portion 123. Further, the back side second case fixing boss 187 and the back side third case fixing boss 188 are provided at a predetermined distance between the right side first section wall 128 and the right side second section wall 129 in the vertical direction. , Protrudes to the right from the back side facing plate portion 123. The case fixing bosses 186 to 188 are formed with screw holes 186a to 188a that allow the front case body 121 to be screw-fixed.

FIG. 19A is formed in the through hole 183a formed in the front side first case fixing boss 183 and the back side first case fixing boss 186 before the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide portion 182. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship with a screw hole 186a, and FIG. 19B is formed on the front side 1st case fixing boss 183 after the front case body 121 is guided upward by the 2nd guide part 182. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship between the through hole 183a formed and the screw hole 186a formed in the back side first case fixing boss 186. Before the front case body 121 is guided upward, as shown in FIG. 19A, the through hole 183a of the front side first case fixing boss 183 and the screw hole 186a of the back side first case fixing boss 186 are , Vertically offset. Although not shown, similarly, through holes 184a and 185a (FIG. 16A) of the front side second case fixing boss 184 and the front side third case fixing boss 185, and the back side second case fixing boss 187 and the back side third The screw holes 187a and 188a (FIG. 16B) of the case fixing boss 188 are displaced in the vertical direction. Therefore, the screws cannot be fixed as they are.

After the front case body 121 is guided upward, as shown in FIG. 19B, the deviation between the through hole 183a of the front side first case fixing boss 183 and the screw hole 186a of the back side first case fixing boss 186. Is resolved, and the through hole 183a and the screw hole 186a are in communication with each other. Although not shown, similarly, through holes 184a and 185a (FIG. 16A) of the front side second case fixing boss 184 and the front side third case fixing boss 185, and the back side second case fixing boss 187 and the back side third The screw holes 187a and 188a (FIG. 16B) of the case fixing boss 188 are in communication with each other. As a result, the front case body 121 and the back case body 122 can be fixed with screws. The front case body 121 and the back case body 122 cannot be fixed by screws unless the front case body 121 is guided upward, so that the front case body 121 is not guided upward. It is prevented that the front case body 121 and the back case body 122 are fixed in a state where the upward guidance is performed only halfway.

In the front case body 121, the front side first case fixing boss 183, the front side second case fixing boss 184, and the front side third case fixing boss 185 (FIG. 16A) are fixed to the front side first case to the back side first case. It is fixed to the back case body 122 by being screwed to the boss 186, the back side second case fixing boss 187, and the back side third case fixing boss 188 (FIG. 16B). As a result, a square box-shaped (substantially rectangular parallelepiped) substrate box 62 having a predetermined internal space is formed, and the main control substrate 61 is housed in the internal space of the substrate box 62. ..

In a state where the front case body 121 is fixed to the back case body 122, the upper upright wall 142, the upper outer edge portion 151, the lower upright wall 143, the lower outer edge portion 152, the left upright wall 144 and the right side upright of the front case body 121. The wall 145 is inserted between the partition walls 124 to 129 of the back case body 122 and the main control board 61. Various elements 91 to 94 (FIG. 9A) mounted on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 are housed between the main control board 61 and the front case body 121, and the first to first ones. The 7 connectors CN1 to CN7 (FIG. 8 (a)) are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166 (FIG. 8 (a)) and exposed on the surface side of the front case body 121. As shown in FIG. 8A, except for the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7, the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 14) of the main control board 61 is covered with the front case body 121. Further, the back surface 61f (FIG. 15) of the main control board 61 faces the back side facing plate portion 123 at a predetermined interval.

Here, with respect to the details of the play occurring around the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, FIGS. 8 (a) to (d), FIGS. 11 (a), (b) and 12 (a), (b) are shown. It will be explained with reference to it.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b) and 12 (a) and 12 (b), one end side terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, and the third connector CN3. The fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the terminal 114 and the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4 are the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 156b to the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. It extends so as to straddle the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 from the main control board 61. Further, as already described with reference to FIGS. 11A and 12B, the fixing portions 112b and 116b of the other end side terminal 112 of the first connector CN1 and the other end side terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4 are , The upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 extend so as to straddle along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. There is.

As described above, the lower side existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. The play dimension of the above is the upper side existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Smaller than the size of play. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a fraudulent jig such as a wire into the play on the lower side to illegally manipulate the signal. One end side of the first connector CN1 in which the fixing portions 111b and 113b to 115b extend so as to straddle between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b along the element mounting surface 61e. The signal lines set at the terminal 111, the terminal 113 at the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 at the third connector CN3, and the terminal 115 at one end of the fourth connector CN4 can be preferentially protected from the fraudulent activity.

The size of the play on the lower side is preferably 0.8 mm or less, more preferably 0.5 mm or less. By setting the play dimension on one end side to 0.8 mm or less, a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire is inserted from the play on the lower side, and the fixing portions 111b, 113b to 115b are the lower standing wall portions. A fraudulent act of illegally manipulating the signals set in the terminals 111, 113 to 115 extending so as to straddle the element mounting surface 61e between 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b. Can be prevented. By setting the size of the lower play to 0.5 mm or less, it is difficult to insert the fraudulent jig into the lower play, and the effect of preventing the fraudulent activity can be enhanced. The details of the signal lines allocated to the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 will be described later.

As described above, the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 have locking receiving portions 101h to 104h on the lower side surfaces of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. It is formed. As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b) and 12 (a) and 12 (b), the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the first to fourth connector insertion holes. It exists on the standing tip side (free end side) of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c rather than the lower play existing between the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b of 156 to 159. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the front side facing plate portion 141 side existing on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the main control board 61 is illegally used for play on the lower side. Insert the jig and apply the jig to the terminal 111 on one end of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 on the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 on the third connector CN3, and the terminal 115 on one end of the fourth connector CN4. The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h can prevent the insertion of the fraudulent jig in response to the fraudulent act of contacting the user. This can make the fraudulent activity even more difficult.

In a state where a part of the free end side of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166 (see FIG. 18B), the lower upright wall portion 101c There is a play of common dimensions in the vertical direction between the ~ 104c and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b. The vertical direction is the direction in which the front case body 121 is guided by the second guide portion 182. Therefore, when the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide portion 182 while the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the corresponding boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the first to fourth connectors are used. In CN1 to CN4, it is prevented that the play between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b is uneven. As a result, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b can be uniformly brought close to the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a.

As described above, the connector group corresponding recess 155 is formed by recessing the front side facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 13, the side surface 155b of the connector group-corresponding recess 155 stands up substantially vertically from the connector group-corresponding plate portion 155a in the direction opposite to that of the main control board 61. As a result, it is difficult to insert a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire into the gap between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a. As described above, the recesses 161 to 163 corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors are formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 13, the side surfaces 161b to 163b of the recesses 161 to 163 corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors are directed from the plate portions 161a to 163a corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors in the direction opposite to the main control board 61. It stands almost vertically. As a result, the gap between the 5th connector CN5 and the 5th connector compatible plate portion 161a, the gap between the 6th connector CN6 and the 6th connector compatible plate portion 162a, and the gap between the 7th connector CN7 and the 7th connector compatible plate portion 163a. It is difficult to insert a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire into the gap.

Next, the sealing seal 191 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 14, the back case body 122 has a back side sticking plate portion 192 between the back side second case fixing boss 187 and the back side third case fixing boss 188 on the right short side portion of the back side facing plate portion 123. It is integrally formed. Further, in the front case body 121, the front side sticking plate portion 193 is integrally formed at a position where the back side sticking plate portion 192 and the substrate box 62 overlap in the thickness direction on the short side portion on the right side of the front side facing plate portion 141.

A plurality of sets of screw holes communicating with each other are formed in these two sticking plate portions 192 and 193, and screws (not shown) are screwed into these screw holes. As the screw, a well-known screw that can be attached and detached is used. By screwing the screws as described above, the two sticking plate portions 192 and 193 are fixed. Then, as shown in FIG. 13, a sealing sticker 191 is attached to the sticking plate portions 192 and 193 so as to straddle the boundary between the two. When the seal sticker 191 is peeled off after being stuck, the adhesive layer remains on the sticking plate portion 192, 193 side, and the sticker cannot be re-sticked. Since the sealing seal 191 is provided, if the substrate box 62 is illegally opened, it can be found.

As shown in FIG. 13, the sticker cover 194 is fixed to the two sticker portions 192 and 193 (FIG. 14) so as to cover the sticker seal 191 from the outside. The sticking part cover 194 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the sealing seal 191 can be visually recognized through the sticking part cover 194. The sticking portion cover 194 may not be provided.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main control device 60 having the above configuration has an edge on the side where the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are exposed to the surface. Is mounted on the upper side and the edges of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 exposed on the surface are located on the lower side. By the way, by opening the game machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the installed state in the game hall, the back side of the game machine main body 12 can be visually recognized. In this case, the main control device 60 constitutes the back portion of the gaming machine main body 12, and further, since the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, the gaming machine main body 12 is removed. By opening the frame 11, the surface of the front case body 121 becomes visible. The back pack unit 15 may cover all or part of the main control device 60 from the rear. Even in this case, since the back pack 72 is transparently formed, the surface of the front case body 121 can be visually recognized by opening the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, the main control device 60 includes a main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 20, the above-mentioned MPU 63 and the power failure monitoring circuit 201 are mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 63 includes a main ROM 65 and a main RAM 66 in addition to the main CPU 64, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 63 has an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. It is not essential that the main ROM 65 and the main RAM 66 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 63, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of the control device other than the main control device 60.

The main ROM 65 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as NOR type flash memory and NAND type flash memory, and is used as read-only. The main ROM 65 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main CPU 64.

The main RAM 66 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 66 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 65 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 66 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 65.

The MPU 63 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring circuit 201 is connected to the input side of the MPU 63. The power failure monitoring circuit 201 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors the voltage of DC36V, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) of AC100V in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power (specifically, DC36V, DC24V, DC12V and DC5V) required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77 and the like is generated. At the same time, the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply / launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

A special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39 are connected to the output side of the MPU 63. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a, a second special figure display unit 37b, a first special figure hold display unit 37c, and a second special figure hold display unit 37d. Are all connected to the output side of the MPU 63. Similarly, the normal drawing unit 38 is provided with a normal drawing display unit 38a and a normal drawing holding display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 63. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 63 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32c (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is executed in the MPU 63 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the general electric accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the general electric accessory 34c (see FIG. 21) described later is executed in the MPU 63 so that the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Will be done. Further, in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode, the display control of the special figure unit 37 is executed in the MPU 63. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly indicated, the display control of the general drawing unit 38 is executed in the MPU 63. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the display control of the round display unit 39 is executed in the MPU 63.

A voice emission control device 70 is connected to the output side of the MPU 63. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the voice emission control device 70 via the seventh connector CN7. Details of these various commands will be described later. The voice emission control device 70 drives and controls the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 90. Is. The display control device 90 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 70.

A payout control device 77 is connected to the input side and the output side of the MPU 63. The payout control device 77 includes a payout side MPU 221. The payout side MPU 221 has a built-in payout side ROM 223, a payout side RAM 224, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like, in addition to the payout side CPU 222 which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. ..

The payout side ROM 223 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage holding such as NOR type flash memory and NAND type flash memory, and is used as read-only. The payout side ROM 223 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 222.

The payout side RAM 224 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 224 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout side ROM 223 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 224 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 223.

The payout side MPU 221 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The payout side CPU 222 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 64. The payout control device 77 is based on, for example, a winning determination result for a winning portion (general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, and through gate 35). Various prize ball commands such as 1 prize ball command, 10 prize ball commands, and 15 prize ball commands are output. The 1 prize ball command is a command for making the payout side CPU 222 recognize that one game ball should be paid out, and the 10 prize ball command indicates that 10 game balls should be paid out. It is a command for making the payout side CPU 222 recognize, and the 15 prize ball command is a command for making the payout side CPU 222 recognize that the payout of 15 game balls should be executed. By receiving the prize ball command from the main CPU 64, the payout side CPU 222 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out.

The payout side CPU 222 monitors whether or not the game ball can be paid out normally, and if it is determined that the game ball cannot be paid out normally, the payout side RAM 224 is not paid out. Even in the situation where the prize ball number information is stored, the payout device 76 is stopped. Further, the payout side CPU 222 transmits a payout restriction command indicating that the payout cannot be normally performed in this way to the main CPU 64. When the main CPU 64 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 execute a notification indicating that the game ball cannot be paid out normally. A notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70 so as to be performed. As a state in which it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally, there are a state in which the lower plate 56a is full with the game balls, a state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with the game balls, and a payout device 76. There are an abnormal payout state in which the game machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the game machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is released from the inner frame 13. ..

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 (FIG. 2) to the lower plate 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 222. .. The payout side CPU 222 identifies that the game ball is in a full tank state when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state in which the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In the case, it is specified that the full tank state is released. When the payout side CPU 222 determines that the tank is full, the payout side CPU 222 executes a process for stopping the payout of the game ball, and transmits a full tank state command indicating that the tank is full to the main CPU 64. To do. In addition, when the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a full tank state release command indicating that the full tank state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 64. .. When the main CPU 64 receives the full tank status command, it grasps that the tank is full, and when it receives the full tank status release command, it grasps that the full tank status has been released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 (FIG. 2) to the payout device 76 (FIG. 2), and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 222. Will be done. The payout side CPU 222 identifies that the game ball is in a ballless state when the ball non-detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball, and when the ball non-detection sensor cancels the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected. Identify that the ballless state has been released. When the payout side CPU 222 determines that the ball is in a state of no ball, the payout side CPU 222 executes a process for stopping the payout of the game ball, and transmits a ball stateless command indicating that the ball is in a state of no ball to the main CPU 64. To do. In addition, when the ballless state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a ballless state release command indicating that the ballless state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 64. .. The main CPU 64 grasps that the ball is in the ballless state when the ballless state command is received, and also grasps that the ballless state is released when the ballless state release command is received.

The payout device 76 (FIG. 2) is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 222. The payout side CPU 222 identifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 222 identifies that the payout is in an abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball even though the payout device 76 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is paid out. , It is specified that the payout abnormal state is canceled when the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled. When the payout side CPU 222 determines that the payout abnormal state is specified, the payout side CPU 222 executes a process of stopping the payout of the game ball, and transmits a payout abnormal state command indicating the payout abnormal state to the main CPU 64. Further, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a payout abnormal state release command indicating that the payout abnormal state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 64. The main CPU 64 grasps that the payout abnormal state is in the payout abnormal state when the payout abnormal state command is received, and also knows that the payout abnormal state is canceled when the payout abnormal state release command is received.

As shown in FIG. 20, a front door opening sensor 225 is connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 221, and the detection result of the front door open sensor 225 is input to the payout side CPU 222. The front door opening sensor 225 outputs a detection signal output to the payout side CPU 222 when the front door frame 14 (FIG. 2) is opened with respect to the inner frame 13 (FIG. 2) from the LOW state. At the same time, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the detection signal output to the payout side CPU 222 is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state. The payout side CPU 222 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the detection signal received from the front door open sensor 225 is in the LOW state, and the detection signal received from the front door open sensor 225 is It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when it is in the HI state. Further, the payout side CPU 222 sends a front door opening command to the main CPU 64 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state from the closed state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is changed from the open state to the closed state. A front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 64 at the same timing. The front door opening command and the front door closing command are transmitted from the payout side CPU 222 to the main side CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. The main CPU 64 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the front door closing command is received. ..

As shown in FIG. 20, a main body opening sensor 226 is connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 221, and the detection result of the main body open sensor 226 is input to the payout side CPU 222. The main body open sensor 226 outputs a detection signal output to the payout side CPU 222 when the game machine main body 12 (FIG. 2) is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (FIG. 1) from the LOW state to the HI state. At the same time, when the game machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the detection signal output to the payout side CPU 222 is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state. The payout side CPU 222 identifies that the game machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the detection signal received from the main body open sensor 226 is in the LOW state, and the detection signal received from the main body open sensor 226 is in the HI state. In the case of, it is specified that the game machine main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 222 transmits a main body opening command to the main CPU 64 at the timing when the game machine main body 12 is specified to be in the open state from the closed state, and specifies that the game machine main body 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 64 at the timing. The main CPU 64 identifies that the game machine main body 12 is in the open state when the main body open command is received, and specifies that the game machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the main body close command is received.

As shown in FIG. 20, an external terminal plate 79 is connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 221. The information output from the payout side CPU 222 to the external terminal board 79 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out. As described above, the game hall management computer receives various information from the main control device 60 and the payout control device 77 through the external terminal plate 79. Then, according to the various received information, the ball ejection rate (the ratio of the number of gaming balls to be paid out until 100 gaming balls are discharged from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10) and the like are calculated. , The execution mode of paying out the game ball in the pachinko machine 10 and the like are grasped.

Next, with respect to the electronic devices connected to the input side and the output side of the MPU 63 via the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, see FIGS. 21, 22 and 23 (a) to 23 (c). I will explain while. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a connection mode between the MPU 63 and various electronic devices. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting contents of the terminals 111 and 112 of the first connector CN1, and FIG. 23 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting contents of each terminal 113 of the second connector CN2. 23 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting contents of each terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and FIG. 23 (c) shows the setting contents of the terminals 115 and 116 of the fourth connector CN4. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating.

First, the electrical wiring connected to the terminals 111 and 112 of the first connector CN1 will be described.

As described above, the first connector CN1 includes 17 one-end side terminals 111 and 17 other-end side terminals 112. The fixing portion 111b of the one-end side terminal 111 extends so as to straddle between the lower upright wall portion 101c and the lower peripheral edge portion 156b of the first connector insertion hole 156 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. The fixing portion 112b of the other end side terminal 112 straddles between the upper standing wall portion 101b and the upper peripheral edge portion 156a of the first connector insertion hole 156 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. It is extended like this. As described above, the lower play existing between the lower upright wall portion 101c of the first connector CN1 and the lower peripheral edge portion 156b of the first connector insertion hole 156 is the upper upright wall portion of the first connector CN1. It is smaller than the upper play existing between 101b and the upper peripheral edge portion 156a of the first connector insertion hole 156. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the conductive misuse of a wire or the like is performed from the front side facing plate portion 141 side existing on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the main control board 61. The terminal on one end is protected preferentially over the terminal 112 on the other end with respect to an illegal act of inserting a jig to illegally manipulate the signal.

As shown in FIG. 22, the 17 one-end side terminals 111 included in the first connector CN1 are n-th terminals having n as an odd number of any of 1 to 33, and specifically, the first terminal. , 3rd terminal, 5th terminal, ... 33rd terminal. Further, the 17 other end side terminals 112 included in the first connector CN1 are m terminals in which m is an even number of any of 2 to 34, and specifically, the second terminal and the fourth terminal. Terminals, 6th terminal, ... 34th terminal.

As shown in FIG. 21, the external terminal plate 79, the payout control device 77, and the power supply / emission control device 78 are electrically connected to the MPU 63 via the first relay board PB1.

The 11th connector CN11, the 21st connector CN21, the 22nd connector CN22, and the 23rd connector CN23 are mounted on the first relay board PB1. The eleventh connector CN11 is electrically connected to the first connector CN1, the 21st connector CN21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 79, and the 22nd connector CN22 is electrically connected to the payout control device 77. The 23rd connector CN23 is electrically connected to the power supply / emission control device 78.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, a signal line for enabling transmission of an external signal from the main CPU 64 to the external terminal plate 79 is connected to the first terminal to the tenth terminal of the first connector CN1. ing. GND (ground) is set for the first terminal and the second terminal of the first connector CN1. The main control board 61 and the first relay board PB1 are provided with a GND plane (not shown) so that the signal on the main control board 61 and the signal on the first relay board PB1 are based on a common potential. It is set. The first terminal and the second terminal of the first connector CN1 are electrically connected to the GND plane of the main control board 61.

A signal line for transmitting an external signal from the main CPU 64 to the external terminal plate 79 is connected to the third terminal to the tenth terminal of the first connector CN1. The external signals transmitted from the main CPU 64 to the external terminal board 79 via the 3rd to 10th terminals include a signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress and a support mode in the high frequency support mode. A signal indicating that there is a signal, a signal indicating that one game has been completed, and a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are out port 24a, general winning opening 31, general winning opening 32, special electric winning device 32, and first operating opening 33. And a signal indicating that the game ball has been discharged from the game area PA through any of the second operating ports 34, a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and a game ball in the second operating port 34. A signal indicating that the ball has entered is included.

Wiring for electrically connecting the main control board 61 and the payout control device 77 is connected to the 11th to 17th terminals and the 19th terminal of the first connector CN1. A signal line for enabling serial communication between the main CPU 64 and the payout side CPU 222 is connected to the eleventh terminal to the thirteenth terminal of the first connector CN1. The serial communication is an asynchronous communication (synchronous communication) in which data is transmitted and received at a predetermined communication speed without exchanging clocks on the transmitting side and the receiving side, and also a transmission line for transmission and reception. It is a full-duplex communication provided with a transmission line for. It should be noted that the main CPU 64 and the payout control device 77 may be configured to perform half-duplex communication in which data is transmitted and received while switching between transmission and reception using one transmission line, and the transmission side and the reception side may be used. It may be configured to perform synchronous communication in which clocks are exchanged with each other. Further, parallel communication may be performed between the main CPU 64 and the payout control device 77.

A signal line is connected to the eleventh terminal as a transmission line for the main CPU 64 to receive various payout reception commands from the payout side CPU 222. A GND (ground) is set at the twelfth terminal, and the twelfth terminal is electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61. A signal line serving as a transmission line for the main CPU 64 to transmit various payout transmission signals to the payout side CPU 222 is connected to the thirteenth terminal.

The payout reception commands include the above-mentioned payout restriction command, front door open command, front door close command, main body open command, main body close command, full tank state command, full tank state release command, ball no state command, and ball no state release. Includes commands, payout abnormal status commands, and payout abnormal status release commands. The eleventh terminal on which the main CPU 64 receives various payout / receive commands is the one-end terminal 111 which is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraudulent jig in the first connector CN1. By preventing fraudulent acts on the signal line of the payout reception command, the front door closing command, the main body closing command, the full tank state canceling command, the ballless state canceling command, or the payout abnormal state canceling command is illegally transmitted. , The open state of the front door frame 14, the open state of the game machine main body 12, the full tank state, the ballless state, or the payout abnormal state can be prevented from being illegally released.

The payout transmission command includes various prize ball commands (1 prize ball command, 10 prize ball commands, and 15 prize ball commands) already described. The thirteenth terminal on which the main CPU 64 receives various payout transmission commands is one end side terminal 111 which is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraudulent jig in the first connector CN1. By preventing fraudulent acts on the signal line of the payout transmission command, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being fraudulently paid out due to the act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line. it can.

A GND (ground) is set at the 14th terminal, and the 14th terminal is electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61. A payout reset signal is set at the 15th terminal. The payout reset signal is a signal for causing the payout side CPU 222 to execute a process corresponding to the power cutoff when the main CPU 64 identifies the occurrence of the power cutoff. The main CPU 64 monitors the power failure signal received from the power failure monitoring circuit 201, and when the occurrence of power interruption is identified, the payout reset signal is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state. The payout side CPU 222 executes a process for initializing the payout side RAM 224 when the fall of the payout reset signal is detected. By initializing the payout side RAM 224, the information stored in the payout side RAM 224 is cleared.

The fifteenth terminal on which the main CPU 64 receives the payout reset signal is the one-end terminal 111 which is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraudulent jig in the first connector CN1. By preventing fraudulent acts on the signal line of the payout reset signal, it is possible to prevent the payout side RAM 224 from being fraudulently reset due to the act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line. it can. As described above, the payout side CPU 222 transmits information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out to the management computer of the game hall via the external terminal plate 79. By preventing the payout side RAM 224 from being reset illegally, it is possible that the management computer cannot accurately grasp the number of game balls that have been paid out due to the illegal transmission of the information. Can be prevented. Further, by preventing the payout side RAM 224 from being illegally reset, the information about the full tank state, the ballless state, or the payout abnormal state stored in the payout side RAM 224 is illegally cleared. Can be prevented.

A signal line for the main CPU 64 to receive a firing status signal from the power / firing control device 78 is connected to the 16th terminal of the first connector CN1, and the main CPU 64 powers / fires to the 17th terminal. A signal line for transmitting a launch permission signal to the control device 78 is connected. The main CPU 64 transmits a launch permission signal to the power supply / launch control device 78, provided that the launch status signal is received from the power supply / launch control device 78. The launch state signal is a signal indicating that a launch operation is being performed on the launch operation device 28, and the launch permission signal is for causing the power supply / launch control device 78 to execute a process of launching a game ball. It is a signal of. By receiving the launch status signal from the power supply / launch control device 78, the main CPU 64 grasps that the launch operation is being performed on the launch operation device 28, and executes the launch control process. In the launch control process, a launch permission signal is transmitted to the launch operation device 28 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, which is a predetermined launch cycle, in a situation where the launch operation is continued.

The 17th terminal to which the main CPU 64 transmits a firing permission signal is one end side terminal 111 which is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraudulent jig in the first connector CN1. Since fraudulent acts on the signal line of the launch permission signal are prevented, an act of transmitting an fraudulent signal to the signal line is performed, and the launch of the game ball is performed in a predetermined firing cycle (specifically, 0. It is possible to prevent the fire from being fired at a cycle shorter than (6 seconds cycle).

A signal line for the main CPU 64 to receive the prize ball permission signal from the payout side CPU 222 is connected to the 19th terminal of the first connector CN1. Is it possible for the prize ball permission signal to transmit a prize ball command (one prize ball command, 10 prize ball commands, or 15 prize ball commands) from the main CPU 64 to the payout side CPU 222? It is a signal indicating whether or not. When the prize ball permission signal is in the HI state, the prize ball command can be transmitted, and when the prize ball permission signal is in the LOW state, the prize ball command cannot be transmitted. The prize ball permission signal is set to the HI state when the value of the unpaid counter provided in the payout side RAM 224 is "0", and is set to the LOW state when the value of the unpaid counter is 1 or more. Will be done. The unpaid counter is a counter for the paying-side CPU 222 to grasp the number of unpaid game balls.

The 19th terminal on which the main CPU 64 receives the prize ball permission signal is the one-end side terminal 111 which is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraudulent jig in the first connector CN1. Since fraudulent activity on the signal line of the prize ball permission signal is prevented, fraudulent activity of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line is performed and the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 224. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the prize ball command is illegally transmitted from the main CPU 64 to the payout side CPU 222 even though is not "0".

A signal line for electrically connecting the power supply / emission control device 78 and the main control device 60 is connected to the 18th terminal and the 20th to 34th terminals of the first connector CN1. Wiring for supplying the element drive voltage of DC5V is connected to the 18th terminal and the 20th terminal.

A signal line for the main CPU 64 to receive the RAM erasure signal from the power supply / emission control device 78 is connected to the 21st terminal. The power / firing control device 78 is provided with a RAM erasing switch that is operated when the data stored in the main RAM 66 is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is open for business. The RAM erase signal is a signal transmitted from the power supply / emission control device 78 to the main CPU 64 when the RAM erase switch is pressed.

The 21st terminal on which the main CPU 64 receives the RAM erasing signal is the one-end terminal 111 which is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraudulent jig in the first connector CN1. Since fraudulent acts on the signal line of the RAM erase signal are prevented, an act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line is performed and the data stored in the main RAM 66 is illegally erased. Can be prevented.

GND (ground) is set for the 22nd terminal, the 24th terminal, the 26th terminal, the 28th terminal, the 30th terminal, the 33rd terminal, and the 34th terminal. These terminals are electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61.

A signal line for supplying a backup power supply voltage (VBB) is connected to the 23rd terminal. The wiring for supplying the power supply voltage of DC12V is connected to the 25th terminal and the 27th terminal, and the signal line for supplying the power supply voltage of DC24V is connected to the 29th terminal, and the 31st terminal. An electric wiring for supplying a power supply voltage of DC36V is connected to the 32nd terminal.

Next, the electrical wiring connected to each terminal 113 of the second connector CN2 will be described.

As described above, the second connector CN2 includes two terminals 113. The fixing portions 113b of these two terminals 113 straddle between the lower upright wall portion 102c and the lower peripheral edge portion 157b of the second connector insertion hole 157 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. It is postponed. As described above, the lower play existing between the lower upright wall portion 102c of the second connector CN2 and the lower peripheral edge portion 157b of the second connector insertion hole 157 is the upper upright wall portion of the second connector CN2. It is smaller than the upper play existing between 102b and the upper peripheral edge portion 157a of the second connector insertion hole 157. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the conductive misuse of a wire or the like is performed from the front side facing plate portion 141 side existing on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the main control board 61. The terminal 113 is preferentially protected against fraudulent acts of inserting a jig and illegally manipulating a signal.

As shown in FIG. 21, the first operation port detection sensor 46a is electrically connected to the second connector CN2 of the main control board 61 via the second relay board PB2. The 12th connector CN12 and the 24th connector CN24 are mounted on the second relay board PB2. The 12th connector CN12 is electrically connected to the 2nd connector CN2, and the 24th connector CN24 is electrically connected to the 1st operation port detection sensor 46a.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 (a), the main CPU 64 and the first operating port detection sensor 46a are electrically connected to the first terminal and the second terminal, which are the terminals 113 of the second connector CN2. Wiring is connected.

GND (ground) is set at the first terminal of the second connector CN2. Similar to the first relay board PB1 described above, the second relay board PB2 is provided with a GND plane (not shown), and the signal on the main control board 61 and the signal on the second relay board PB2 have a common potential. Is set to be the standard. The first terminal of the second connector CN2 is electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61.

A wiring for the main CPU 64 to receive the detection signal of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is connected to the second terminal of the second connector CN2. The first operating port detection sensor 46a is a three-wire proximity sensor, and is for outputting a VCS terminal for supplying the operating voltage (specifically, DC12V) of the first operating port detection sensor 46a and a detection signal. It is equipped with an OUT terminal and a GND terminal for a reference potential. An operating voltage (specifically, DC12V) is supplied to the VDD terminal from the fourth connector CN4, which will be described in detail later, via the second relay board PB2. The GND terminal is connected to the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 via the 24th connector CN24. As described above, the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 and the GND plane of the main control board 61 are maintained at a common reference potential. The OUT terminal is connected to the second terminal of the second connector CN2 via the second relay board PB2. The output format of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is the collector output format, and the detection signal output from the OUT terminal is in the LOW state when the game ball is not detected and in the state where the game ball is detected. In the HI state.

As described above, all the terminals 113 (first terminal and second terminal) of the second connector CN2 are preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraudulent jig. Since the signal line of the detection signal of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is preferentially protected from fraudulent activity, an act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line is performed and the first operation of the game ball is performed. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the winning of the mouth 33 occurs from being illegally created.

Next, the electrical wiring connected to each terminal 114 of the third connector CN3 will be described.

As described above, the third connector CN3 includes two terminals 114. The fixing portions 114b of these two terminals 114 straddle between the lower upright wall portion 103c and the lower peripheral edge portion 158b of the third connector insertion hole 158 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. It is postponed. As described above, the lower play existing between the lower upright wall portion 103c of the third connector CN3 and the lower peripheral edge portion 158b of the third connector insertion hole 158 is the upper upright wall portion of the third connector CN3. It is smaller than the upper play existing between 103b and the upper peripheral edge portion 158a of the third connector insertion hole 158. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the conductive misuse of a wire or the like is performed from the front side facing plate portion 141 side existing on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the main control board 61. The terminal 114 is preferentially protected against fraudulent acts of inserting a jig and illegally manipulating a signal.

As shown in FIG. 21, the second operation port detection sensor 47a is electrically connected to the third connector CN3 of the main control board 61 via the second relay board PB2. The 13th connector CN13 and the 25th connector CN25 are mounted on the second relay board PB2. The 13th connector CN13 is electrically connected to the 3rd connector CN3, and the 25th connector CN25 is electrically connected to the 2nd operation port detection sensor 47a.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 (b), the main CPU 64 and the second operating port detection sensor 47a are electrically connected to the first terminal and the second terminal, which are the terminals 114 of the third connector CN3. Wiring is connected.

GND (ground) is set at the first terminal of the third connector CN3. Similar to the first relay board PB1 described above, the second relay board PB2 is provided with a GND plane (not shown), and the signal on the main control board 61 and the signal on the second relay board PB2 have a common potential. Is set to be the standard. The first terminal of the third connector CN3 is electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61.

A signal line for the main CPU 64 to receive the detection signal of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is connected to the second terminal of the third connector CN3. The second operating port detection sensor 47a is a three-wire proximity sensor, and is for outputting a VCS terminal for supplying the operating voltage (specifically, DC12V) of the second operating port detection sensor 47a and a detection signal. It is equipped with an OUT terminal and a GND terminal for a reference potential. An operating voltage (specifically, DC12V) is supplied to the VDD terminal from the fourth connector CN4, which will be described in detail later, via the second relay board PB2. The GND terminal is electrically connected to the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 via the 25th connector CN25. As described above, the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 and the GND plane of the main control board 61 are maintained at a common reference potential. The OUT terminal is electrically connected to the second terminal of the third connector CN3 via the second relay board PB2. The output format of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is the collector output format, and the detection signal output from the OUT terminal is in the LOW state when the game ball is not detected and in the state where the game ball is detected. In the HI state.

As described above, all the terminals 114 (first terminal and second terminal) of the third connector CN3 are preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraudulent jig. Since the signal line of the detection signal of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is preferentially protected from fraudulent activity, an act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line is performed and the second operation of the game ball is performed. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the winning of the mouth 34 occurs from being illegally created.

Next, the electrical wiring connected to the terminals 115 and 116 of the fourth connector CN4 will be described.

As described above, the fourth connector CN4 includes 10 end-side terminals 115 and 10 other-end side terminals 116. The fixing portion 115b of the terminal 115 on one end extends so as to straddle between the lower standing wall portion 104c and the lower peripheral edge portion 159b of the fourth connector insertion hole 159 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. The fixing portion 116b of the other end side terminal 116 straddles the upper standing wall portion 104b and the upper peripheral edge portion 159a of the fourth connector insertion hole 159 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. It is extended like this. As described above, the lower play existing between the lower upright wall portion 104c of the fourth connector CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portion 159b of the fourth connector insertion hole 159 is the upper upright wall portion of the fourth connector CN4. It is smaller than the upper play existing between 104b and the upper peripheral edge portion 159a of the fourth connector insertion hole 159. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the conductive misuse of a wire or the like is performed from the front side facing plate portion 141 side existing on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the main control board 61. The terminal 115 on one end is protected in preference to the terminal 116 on the other end with respect to an illegal act of inserting a jig and illegally manipulating a signal.

As shown in FIG. 23 (c), the ten end-side terminals 115 included in the fourth connector CN4 are the p-terminals in which p is an odd number of any of 1 to 19, and specifically, The first terminal, the third terminal, the fifth terminal, ... The 19th terminal. Further, the ten other end side terminals 116 included in the fourth connector CN4 are qth terminals having q as an even number of any of 2 to 20, and specifically, the second terminal and the fourth terminal. Terminal, 6th terminal, ... 20th terminal.

As shown in FIG. 21, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the out are connected to the fourth connector CN4 of the main control board 61 via the second relay board PB2. Mouth detection sensor 48a, gate detection sensor 49a, radio wave detection sensor 202 for detecting illegal radio waves, magnetic detection sensor 203 for detecting illegal magnetism, special power release detection sensor for detecting the open state of the special power winning device 32 32b, the general electric opening detection sensor 34b that detects the open state of the general electric accessory 34a, the special electric driving unit 32c that switches the special electric winning device 32 to the open state or the closed state according to the received drive signal, and the received drive signal A drive unit 34c for power supply that switches the power supply accessory 34a to an open state or a closed state according to the above is electrically connected. The 14th connector CN14 and the 26th to 37th connectors CN26 to CN37 are mounted on the second relay board PB2. The 14th connector CN14 is electrically connected to the 4th connector CN4. The 26th connector CN26 is electrically connected to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the 27th connector CN27 is electrically connected to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the 28th connector CN28 is the third winning opening. It is electrically connected to the mouth detection sensor 44a, the 29th connector CN29 is electrically connected to the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the 30th connector CN30 is electrically connected to the out port detection sensor 48a. The 31st connector CN31 is electrically connected to the gate detection sensor 49a, the 32nd connector CN32 is electrically connected to the radio wave detection sensor 202, and the 33rd connector CN33 is electrically connected to the magnetic detection sensor 203. The 34th connector CN34 is electrically connected to the special electric release detection sensor 32b, the 35th connector CN35 is electrically connected to the general electric release detection sensor 34b, and the 36th connector CN36 is for special electric power. It is electrically connected to the drive unit 32c, and the 37th connector CN37 is electrically connected to the drive unit 34c for general electricity.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 (c), a wiring for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is connected to the first terminal of the fourth connector CN4. , The wiring for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is connected to the third terminal, and the main control device 60 and the out opening detection sensor 48a are connected to the fourth terminal. The wiring for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is connected to the fifth terminal, and the wiring for electrically connecting the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is connected to the fifth terminal. Wiring for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the special electric detection sensor 45a is connected to the terminal, and for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the gate detection sensor 49a to the ninth terminal. Wiring is connected.

These detection sensors 42a to 45a, 48a, 49a are 3-wire proximity sensors, and are VCS terminals for supplying the operating voltage (specifically, DC12V) of the detection sensors 42a to 45a, 48a, 49a. It has an OUT terminal for outputting a detection signal and a GND terminal for a reference potential. An operating voltage (specifically, DC12V) is supplied to the VDD terminal from the eighth terminal described later of the fourth connector CN4 via the second relay board PB2. The GND terminals are electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the second relay board PB2 via the 26th to 31st connectors CN26 to CN31. As described above, the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 and the GND plane of the main control board 61 are maintained at a common reference potential. The OUT terminal is connected to the fourth connector CN4 via the second relay board PB2. The output format of these detection sensors 42a to 45a, 48a, 49a is the collector output format, and the detection signal output from the OUT terminal is in the LOW state when the game ball is not detected and is detected by the game ball. It becomes the HI state in the state where it is done.

The first terminal, the third terminal, and the fifth terminal, in which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signals of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, are conductive misuse jigs in the fourth connector CN4. It is a terminal 115 on one end side that is preferentially protected from fraud using the above. As described above, when a ball is entered into any of the general winning openings 31, 10 prize balls are paid out. Since the signal lines of the detection signals of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a are preferentially protected from fraudulent activities, the situation in which the general winning opening 31 of the game ball is won is illegal. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being created and being paid out illegally.

The seventh terminal on which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a is the one-end terminal 115 which is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraudulent jig in the fourth connector CN4. As described above, when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. Since the signal line of the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a is preferentially protected from fraudulent acts, a situation in which a game ball is awarded to the special electric winning device 32 is illegally created, and the game ball is illegally paid out. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

The ninth terminal on which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a is the one-end terminal 115 which is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraudulent jig in the fourth connector CN4. As already explained, when an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35 and the result of the internal lottery is an electric service open winning, the general electric service 34a is opened in a predetermined mode. It shifts to the open state. Since the signal line of the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a is preferentially protected from fraudulent activity, the situation in which the game ball wins the through gate 35 is illegally created and the internal lottery is illegally executed. It is possible to prevent the signal from being lost.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 (c), a wiring for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the radio wave detection sensor 202 is connected to the eleventh terminal of the fourth connector CN4, and the first Wiring for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the magnetic detection sensor 203 is connected to the terminal 13. The detection signal output from the radio wave detection sensor 202 to the main control device 60 is in the LOW state when the illegal radio wave is not detected, and is in the HI state when the illegal radio wave is detected. Further, the detection signal output from the magnetic detection sensor 203 to the main control device 60 is in the LOW state when the illegal magnetism is not detected, and is in the HI state when the illegal magnetism is detected.

The eleventh terminal in which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal of the radio wave detection sensor 202 and the thirteenth terminal in which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal of the magnetic detection sensor 203 use a conductive misuse jig in the fourth connector CN4. One-end terminal 115 that is preferentially protected from fraudulent use. By preferentially protecting the signal line of the detection signal of the radio wave detection sensor 202 from fraud that brings a conductive fraudulent jig close to it, it is possible to prevent a situation in which illegal radio waves cannot be detected from being fraudulently created. be able to. In addition, since the signal line of the detection signal of the magnetic detection sensor 203 is preferentially protected from fraud that brings a conductive fraudulent jig close to it, a situation in which fraudulent magnetism cannot be detected is fraudulently created. Can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 (c), a wiring for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the special electric release detection sensor 32b is connected to the 15th terminal of the fourth connector CN4. The 17th terminal is connected with a wiring for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the electric power release detection sensor 34b.

The detection signal of the special electric release detection sensor 32b rises from the LOW state to the HI state when the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, and the detection signal of the general electric release detection sensor 34b is the open state of the general electric accessory 34a. In that case, it rises from the LOW state to the HI state. The main CPU 64 monitors the states of the special electric winning device 32 and the general electric accessory 34a based on the states of the detection signals of the open detection sensors 32b and 34b.

The 15th terminal where the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal of the special electric release detection sensor 32b and the 17th terminal where the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal of the general electric release detection sensor 34b are the misuse of conductivity in the 4th connector CN4. One end side terminal 115 that is preferentially protected from fraud using a jig. By preferentially protecting the signal line of the detection signal of the special electric release detection sensor 32b from fraud, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 64 from creating a situation in which the open state of the special electric winning device 32 cannot be grasped. it can. Further, since the signal line of the detection signal of the general electric opening detection sensor 34b is preferentially protected from fraud, a situation is created in which the main CPU 64 cannot grasp the open state of the general electric accessory 34a. Can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 (c), a signal line for transmitting a special electric drive signal from the main control device 60 to the special electric drive unit 32c is connected to the 12th terminal of the fourth connector CN4. A signal line for transmitting a general electric drive signal from the main control device 60 to the general electric drive unit 34c is connected to the 14th terminal.

The main CPU 64 identifies whether or not the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state based on the detection signal of the special electric opening detection sensor 32b. When it is specified that the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state in the state other than the open / close execution mode, the special electric abnormality notification is performed and the process for advancing the game (step in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) described later). The processing of S208 to step S219) is not executed. Therefore, when a fraud using a conductive fraudulent jig is performed on the signal line of the special electric drive signal, the fraud can be grasped by the special electric abnormality notification. As described above, the signal line of the special electric drive signal is arranged not at one end side terminal 115 but at the other end side terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4. As a result, when a fraudulent act of illegally opening the special electric winning device 32 is performed, the manager of the game hall can detect and respond to the fraudulent act, while misusing it in the fourth connector CN4. The one-sided terminal 115, which is preferentially protected from fraud using a jig, can be used as a terminal for transmitting or receiving other information.

The main CPU 64 identifies whether or not the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state based on the detection signal of the general electric release detection sensor 34b. Open state of the utility accessory 34a When it is specified that the utility accessory 34a is in the open state in a state where no winning has occurred, a notification of an abnormality in the utility is performed and a process for advancing the game. (The processing of steps S208 to S219 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) described later) will not be executed. Therefore, when a fraud using a conductive fraudulent jig is performed on the signal line of the Fukuden drive signal, the fraud can be grasped by the Fudoden abnormality notification. As described above, the signal line of the general electric drive signal is arranged not at one end side terminal 115 but at the other end side terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4. As a result, when a fraudulent act of illegally opening the special electric winning device 32 is performed, the manager of the game hall can detect and respond to the fraudulent act, while misusing it in the fourth connector CN4. The one-sided terminal 115, which is preferentially protected from fraud using a jig, can be used as a terminal for transmitting or receiving other information.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 (c), a wiring for supplying a power supply voltage of DC12V is connected to the 16th terminal of the 4th connector CN4, and a power supply voltage of DC36V is connected to the 18th terminal. Wiring for supply is set.

GND (ground) is set for the second terminal, the sixth terminal, the eighth terminal, the tenth terminal, the nineteenth terminal, and the twentieth terminal of the fourth connector CN4. These terminals are electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main CPU 64>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

The main CPU 64 uses various counter information during the game to draw a winning lottery, set the display of the first special figure display unit 37a, set the display of the second special figure display unit 37b, and set the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. , The display of the general figure display unit 38a is set, and specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for hit occurrence and the jackpot type are used for determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 to be used, the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and each special figure. The variable type counter CS for determining the display duration in the display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41 is used. Further, the general electric random number counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the electric service open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 211 of the main RAM 66.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure holding area 212 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. The special figure holding area 212 includes a first special figure holding area 215, a second special figure holding area 216, and an execution area 217 for special drawing.

The first special figure holding area 215 includes a first area 215a, a second area 215b, a third area 215c, and a fourth area 215d. Each numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 215a to 215d as the reserved information on the special figure side.

In this case, in the first area 215a to the fourth area 215d, when the winning of the first operating port 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 215a → the second area 215b → the third area 215c → the third area Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 4 areas 215d. By providing the four areas 215a to 215d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored.

The number of items that can be stored and stored in the first special figure holding area 215 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The second special figure holding area 216 includes a first area 216a, a second area 216b, a third area 216c, and a fourth area 216d, and a winning random number counter C1 is provided according to the winning history of the second operating port 34. Each numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 216a to 216d as the reserved information on the special figure side.

In this case, in the first area 216a to the fourth area 216d, when the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 216a → the second area 216b → the third area 216c → the third area Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 4 areas 216d. By providing the four areas 216a to 216d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored.

The number of items that can be stored in the second special figure holding area 216 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The execution area 217 for the special figure stores the hold information for the target for performing the hit / fail judgment and the distribution judgment for the special figure when the variable display is started on any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b. The area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 215a of the first special figure hold area 215 moves to the execution area 217 for the special figure. Will be done. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b is started, the hold information stored in the first area 216a of the second special figure hold area 216 is moved to the execution area 217 for the special figure.

The information corresponding to the normal electric random number counter C4 is stored in the normal figure holding area 213 when the through gate 35 is won. The normal figure holding area 213 includes a first area 218a, a second area 218b, a third area 218c, and a fourth area 218d, and numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4 according to the winning history to the through gate 35. Is stored in any of the areas 218a to 218d as the reserved information on the normal drawing side.

In this case, in the first area 218a to the fourth area 218d, when the through gate 35 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 218a → the second area 218b → the third area 218c → the fourth area. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 218d. By providing the four areas 218a to 218d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored.

The number of items that can be stored in the holding area 213 is not limited to four, and may be any number of items, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be a single number. It may be.

An execution area 219 for a normal map is provided in the normal map reservation area 213. The execution area 219 for the normal map is an area in which the hold information for which the hit / fail determination for support is to be determined is stored when the variable display is started on the normal map display unit 38a. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 218a of the normal map hold area 213 is moved to the execution area 219 for the normal map.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the Fuden random number counter C4 will be described. The normal electric random number counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The normal electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal figure holding area 213 of the main RAM 66 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric accessory 34a to the open state according to the value of the stored general electric random number counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PA in the same manner, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of being opened is relatively high or low.

In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power open state in the normal power open lottery using the normal power random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5), but it is high. In the frequency support mode, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34a is opened when the general electric power open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. There is. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the general electric power open state is won and the general electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is secured for the next public power opening lottery after one public power opening lottery is performed (that is, the general drawing). The duration of one display on the display unit 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the second operating port 34 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operating port 33. The probability that a prize will be given to the mouth 34 increases.

The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is opened to the public power per unit time is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the open state. In addition, the reserved time secured for the next public electric opening lottery after one public electric opening lottery is performed (for example, is executed on the general drawing display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. May be good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured when one public power opening lottery is held and then the next public power opening lottery is held is shortened. By applying any one of the conditions or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

When the general electric power open state is won in the general electric power open lottery using the general electric power random number counter C4, the general electric power open state is set. The open state of the general electric power is terminated when the public electric accessory 34a is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined maximum number of game balls win a prize in the second operating port 34. To do. Specifically, the upper limit is 10 in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening and closing of the utility object 34a is one in the low-frequency support mode, whereas it is more than one in the high-frequency support mode, which is more specific than in the low-frequency support mode. It is 3 times. Further, the duration of one opening of the general electric accessory 34a is 1 second in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is 2 seconds in the high frequency support mode.

Next, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first special figure holding area 215 of the special figure holding area 212, and the game ball is stored in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the second special figure holding area 216 of the special figure holding area 212 at the timing of winning a prize. Then, the winning / failing determination is performed using the value of the stored hit random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that is won in the winning / failing determination is stored in the main ROM 65 as a winning / failing table. In the hit / fail table, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set as the hit / miss result. The jackpot result is a win / fail result that can trigger a shift to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and can also trigger a shift to at least one of the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a win / fail result that does not trigger a shift in both the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode, while it triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open / close. The deviation result is a success / failure result that does not trigger a transition to the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode.

As the pass / fail table, there are a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the same pass / fail table is referred to in the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 33 and the holding information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 34. In any case, there are a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode as lottery modes in the winning / losing lottery.

To explain each hit / fail table in detail, the hit / fail table for the low probability mode has two random number values (for example, "5" and "305") that result in a big hit, and the random number values that result in a small hit. Is three (for example, "55", "355", "555"). Other than that, it is a random number value that results in a deviation.

In the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, the number of random numbers that result in big hits is set to be larger than that in the case of the hit / miss table for the low probability mode for the first special figure, and specifically, it is 20. (For example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the value of the random number that is the result of the small hit is the same as in the case of the hit / fail table for the low probability mode.

If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result is obtained. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may or may not be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the high probability mode. ..

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first special figure holding area 215 of the special figure holding area 212, and the game ball is stored in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the second special figure holding area 216 of the special figure holding area 212 at the timing of winning a prize. Then, the distribution determination is performed using the value of the stored jackpot type counter C2.

Here, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set in the pachinko machine 10, and each of these jackpot results includes (1) the contents of the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and ( 3) At least one of the three contents, that is, the contents of the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, is different.

The open / close execution mode executed when the jackpot is won is the round number regulation mode as described above. In the round number regulation mode, the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode are set so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high or low. And are set. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from the opening to the closing of the special electric winning device 32. There is. Specifically, a long-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 29 seconds, which is a long time, and a short-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 0.05 seconds, which is shorter than the long time, are described. It is set. In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. Be controlled. In addition, the maximum number of end conditions for round games is set to 10. Then, in the long-time mode of the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, and more specifically, the opening duration is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. ing. Therefore, when the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will be awarded the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and the time is short. When the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in the embodiment, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will not be won.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a long-time mode. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short-time mode.

The number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high-frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above values and is arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is higher than that of the low frequency winning mode. Is.

The opening / closing execution mode executed when a small hit is won is the opening / closing number regulation mode as described above. In the open / close number regulation mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened five times in a short time mode. In this case, the upper limit of the end condition of the open / close number specified mode is set to 10, and the total opening duration of the open / close number specified mode is the maximum number of the game ball firing cycle and the open / closed number specified mode. It is set to a time shorter than the product. Therefore, in the open / close number specified mode, the round game is not executed, and whether or not the number of winnings is the upper limit is determined by the total number of winnings in the opening / closing number specified mode. The probability that the opening and closing of will be executed increases.

The distribution destination of the type of the jackpot result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 65 as a distribution table. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the types of jackpot results are as follows: 8R low accuracy jackpot result, 12R low accuracy jackpot result, 4R high accuracy jackpot result, and 5R high accuracy. A jackpot result, an 8R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 12R high-accuracy jackpot result A, a 12R high-accuracy jackpot result B, and a 16R high-accuracy jackpot result are set.

In the 8R low-accuracy jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode in which eight round games occur. In this open / close execution mode, 520 game balls can be expected to be paid out. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the low probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This low-probability mode results in a jackpot next, and at least continues until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games has reached the end reference number (specifically, 15 times) set as the number of games of 1 or more after the transition, and the high-frequency support mode The low-frequency support mode that transitions after the end of is the next big hit result, and at least continues until it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the 12R low-accuracy jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode in which 12 round games occur. In this open / close execution mode, 780 game balls can be expected to be paid out. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the low probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This low-probability mode results in a jackpot next, and at least continues until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the low-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This low-frequency support mode will result in a big hit next time, and will continue at least until it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the 4R high-accuracy jackpot result, the open / close execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode in which four round games occur. In this open / close execution mode, 260 game balls can be expected to be paid out. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode will at least continue until the next jackpot result and the resulting open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high frequency support mode will at least continue until the next big hit result and the resulting open / close execution mode.

In the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the open / close execution mode is a low-frequency winning mode in which five round games occur. In this open / close execution mode, the special electric winning device 32 cannot be expected to win a prize, so that the number of game balls to be paid out is substantially zero. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode will at least continue until the next jackpot result and the resulting open / close execution mode. Further, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode if the mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode is the high frequency support mode, while it becomes the low frequency support mode if the mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode is the low frequency support mode. These support modes will at least continue until the next big hit result and the resulting open / close execution mode.

The 8R high-accuracy jackpot result is a high-frequency winning mode in which the open / close execution mode generates eight round games. In this open / close execution mode, 520 game balls can be expected to be paid out. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode will at least continue until the next jackpot result and the resulting open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high frequency support mode will at least continue until the next big hit result and the resulting open / close execution mode.

The 12R high-accuracy jackpot result A is a high-frequency winning mode in which the opening / closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode in which 12 round games occur. In this open / close execution mode, 780 game balls can be expected to be paid out. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode will at least continue until the next jackpot result and the resulting open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high frequency support mode will at least continue until the next big hit result and the resulting open / close execution mode.

The 12R high-accuracy jackpot result B is a high-frequency winning mode in which the opening / closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode in which 12 round games occur. In this open / close execution mode, 780 game balls can be expected to be paid out. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode will at least continue until the next jackpot result and the resulting open / close execution mode. Further, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode if the mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode is the high frequency support mode, while it becomes the low frequency support mode if the mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode is the low frequency support mode. These support modes will at least continue until the next big hit result and the resulting open / close execution mode.

The 16R high-accuracy jackpot result is a high-frequency winning mode in which the opening / closing execution mode generates 16 round games. In this open / close execution mode, 1040 game balls can be expected to be paid out. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode will at least continue until the next jackpot result and the resulting open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high frequency support mode will at least continue until the next big hit result and the resulting open / close execution mode.

As the distribution table, as shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the distribution for the first special figure used in the distribution determination of the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 33. A minute table and a distribution table for the second special figure used for determining the distribution of the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 34 are set.

Explaining each distribution table in detail, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the distribution table for the first special figure has 12R low accuracy jackpot results and 12R low probability jackpot results as the types of jackpot results to be sorted. A 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 12R high-accuracy jackpot result A, a 12R high-accuracy jackpot result B, and a 16R high-accuracy jackpot result are set. In the distribution table for the first special figure, "0 to 19" corresponds to the 12R low accuracy jackpot result, "20 to 39" corresponds to the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, and "40 to 68". Corresponds to the 12R high-accuracy jackpot result A, "69-88" corresponds to the 12R high-accuracy jackpot result B, and "89-99" corresponds to the 16R high-accuracy jackpot result. In the case of the distribution table for the first special figure, if the jackpot is won, the probability of a 12R low probability jackpot result is 20%, the probability of a 5R high probability jackpot result is 20%, and 12R. The probability of a high-accuracy jackpot result A is 29%, the probability of a 12R high-accuracy jackpot result B is 20%, and the probability of a 16R high-accuracy jackpot result is 11%.

Here, when a small hit result is obtained, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed five times in a short-time mode. On the other hand, in the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed up to 5 times, and in each round game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once in a short time mode. That is, when either the 5R high-accuracy big hit result or the small hit result is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode is apparently the same. Further, in the game times when these game results are obtained, although the stop results different from each other are displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the display area is set larger than that of the first special figure display unit 37a. In the symbol display device 41, the stop result is displayed in an indistinguishable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays a common symbol combination (for example, "3.4.1") on any of the effective lines. In addition, when a 5R high-probability jackpot result is obtained in the low-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode when a small hit result is obtained based on a prize in the first operating port 33 during the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the result. The effect is executed in a manner indistinguishable from the above, and after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the effect indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode is not executed in the symbol display device 41 or the like, and the effect is sent to the first operating port 33. When a small hit result is obtained based on a prize, the effect is executed in the same manner as after the open / close execution mode. With the above configuration, for example, in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, when the open / close execution mode that becomes the low frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode that becomes the open / close number specified mode occurs, the player , The game will be played while expecting that the mode will shift to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the interest of the game will be improved.

In addition, if a 12R low-accuracy jackpot result or a 12R high-accuracy jackpot result B is obtained based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 12 times, and each round. In the game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once according to the long-time mode. That is, when either the 12R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 12R high-accuracy jackpot result B is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode is apparently the same. Further, in the game times when these game results are obtained, although the stop results different from each other are displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the display area is set larger than that of the first special figure display unit 37a. In the symbol display device 41, the stop result is displayed in an indistinguishable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays the same even-numbered symbol combination on any of the effective lines. In addition, when the 12R high probability jackpot result B is obtained in the low frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 12R high probability jackpot result is indistinguishable from the opening / closing execution mode when the 12R low probability jackpot result is obtained. After the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the effect indicating that the symbol display device 41 or the like is in the high probability mode is not executed after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the 12R low probability jackpot result is obtained. The effect is executed in the same manner as in. With the above configuration, for example, in a situation of a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, when an open / close execution mode in which 12 round games are executed occurs, the player can perform the open / close execution mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The game will be played while expecting that the mode has shifted to the high probability mode, and the interest of the game will be improved.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the types of jackpot results to be sorted are 8R low accuracy jackpot result, 4R high accuracy jackpot result, and 8R high. The probability jackpot result and the 16R high accuracy jackpot result are set. In the distribution table for the second special figure, "0 to 19" corresponds to the 8R low accuracy jackpot result, "20 to 31" corresponds to the 4R high accuracy jackpot result, and "32 to 55". Corresponds to the 8R high-accuracy jackpot result, and "56-99" corresponds to the 16R high-accuracy jackpot result. In the case of the distribution table for the second special figure, if the jackpot is won, the probability of getting an 8R low probability jackpot result is 20%, the probability of getting a 4R high probability jackpot result is 12%, and 8R. The probability of a high-accuracy jackpot result is 24%, and the probability of a 16R high-accuracy jackpot result is 44%.

Here, if an 8R low-accuracy jackpot result or an 8R high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the game shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 8 times, and each round. In the game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once according to the long-time mode. That is, when either the 8R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 8R high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode is apparently the same. Further, in the game times when these game results are obtained, although the stop results different from each other are displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the display area is set larger than that of the first special figure display unit 37a. In the symbol display device 41, the stop result is displayed in an indistinguishable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays the same even-numbered symbol combination on any of the effective lines. In addition, in both the case where the 8R low probability jackpot result is obtained and the case where the 8R high probability jackpot result is obtained, it is not possible to distinguish which jackpot result is in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the result. After the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the effect indicating that the symbol display device 41 or the like is in the high probability mode is not executed, and the effect is executed in the same manner. Immediately after the open / close execution mode, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode in any case. With the above configuration, for example, in a situation of a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, when an open / close execution mode in which eight round games are executed occurs, the player can perform the open / close execution mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The game will be played while expecting that the transition to the low probability mode has not occurred, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Further, the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure have the same probability of becoming the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, the probability of becoming the high-frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode is higher in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. More specifically, the distribution table for the first special figure can be in the low frequency winning mode, whereas the distribution table for the second special drawing cannot be in the low frequency winning mode. Furthermore, in the distribution table for the first special figure, the probability of achieving the most advantageous jackpot result, 16R high accuracy jackpot result, is 11%, which is the lowest distribution probability compared to other jackpot results. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second special figure, the probability of achieving the 16R high-accuracy jackpot result, which is the most advantageous jackpot result, is 44%, which is the highest distribution probability as compared with other jackpot results. Therefore, as a type of jackpot result that can be selected when a jackpot is won, a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 as compared with a case where a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 and an internal lottery is performed. It is more advantageous for the player when the internal lottery is performed.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is a symbol display device 41 that is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in a game machine in which a final stop result is given as a result of a game that results in a predetermined jackpot. This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the stop result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display of the symbol in the above. Specifically, regarding the grant correspondence result, the combination of symbols with the same number on any of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the grant response result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of a symbol is performed in a symbol string is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some symbol rows. In the situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. In addition, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the big hit result in which the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed, or in the game times corresponding to the small hit result, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 65 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. If so, it will be executed.

On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the advance notice is performed not by the main CPU 64 but by the voice emission control device 70. In this case, in the voice emission control device 70, the game times corresponding to either the big hit result or the small hit result are more likely to generate the notice display and the appearance rate is higher than the game times corresponding to the missed result. The lottery process for the notice display is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that the low notice display is likely to occur. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the main CPU 64 to determine the display duration on the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b and the symbol display duration on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation display on the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. To be acquired.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 64>
Next, each process executed to advance the game on the main CPU 64 will be described. The processing of the main CPU 64 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S101, the power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits for one second after the main process is started without proceeding to the next process. In the following step S102, access to the main RAM 66 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main CPU 64 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch is manually operated. As described above, the RAM erasure switch is provided in the power supply / emission control device 78, and when the RAM data is initialized at the time of power-on, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasure switch. In the following step S105, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 66. Further, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

When the RAM erase switch is pressed (step S104: YES), the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set (step S105: NO) or when an abnormality of the data stored and retained by the checksum is confirmed (step S107: NO), the process of step S108 is performed in the same manner. Transition. In step S108, the main RAM 66 is cleared as the initialization of the main RAM 66. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed (step S104: NO), the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S105: YES), and the checksum is normal (step S107). : YES), the process proceeds to step S109 without executing the process of step S108. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 66 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is issued to the voice emission control device 70 in order to recognize the current gaming state. Send to.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the main CPU 64 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, a residual time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of 1 and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 66, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the process of steps S110 to S113 is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. Timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, in a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

In the timer interrupt process, first, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring circuit 201, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed. In the power failure processing, the payout reset signal output from the main CPU 64 to the payout side CPU 222 is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state. As described above, the payout side CPU 222 executes a process for initializing the payout side RAM 224 when the fall of the payout reset signal is detected.

In the following step S202, the lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing a process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information. Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively.

After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In the following step S205, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a fraudulent radio wave detection and a fraudulent magnetism detection set as a monitoring target for fraud have occurred is executed. As described above with reference to FIG. 21, the radio wave detection sensor 202 and the magnetic detection sensor 203 are connected to the input side of the MPU 63 via the second relay board PB2 and the fourth connector CN4. In the fraud detection process in step S205, the main CPU 64 monitors whether or not fraud to be monitored has occurred based on the state of the detection signal received from the radio wave detection sensor 202 and the detection signal received from the magnetic detection sensor 203. To do. As described above, the main CPU 64 identifies that an illegal radio wave is detected when the detection signal received from the radio wave detection sensor 202 rises from the LOW state to the HI state, and the magnetic detection sensor 203. It is specified that an illegal magnetism is detected when the rise of the detection signal received from the LOW state to the HI state is detected. In the fraud detection process in step S205, when it is specified that any fraud has occurred, a fraud detection notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the fraud detection notification command, the voice emission control device 70 controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 and controls the display control device 90 so that the fraud detection notification is performed. As a result, the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41 are notified that the monitoring target has been fraudulent. After that, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 66. As a result, the processes for advancing the game (processes in steps S208 to S219) are not executed.

After that, the Tokuden Fuden monitoring process is executed (step S206). In the special electric power monitoring process, when the open / close execution mode is not set, it is determined whether or not the special electric power winning device 32 is in the open state based on the state of the detection signal received from the special electric power opening detection sensor 32b. Then, when it is specified that the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, a special electric abnormality notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the special electric abnormality notification command, the voice emission control device 70 controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 and controls the display control device 90 so that the special electric abnormality notification is performed. As a result, the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41 are notified that the special electric winning device 32 has been fraudulent. After that, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 66. As a result, the processes for advancing the game (processes in steps S208 to S219) are not executed. Further, in the special electric utility monitoring process (step S206), when the open state winning of the general electric accessory 34a has not occurred, the general electric accessory 34a is based on the state of the detection signal received from the general electric release detection sensor 34b. Determines whether or not is in the open state. Then, when it is specified that the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the general electric abnormality notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the general electric abnormality notification command, the voice emission control device 70 controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 and controls the display control device 90 so that the general electric abnormality notification is performed. As a result, the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41 are notified that the universal electric accessory 34a has been fraudulent. After that, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 66. As a result, the processes for advancing the game (processes in steps S208 to S219) are not executed.

In the following step S207, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S207, the timer interrupt process ends without executing the process for advancing the game (processes in steps S208 to S219). As described above, when the game stop flag in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", the process for advancing the game is not executed.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S207, the processes after step S208 are executed. In step S208, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32c and 34c is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32c is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34c is started and the information for switching to the closed state is started. If is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S209, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S210, the ball entry detection process is executed. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU 64. As described above, the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is electrically connected to the main CPU 64 via the second connector CN2 on the main control board 61, and the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is the main control board 61. It is electrically connected to the main CPU 64 via the third connector CN3 in the above. Further, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, the out opening detection sensor 48a, and the gate detection sensor 49a are electrically connected to the main CPU 64 via the fourth connector CN4 on the main control board 61. It is connected.

In the ball entry detection process, first, it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a (step S301). In step S301, when the detection signal received from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is in the HI state, "1" is set in the first winning opening flag provided in the main RAM 66, and the detection signal is set. In the LOW state, the first winning opening flag is cleared to "0". The first winning opening flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. In step S301, when the value of the first winning opening flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S301, the value of the discharge number counter provided in the main RAM 66 is added by 1 (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 66 is added. Is added by 1 (step S303). The discharge number counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to grasp the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. The discharge number counter is a 7-bit counter, and the discharge number counter stores numerical information of any one of "0" to "127". The 10-prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify the number of times to execute the payout of 10 game balls. When the value of the counter for 10 prize balls is 1 or more, the main CPU 64 outputs a 10 prize ball command to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process (step S218 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described later. Perform the process to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S301, or when the process of step S303 is performed, it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a (step S304). .. In step S304, when the detection signal received from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is in the HI state, "1" is set in the second winning opening flag provided in the main RAM 66, and the detection signal is set. Clear the second winning opening flag to "0" in the LOW state. The second winning opening flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. In step S304, when the value of the second winning opening flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. When an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the value of the discharge number counter in the main RAM 66 is added by 1 (step S305), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 66 is added by 1 (step). S306).

When a negative determination is made in step S304, or when the process of step S306 is performed, it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a (step S307). .. In step S307, when the detection signal received from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is in the HI state, "1" is set in the third winning opening flag provided in the main RAM 66, and the detection signal is set. Clear the 3rd winning opening flag to "0" in the LOW state. The third winning opening flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. In step S307, when the value of the third winning opening flag changes from “0” to “1”, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. When an affirmative determination is made in step S307, the value of the discharge number counter in the main RAM 66 is added by 1 (step S308), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 66 is added by 1 (step). S309).

When a negative determination is made in step S307, or when the process of step S309 is performed, it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S310). In step S310, when the detection signal received from the special electric detection sensor 45a is in the HI state, the special electric flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", and when the detection signal is in the LOW state. Clear the special electric flag to "0". The special electric flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the special electric detection sensor 45a. In step S310, when the value of the special electric flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S310, the value of the discharge number counter in the main RAM 66 is added by 1 (step S311), and the value of the 15 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 66 is added by 1. (Step S312). The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify the number of times the 15 game balls should be paid out. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 64 outputs the 15 prize ball command to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process (step S218 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described later. Perform the process to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S310, or when the process of step S312 is performed, it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a (step S313). .. In step S313, when the detection signal received from the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is in the HI state, "1" is set in the first actuating port flag provided in the main RAM 66, and the detection signal is set. In the LOW state, the first operating port flag is cleared to "0". The first actuating port flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the first actuating port detection sensor 46a. In step S313, when the value of the first operating port flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S313, "1" is set in the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 66 (step S314). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 64 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. When "1" is set in the first operation winning flag, the main CPU 64 performs the first special figure holding area 215 in the special figure special electric control process (step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described later. On condition that the number of reserved information stored in the 1st to 4th areas 215a to 215d is less than 4, which is the upper limit, the process of newly storing the reserved information in the 1st special figure reserved area 215 is executed. To do.

After that, the value of the discharge number counter in the main RAM 66 is added by 1 (step S315), and the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 66 is added by 1 (step S316). The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 64 outputs the one prize ball command to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process (step S218 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described later. Perform the process to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S313, or when the process of step S316 is performed, it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a (step S317). .. In step S317, when the detection signal received from the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is in the HI state, "1" is set in the second actuating port flag provided in the main RAM 66, and the detection signal is set. In the LOW state, the second operating port flag is cleared to "0". The second actuating port flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the second actuating port detection sensor 47a. In step S317, when the value of the second operating port flag changes from “0” to “1”, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S317, "1" is set in the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 66 (step S318). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 64 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. When "1" is set in the second operation winning flag, the main CPU 64 performs the second special figure holding area 216 in the special figure special electric control process (step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described later. On condition that the number of reserved information stored in the 1st to 4th areas 216a to 216d is less than 4, which is the upper limit, the process of newly storing the reserved information in the 2nd special figure reserved area 216 is executed. To do.

After that, the value of the discharge number counter in the main RAM 66 is added by 1 (step S319), and the value of the one prize ball counter in the main RAM 66 is added by 1 (step S320).

When a negative determination is made in step S317, or when the process of step S320 is performed, it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a (step S321). In step S321, when the detection signal received from the out port detection sensor 48a is in the HI state, "1" is set in the out port flag provided in the main RAM 66, and the detection signal is in the LOW state. In this case, the out port flag is cleared to "0". The out port flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the out port detection sensor 48a. In step S321, when the value of the out-port flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S321, the value of the discharge number counter in the main RAM 66 is added by 1 (step S322).

When a negative determination is made in step S321 or when the process of step S322 is performed, it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S323). In step S323, when the detection signal received from the gate detection sensor 49a is in the HI state, the gate flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", and when the detection signal is in the LOW state. Clear the gate flag to "0". The gate flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the gate detection sensor 49a. In step S323, when the value of the gate flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S323, "1" is set in the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 66 (step S324). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 64 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. When "1" is set in the gate winning flag, the main CPU 64 performs the first to first steps of the normal figure holding area 213 in the normal figure general electric control process (step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described later. On condition that the number of reserved information on the normal map side stored in the four areas 218a to 218d is less than 4, which is the upper limit, the numerical information of the current general-purpose random number counter C4 is used as the reserved information on the normal map side. The process of storing in the normal figure holding area 213 is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S323, or when the process of step S324 is performed, the discharge number management process is executed (step S325), and the main ball entry detection process is terminated. In the discharge number management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharge number counter in the main RAM 66 has reached "100". When the value of the discharge number counter reaches "100", the discharge information flag in the main RAM 66 is set to "1" and the value of the discharge number counter is subtracted by "100". The discharge information flag is that "100" game balls are discharged from the game area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Is a flag that can be grasped by the main CPU 64. When "1" is set in the discharge information flag, the main CPU 64 receives "100" game balls from the game area PA in the external information setting process (step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described later. A process of outputting information indicating that the data has been discharged to the external terminal board 79 is executed.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), after executing the ball entry detection process in step S210, in step S211, the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 66 is collectively updated. Executes the timer update process for. In this case, the timer counters whose stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

In the following step S212, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In the launch control process, as described above, the launch permission signal is transmitted to the power supply / launch control device 78 on condition that the launch status signal is received from the power supply / launch control device 78. As described above, the firing state signal is transmitted from the power supply / firing control device 78 to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61, and the firing permission signal is transmitted via the first connector CN1. It is transmitted from the main CPU 64 to the power supply / emission control device 78. By receiving the firing state signal from the power supply / firing control device 78, the main CPU 64 grasps that the firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28. In the launch control process, a launch permission signal is transmitted to the launch operation device 28 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, which is a predetermined launch cycle, in a situation where the launch operation is continued.

In the following step S213, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a and the opening confirmation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading process of step S209. ..

In the following step S214, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed. The processing content of the special figure special electric control process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S215, the Fuzu Fuden control process is executed. In the Fuzu Fuden control process, by confirming that "1" is set in the gate winning flag in the main RAM 66, the number of Fuzu side hold information stored in the Fuden hold area 65c can be increased. On condition that the number is less than 4, which is the upper limit, the process of storing the numerical information of the current normal electric random number counter C4 in the general electric holding area 65c as the holding information on the normal drawing side is executed, and the gate winning flag is set to ". "0" is cleared. Further, in the normal drawing control process in step S215, when the numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4 is stored, an opening determination is made for the numerical information, and the opening determination is used as an opportunity for the normal drawing display unit 38a. Executes the process for producing the effect for ordinary drawings. Furthermore, in the normal power control process in step S215, a process of opening and closing the normal power accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed based on the result of the opening determination.

In the following step S216, the display control process is executed. In the display control process, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the first special figure display unit 37a in the first special figure hold display unit 37c based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215. The setting of the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the second special figure display unit 37b on the second special figure hold display unit 37d, and the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the general figure display unit 38a. Set the output information to be reflected in the normal figure hold display unit 38b. Further, in the display control process in step S216, the output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215. In addition to making settings, output information for updating the display contents of the general map display unit 38a is set. Furthermore, in the display control process in step S216, output information for updating the display content of the round display unit 39 is set based on the process result of the immediately preceding step S214.

In the following step S217, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. The details of the payout status reception process will be described later.

After that, in step S218, a payout output process for setting various prize ball commands as output targets is executed. In the payout output process, a prize ball command (1 prize ball) is given to the payout control device 77 based on the values of the 1 prize ball counter, the 10 prize ball counter, and the 15 prize ball counter in the main RAM 66. A process for transmitting a command (10 prize ball command, or 15 prize ball command) is executed. The details of the payout output process will be described later.

In the following step S219, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed, and the timer interrupt process is performed. finish. As described above, the main CPU 64 is connected to the external terminal board 79 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61, and the external terminal board 79 is a management computer for a game hall which is an external device (not shown). It is connected to the. In the external information setting process in step S219, information output is set to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 64 on the external terminal board 79. As described above, the external signals output from the main CPU 64 to the external terminal board 79 via the first connector CN1 include a signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. A signal indicating that the game is inside, a signal indicating that one game has been completed, and a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are out opening 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operation. A signal indicating that the game has been discharged from the game area PA through either the mouth 33 or the second operating port 34, a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and a game in the second operating port 34. A signal indicating that the ball has entered is included.

The management computer receives these information from the main CPU 64 through the external terminal board 79, and also receives various information to be described later from the payout control device 77 through the external terminal board 79. Then, according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10, the payout rate (the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10) and the like are calculated. By doing so, the execution mode of paying out the game ball in the pachinko machine 10 and the like can be grasped.

Next, the payout side timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 222 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The payout side timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds).

In the payout side timer interrupt process, first, the full tank process is executed (step S401). In the full tank processing, it is specified whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor described above, and if the tank is full, a process for stopping the payout of the game ball is performed. At the same time as executing, a full tank state command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 64. In addition, when the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a full tank state release command indicating that the full tank state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 64. .. The full tank state command and the full tank state release command are transmitted to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. When the main CPU 64 receives the full tank status command in the payout status reception process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 grasps that the tank is full and issues a full tank status release command. Know that the full tank status has been released when the command is received.

After that, the ball useless process is executed (step S402). In the ball-free process, it is specified whether or not the ball is in the ball-free state based on the detection result of the ball-free detection sensor described above, and if the ball is in the ball-free state, a process for stopping the payout of the game ball is executed. At the same time, a ball stateless command indicating that the ball state is not is transmitted to the main CPU 64. In addition, when the ballless state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a ballless state release command indicating that the ballless state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 64. .. These ball stateless commands and ball stateless release commands are transmitted to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. In the payout state reception process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 grasps that the ball is in the ballless state when it receives the ballless state command, and issues the ballless state release command. Know that the ballless state has been canceled when it is received.

After that, the payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the payout abnormality state is present based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if the payout abnormality state is present, the process of stopping the payout of the game ball is executed. At the same time, a payout abnormal state command indicating that the payout abnormal state is in state is transmitted to the main CPU 64. Further, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a payout abnormal state release command indicating that the payout abnormal state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 64. These payout abnormal state commands and payout abnormal state release commands are transmitted to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. In the payout state reception process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 grasps that the payout abnormal state is in the payout abnormal state when the payout abnormal state command is received, and issues a payout abnormal state release command. When it is received, it is grasped that the payout abnormal state is canceled.

After that, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state is specified based on the state of the detection signal received from the front door open sensor 225, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In some cases, the process of stopping the payout of the game ball is executed, and the front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 64. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 64. These front door opening commands and front door closing commands are transmitted to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. The main CPU 64 grasps that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the front door open command is received in the payout state reception process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), and closes the front door. It is known that the front door frame 14 is closed when the command is received.

After that, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S405). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, whether or not the game machine main body 12 is in the open state is specified based on the state of the detection signal received from the main body open sensor 226, and the game machine main body 12 is in the open state. Is a process of stopping the payout of the game ball, and also sends a main body release command to the main CPU 64. Further, when the game machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 64. These main body open commands and main body close commands are transmitted to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. The main CPU 64 grasps that the game machine main body 12 has been released when the main body release command is received in the payout state reception process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), and issues the main body close command. When it is received, it is grasped that the game machine main body 12 is closed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the unpaid counter provided in the payout side RAM 224 is 1 or more (step S406). As described above, the unpaid counter is a counter for the paying-side CPU 222 to grasp the number of unpaid game balls. When a negative determination is made in step S406, it is determined whether or not any one of the 1 prize ball command, the 10 prize ball command, and the 15 prize ball command has been received from the main CPU 64 (step S407). .. When any of the prize ball commands is received (step S407: YES), the number of prize balls corresponding to the received prize ball command is set in the unpaid counter (step S408). In step S408, when the 1 prize ball command is received, the unpaid counter is set to "1", and when the 10 prize ball command is received, the unpaid counter is set to "10", and 15 prize balls are set. When a command is received, "15" is set in the unpaid counter.

After that, the prize ball permission signal is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state (step S409). Is it possible for the prize ball permission signal to transmit a prize ball command (one prize ball command, 10 prize ball commands, or 15 prize ball commands) from the main CPU 64 to the payout side CPU 222? It is a signal indicating whether or not. When the prize ball permission signal is in the HI state, the prize ball command can be transmitted, and when the prize ball permission signal is in the LOW state, the prize ball command cannot be transmitted. The prize ball permission signal is set to the HI state when the value of the unpaid counter in the payout side RAM 224 is "0", and is set to the LOW state when the value of the unpaid counter is 1 or more.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S406, or if the process of step S409 is performed, the payout control process is performed (step S410). In the payout control process, the drive control of the payout device 76 is performed so that one game ball is paid out. After that, the value of the unpaid counter in the payout side RAM 224 is subtracted by 1 (step S411), and it is determined whether or not the value of the unpaid counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S412). If an affirmative determination is made in step S412, the prize ball permission signal is raised from the LOW state to the HI state (step S413).

When a negative determination is made in step S407, a negative determination is made in step S412, or the process of step S413 is performed, the payout side external information setting process is performed (step S414). As described above, some of the external terminals on the external terminal plate 79, and the plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 222. In the payout side external information setting process in step S414, information output setting is performed to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 222 on the external terminal board 79. As described above, the information output from the payout side CPU 222 to the external terminal board 79 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out. The management computer receives various information from the main CPU 64 and the payout control device 77 through the external terminal plate 79. Then, according to the various received information, the ball ejection rate (the ratio of the number of gaming balls to be paid out until 100 gaming balls are discharged from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10) and the like are calculated. , The execution mode of paying out the game ball in the pachinko machine 10 and the like are grasped.

After that, the reset correspondence process is executed (step S415) to end the payout side timer interrupt process. In the reset support process, it is determined whether or not the occurrence of the power cutoff is specified in the main side CPU 64 based on the state of the payout reset signal received from the main side CPU 64, and the occurrence of the power cutoff is not specified. If it is determined, the payout side timer interrupt process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power cutoff has been identified, the process corresponding to the power failure is executed to enter an infinite loop. The payout side RAM 224 is initialized by executing the process corresponding to the power failure.

Next, the payout state reception process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The payout state reception process is executed in step S217 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the payout state reception process, first, the full tank state handling process is performed (step S501). In the full tank state handling process, when a full tank status command is received from the payout side CPU 222, a full tank notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the full tank notification command, the voice emission control device 70 controls the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) and the display control device 90 so that the full tank notification is performed. Further, in the full tank state handling process, when the full tank state release command is received from the payout side CPU 222 or when the payout reset signal is received, the full tank notification end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the full tank notification end command, the voice emission control device 70 ends the notification of the full tank state performed by the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41.

After that, a ballless state handling process is performed (step S502). In the ball-free state handling process, when a ball-free state command is received from the payout side CPU 222, a ball-free notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the ball non-notification command, the voice emission control device 70 controls the sound output control and the display control device 90 of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) so that the ball non-notification state is notified. Further, in the ball-less state handling process, when the ball-free state release command is received from the payout side CPU 222 or when the payout reset signal is received, the ball non-notification end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the ball non-notification end command, the voice emission control device 70 ends the notification that the ball is not in the ball-free state, which is performed by the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41.

After that, the payout abnormal state handling process is performed (step S503). In the payout abnormality state handling process, when the payout abnormality state command is received from the payout side CPU 222, the payout abnormality notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the payout abnormality notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) and the display control device 90 so that the payout abnormality notification state is notified. Further, in the payout abnormality state handling process, when the payout abnormality state release command is received from the payout side CPU 222 or when the payout reset signal is received, the payout abnormality notification end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the payout abnormality notification end command, the voice emission control device 70 ends the notification that the payout abnormality state is performed by the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41.

After that, the front door open state handling process is performed (step S504). In the front door open state handling process, when the front door open state command is received from the payout side CPU 222, the front door open notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the front door open notification command, the voice emission control device 70 controls the sound output control and the display control device 90 of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) so that the front door open state is notified. Do. Further, in the front door open state handling process, when the front door open state release command is received from the payout side CPU 222, the front door open notification end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the front door open notification end command, the voice emission control device 70 ends the notification that the front door is in the open state, which is performed by the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41.

After that, the main body open state correspondence process is performed (step S505), and the main payout state reception process is completed. In the main body open state correspondence process, when the main body open state command is received from the payout side CPU 222, the main body open notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the main body open notification command, the voice emission control device 70 controls the sound output control and the display control device 90 of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) so that the main body open state is notified. Further, in the main body open state handling process, when the main body open state release command is received from the payout side CPU 222, the main body open notification end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the main body open notification end command, the voice emission control device 70 ends the main body open notification that is being performed by the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41.

Next, the payout output process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The payout output process is executed in step S218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the payout output process, first, it is determined whether or not the prize ball permission signal received from the payout side CPU 222 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61 is in the HI state (step S601), and the prize ball permission signal is determined. Is in the LOW state (step S601: NO), the main payout output process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the prize ball permission signal is in the HI state (step S601: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the 15 prize ball counters in the main RAM 66 is 1 or more (step S602). If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, 15 prize ball commands are set as output targets (step S603). The 15 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. After that, the value of the 15 prize ball counters is subtracted by 1 (step S604) to end the payout output process.

When a negative determination is made in step S602, it is determined whether or not the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 66 is 1 or more (step S605). If an affirmative determination is made in step S605, 10 prize ball commands are set as output targets (step S606). The 10 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. After that, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1 (step S607), and the main payout output process is completed.

When a negative determination is made in step S605, it is determined whether or not the value of the one prize ball counter in the main RAM 66 is 1 or more (step S608). If an affirmative determination is made in step S608, one prize ball command is set as an output target (step S609). The one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. After that, the value of the one prize ball counter is subtracted by 1 (step S610) to end the payout output process.

As described above, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the backup power is not supplied to the payout side RAM 224. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped while the value of the unpaid counter in the payout side RAM 224 is 1 or more, information on the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 224. (Value of unpaid counter) is lost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the prize ball command is transmitted from the main CPU 64 to the payout side CPU 222 on condition that the value of the unpaid counter in the payout side RAM 224 is "0". Therefore, the maximum value of the number of unpaid prize balls (value of the unpaid counter) stored in the payout side RAM 224 is "15" when the 15 prize ball command is received. By setting the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 224 to "15" or less, the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased in a situation where the payout side RAM 224 has information on the number of unpaid prize balls. The number of unpaid prize balls lost when supply is stopped has been reduced.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. The special figure special electric control process is executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the special figure special electric control process, a process for acquiring hold information is executed when a prize is generated in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, and when the hold information is stored. A pass / fail judgment is made for the held information, and a process for performing a game rounding effect is executed with the pass / fail judgment as an opportunity. Based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode is executed after the effect of the game round, and the process of the open / close execution mode and the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

In the special figure special electric control process, first, in step S701, the acquisition process of the reserved information on the special figure side is executed. In the acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in the first operating port 33 based on the value of the first operating winning flag in the main RAM 66. When a game ball has been won in the first operating port 33, the number of reserved information stored in the first special figure holding area 215 is read, and the number of the reserved information is the upper limit value (specifically). When the value is less than "4"), the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are set to the highest side of the first special figure holding area 215 where the holding information is not stored. Memorize in the area of. Then, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". Further, in the acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in the second operating port 34 based on the value of the second operating winning flag in the main RAM 66. When a game ball has been won in the second operating port 34, the number of reserved information stored in the second special figure holding area 216 is read out, and the number of the reserved information is the upper limit value (specifically). When the value is less than "4"), the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are set to the highest side of the first special figure holding area 215 where the holding information is not stored. Memorize in the area of. Then, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0".

In the process of acquiring the hold information in step S701, when the hold information for the first special figure hold area 215 or the hold information for the second special figure hold area 216 is acquired, the hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. To do. The voice emission control device 70 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display control device 90. By receiving the hold command, the display control device 90 changes the display of the number of hold information on the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information. In this case, since the hold command includes information indicating which of the first special figure hold area 215 and the second special figure hold area 216 has increased the hold information, the symbol display device 41 may display the hold command. The display of the number of pending items corresponding to the increased side is changed.

Further, when the number of hold information increases as described above, in the display control process of step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), the first special figure hold display unit 37c and the second special figure hold display unit 37c Display control is performed on the side of 37d corresponding to the increase in the number of holds so that the display content is changed to correspond to the increase in the number of holds.

In the following step S702, the information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 66 is read, and in step S703, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 65 is read. Then, in step S704, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table.

Here, the processing contents of steps S702 to S704 will be described.

As described above, the special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the effect for the game round and a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as the process for controlling the effect for the game round, the special figure variation start process (step S706), which is the process for starting the effect for the game round, and the effect for the game round are to proceed. The special figure changing process (step S707), which is the process of

Further, as the process for controlling the open / close execution mode, the special electric start process (step S709), which is the process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the process for controlling the open state of the special electric winning device 32 The special electric power opening process (step S710), the special electric power closing process (step S711) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric power winning device 32, and the ending of the open / close execution mode and the end of the open / close execution mode. The special electric power termination process (step S712), which is a process for controlling the transition of the game state of the above, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. The start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change start process (step S706), and the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change process (step S707). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determination process (step S708), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start process (step S709). The start address is the start address, the start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power opening process (step S710), and the start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power closing process (step S711). It is a start address, and the start address SA6 is a start address of a program for executing the special electric power termination process (step S712).

The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter. The special figure special electric counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

After executing the process of step S704, in step S705, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S704 is executed. Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, it jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process in step S706, and when the acquired start address is SA1, it jumps to the special figure change process in step S707. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determination process in step S708, and if the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electric start process in step S709, and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, it jumps to the processing during opening of the special electric power in step S710, if the acquired start address is SA5, it jumps to the processing during closing of the special electric power of step S711, and if the acquired start address is SA6. Jump to the special electric end processing in step S712. When any of the processes of steps S706 to S712 is executed, the special figure special electric control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the processes of steps S706 to S712 will be described individually.

<Special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure variation start processing in step S706 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the hold information is stored in any of the first special figure hold area 215 and the second special figure hold area 216. If a negative determination is made in step S801, the special figure fluctuation start process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a data setting process is executed (step S802).

In the data setting process in step S802, first, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area 216 is "0", and when the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area 216 is "0". Executes the data setting process for the first special figure, and executes the data setting process for the second special figure when the number of reserved figures in the second special figure holding area 216 is not "0". Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the hold information is stored in either the first special figure holding area 215 or the second special figure holding area 216, as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved figures in the second special figure holding area 216 is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the second special figure display unit 37b is used for variable display. When the hold information of is stored, the data stored in the second special figure hold area 216 is displayed in a variable manner regardless of whether or not the number of holds in the first special figure hold area 215 is 1 or more. I set it for use. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the first special figure hold area 215 and the second special figure hold area 216, it is stored in the second special figure hold area 216 corresponding to the second operation port 34. The pending information is prioritized as the start target of the game round.

In the data setting process for the first special figure performed in the data setting process (step S802), first, the data stored in the first area 215a of the first special figure holding area 215 is moved to the execution area 217 for the special figure. To do. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 215 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 215a to 215d to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area 215a and the second area 215b →. The data in each area is shifted such as 1st area 215a, 3rd area 215c → 2nd area 215b, 4th area 215d → 3rd area 215c. After that, the second special figure flag provided in the main RAM 66 is cleared to "0". The second special figure flag is a flag for specifying whether the start of the variation display this time is either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. After that, the shift time command, which is information for causing the voice emission control device 70 to recognize that the data in the first special figure holding area 215 has been shifted, is output, and the data setting process is terminated. The voice emission control device 70 suspends the display of the number of hold information corresponding to the first special figure hold area 215 in the symbol display device 41 by transmitting the command corresponding to the received shift command to the display control device 90. Change in response to the decrease in the number. Further, when the number of hold information in the first special figure hold area 215 decreases as described above, the display control process in step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) determines the first special figure hold display unit 37c. On the other hand, the display control is performed so that the display content is changed according to the decrease in the number of pending items.

In the data setting process for the second special figure performed in the data setting process (step S802), first, the data stored in the first area 216a of the second special figure holding area 216 is moved to the execution area 217 for the special figure. To do. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 216 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 216a to 216d to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area 216a and the second area 216b →. The data in each area is shifted such as 1st area 216a, 3rd area 216c → 2nd area 216b, 4th area 216d → 3rd area 216c. After that, "1" is set in the second special figure flag provided in the main RAM 66. After that, the shift time command, which is information for causing the voice emission control device 70 to recognize that the data in the second special figure holding area 216 has been shifted, is output, and the data setting process is terminated. The voice emission control device 70 suspends the display of the number of hold information corresponding to the second special figure hold area 216 in the symbol display device 41 by transmitting the command corresponding to the received shift command to the display control device 90. Change in response to the decrease in the number. Further, when the number of hold information in the second special figure hold area 216 decreases as described above, the display control process in step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) determines the second special figure hold display unit 37d. On the other hand, the display control is performed so that the display content is changed according to the decrease in the number of pending items.

After executing the data setting process in step S802, the hit / fail determination process is executed in step S803. In the winning / failing determination process, it is first determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 65 is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area 217 for the special figure, the information for the hit / fail judgment, that is, the winning random number. It is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 217 for the special figure is referred to by referring to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 65. Determines if is consistent with the low-probability jackpot numerical information.

In the following step S804, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S803 is the jackpot winning result. If it is a jackpot winning result, the distribution determination process is executed in step S805. In the distribution determination process, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the second special figure flag of the main RAM 66, the current game times are held in the first special figure holding area 215 and the second special figure holding. It is determined which of the reserved information in the area 216 corresponds to. Then, the distribution table corresponding to the determination result is the distribution table for the first special figure (see FIG. 25 (a)) and the distribution table for the second special figure (see FIG. 25 (b)). Select from. After selecting the distribution table, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2, among the hold information stored in the execution area 217 for the special figure, is the selected distribution. Understand which type of jackpot result is supported in the minute table. Specifically, when the distribution table for the first special figure is selected, the 12R low-accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 12R high-accuracy jackpot result A, the 12R high-accuracy jackpot result B, and the 16R high. Understand which of the jackpot results corresponds to the jackpot result. When the distribution table for the second special figure is selected, it corresponds to any of the 8R low accuracy jackpot result, the 4R high accuracy jackpot result, the 8R high accuracy jackpot result, and the 16R high accuracy jackpot result. Know if you are doing it.

In the following step S806, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the jackpot result in which the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 65 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 66. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the jackpot result. In step S806, information on the mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S805 is stored in the main RAM 66.

The information on the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each jackpot result.

In the following step S807, the flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the main RAM 66 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S807, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination result in step S805 is used. Set "1" to the corresponding flag.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S804 that the result is not the big hit winning result, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S803 is the small hit result. If it is a small hit result, the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed in step S809. Specifically, in this game, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is stored in the main ROM 65 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for the result, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 66. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result. In the following step S810, "1" is set in the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 66. The small hit flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp that a small hit result has occurred in the hit / fail determination process in step S803.

If a negative determination is made in step S808, the stop result setting process for the off result is executed in step S811. Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 65 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 66. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the big hit result and the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the small hit result.

After executing any of the processes of step S807, step S810, and step S811, the display duration acquisition process is executed in step S812. In the acquisition process, the display continues in this game time according to the current game state, the result of the hit / fail judgment process, the result of the distribution judgment process, the presence / absence of reach display, the value of the variation type counter CS, and the number of pending information. Get time information.

In the following step S813, the information corresponding to the display duration acquired in the above step S812 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed in the timer update process (step S211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described above. By the way, as an effect for the game round, the variation display of the pattern on the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b and the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed. When it is terminated, the final stop is displayed over the final stop time in a state where the stop result of the game is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the effective line). .. In this case, the display duration acquired in step S812 is the total time for one game, and in step S813, the display duration acquired in step S812 minus the final stop time. Set the information in the special figure special electric timer counter.

In the following step S814, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. As described above, these variation commands and type commands are transmitted to the voice emission control device 70 via the seventh connector CN7 on the main control board 61. The variable command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the hit / fail judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and display duration. It contains the corresponding data. Specifically, identification data for indicating that it is a variable command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the hit / fail judgment process is performed by the next 4 bits of data. And the lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination processing is set, and the holding information of either the 1st special figure holding area 215 or the 2nd special figure holding area 216 is set by the next 1-bit data. Trigger data indicating whether or not it is a trigger is set, and time data corresponding to the display duration is set from the remaining 7-bit data. Therefore, when the voice emission control device 70 receives the variation command, it recognizes that it is the variation command from the identification data, and the result of the hit / fail determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. Is recognized, and the display duration of the current game times is recognized from the above time data. Here, since the main CPU 64 selects different display durations depending on whether or not reach occurs, the voice emission control device 70 does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred. It is possible to identify the presence or absence of reach from the display duration information. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the hit / fail judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and a high probability mode. It includes data on whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode and data on whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode. Specifically, identification data for indicating that the command is a type command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2 bytes of data, and the next 4 bits of the data are used for the pass / fail judgment process and The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment processing is set, and the state recognition data of whether or not it is in the high probability mode and whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode based on the remaining 8-bit data. Is set. Therefore, when the voice emission control device 70 receives the type command, it recognizes that it is a type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the winning / failing determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. Then, from the above state recognition data, it is recognized whether or not it is a high probability mode and whether or not it is a high frequency support mode.

Here, both the variation command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the hit / miss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. Therefore, in the voice emission control device 70, by collating the lottery result data included in the variation command with the lottery result data included in the type command, noise or the like may occur in receiving the variation command and the type command. It is possible to identify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. Then, when both lottery result data match, the control for production corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command is executed, and when both lottery result data do not match. Can notify it. Incidentally, in the latter case, the voice emission control device 70 may execute the game rotation effect corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game time. For example, in the game rotation effect, the hit / fail determination process and the distribution are performed. Regardless of the result of the determination process, the symbol display device 41 may stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete deviation. In this case, the game rotation effect may be performed over the display duration corresponding to the time data included in the change command, or may be continued until the next change command and type command are received. May be good. It should be noted that the variation command may not include one of the data of the result of the hit / miss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process, or may have a configuration in which both data are not included.

After executing the process of step S814, in step S815, among the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the display unit on the execution target side of this game round starts the variable display of the pattern. Let me. In the following step S816, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the processing of step S816 is executed. ". After that, the special figure fluctuation start processing is completed.

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the process during the change of the special figure in step S707 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 32) will be described.

In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether or not the timing is before the final stop display during the duration of the game round, and if it is before the final stop display, the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure are displayed. In the figure display unit 37b, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the execution target side of the current game round is executed. This regular change continues until it is time to start the final stop display. In addition, this regular change is made in a certain manner regardless of whether or not a hit result is obtained and whether or not a reach display occurs.

In addition, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing is reached, if it is not the final stop display timing, after executing the above-mentioned regular change processing, this special figure End the processing during fluctuation. Therefore, after the effect for the game round is started, the special figure changing process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the final stop display timing is reached. Further, when it is time to display the final stop, the symbol display device 41 transmits the final stop command to the voice emission control device 70 and the second stop in order to display the stop result of the current game round as the final stop. Of the 1 special figure display unit 37a and the 2nd special figure display unit 37b, the display mode of the pattern on the execution target side of the current game round is set to the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. Further, the information of the final stop time (0.5 seconds) of the game round is read from the main ROM 65 and set in the special figure special electric timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process.

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, the process during special figure determination in step S708 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 32) will be described.

In the process of determining the special figure, it is determined whether or not the final stop time of the current game round has elapsed, and if the final stop time has elapsed, the result of the hit / fail judgment that triggered the current game round. Is a big hit result or a small hit result. If the winning / failing judgment result that triggered this game is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0", and the processing during the determination of this special figure is terminated. .. As a result, in the next special figure special electric control process, the special figure change start process will be executed.

On the other hand, in the process during the determination of the special figure, when it is determined that the result of the hit / fail judgment that triggered the game round is the big hit result or the small hit result, the opening time stored in advance in the main ROM 65 ( For example, the information of 4 seconds) is read out, and the information of the opening time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. After that, the opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. The opening command is a command for causing the voice emission control device 70 to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information indicating which of the various big hit results and the small hit results is the game result that triggered the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the voice emission control device 70 can execute the effect of the open / close execution mode in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the open / close execution mode. After that, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter, the value of the special figure special electric counter in which "2" is stored is changed to "3", and the processing during the determination of the special figure is completed.

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing in step S709 in the special electric special electric control process (FIG. 32) will be described.

In the special electric power start processing, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed, and if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the execution trigger of the opening / closing execution mode is one of the jackpot results. It is determined whether or not it is. When it is determined that the execution trigger of the current open / close execution mode is one of the jackpot results, the value of the number of round games corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 66. , 10 is set in the winning counter PC provided in the main RAM 66. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games by the main CPU 64 in the open / close execution mode, and the winning counter PC is a maximum number of games in one round game or one open / close number specified mode. This is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify whether or not a ball has been won. After that, the read processing of the open duration corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, when the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, information on the opening duration corresponding to the short-time mode is read from the main ROM 65. The opening duration is 0.05 seconds, which is shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 seconds) of the game ball. On the other hand, when the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is other than the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the information on the opening duration corresponding to the long-time mode is read from the main ROM 65.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution trigger of the current open / close execution mode is not any big hit result, that is, when the execution trigger of the current open / close execution mode is the small hit result, the open / close counter provided in the main RAM 66 5 is set to, and 10 is set to the winning counter PC provided in the main RAM 66. The open / close counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed by the main CPU 64 in the open / close execution mode of the open / close number specified mode. After that, the read processing of the open duration corresponding to the small hit result is executed. The opening duration is stored in advance in the main ROM 65, and specifically, it is 0.05 seconds, which is shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 seconds) of the game ball.

When it is determined that the execution trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is one of the jackpot results, the above-mentioned read processing of the opening duration is executed, or the execution trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is neither of the jackpot results. When the above-mentioned release duration information is read out in the case of determining that, the read open duration information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter, and the special electric winning device 32 is opened to be in the open state. Execute the setting process. After that, the release command is output. The release command is a command for causing the voice emission control device 70 to recognize that the special electric winning device 32 is released. By receiving the release command, the voice emission control device 70 executes control for switching the effect in the open / close execution mode accordingly. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter, the value of the special figure special electric counter in which "3" is stored is changed to "4", and the special electric special electric start processing is terminated.

<Processing while the special electric power is open>
Next, the processing during opening of the special power in step S710 in the special power control processing (FIG. 32) will be described.

In the processing during opening of the special electric power, if the opening / closing execution mode this time is the round number regulation mode, it is determined whether or not the end condition of one round game is satisfied, and if the end condition is satisfied, it is determined. The special electric winning device 32 is closed, and a closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after subtraction of 1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the closing time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. The closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode, and specifically, it is 2 seconds, which is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. Further, when the special electric power winning device 32 is closed, the special electric power counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric opening processing is executed is "4", it becomes "5" after 1 addition.

When the opening / closing execution mode this time is the opening / closing number regulation mode, the special electric winning device 32 is closed when the opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 has elapsed, and the closing command is issued to the voice emission control device. Send to 70. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the open / close counter after subtraction of 1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the closing time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As described above, the closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, if the opening duration has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the special electric winning device 32, and if a prize has been generated, the winning counter is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the winning counter after subtraction of 1 is "0", the open / close counter is cleared to "0" and the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Further, when the special electric power winning device 32 is closed, the special electric power counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether or not the value of the open / close counter is "0". In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric opening processing is executed is "4", it becomes "5" after 1 addition.

<Processing while the special electric train is closed>
Next, the process during closing of the special electric power in step S711 in the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 32) will be described.

In the special electric closing processing, it is determined whether or not both the round counter and the open / close counter are "0". If either one is not "0", it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed. If the closing time has not passed, the processing during closing of this special electric train is terminated as it is, and if the closing time has passed, the special electric power winning device 32 is opened and the execution trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time Set the opening duration corresponding to the hit result in the special figure special electric timer counter. Further, when the special electric winning device 32 is opened, the opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. Then, after subtracting 1 from the special figure special electric counter, the processing during closing of the special electric power is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric power closing process is executed is "5", it becomes "4" after 1 subtraction.

On the other hand, when both the round counter and the open / close counter are "0", the ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. The ending command is a command for causing the voice emission control device 70 to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for ending. The ending command also includes information indicating which of the various big hit results and the small hit results is the game result that triggered the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the voice emission control device 70 can execute the ending effect in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 seconds) stored in advance in the main ROM 65 is read out, and the information of the ending time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. By the way, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. After that, after adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter, the processing during closing of the special electric power is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric power closing process is executed is "5", it becomes "6" after 1 addition.

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric power termination process of step S712 in the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 32) will be described.

In the special train end processing, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed. When it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the game state transition process is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0", and the special electric end process is terminated. Here, the game state transition process will be described.

In the game state transition process, the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that ended this time is one of the 16R high-probability jackpot result, the 12R high-probability jackpot result A, the 8R high-probability jackpot result, and the 4R high-probability jackpot result. If, "1" is set for each of the high-probability flag and the high-frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 66, the high-frequency counter provided in the main RAM 66 is cleared to "0", and the game state is set. End the migration process. The high-probability flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode in the main CPU 64, and the high-frequency support flag is whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the main CPU 64. It is a flag for specifying whether or not. Further, the high-frequency counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify the end trigger of the high-frequency support mode in the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times, and the value set in the high-frequency counter is the game number. 1 is subtracted each time it is finished.

In the situation where the high probability flag is set to "0", the process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed in the pass / fail determination process of step S803 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 33), and the high probability flag is set. In the situation where "1" is set to, the process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. Further, in the situation where the high frequency support flag is set to "0", the processing corresponding to the low frequency support mode is executed in the normal power control processing of step S215 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27). In the situation where the high frequency support flag is set to "1", the process corresponding to the high frequency support mode is executed. Further, when the value of the high frequency counter is 1 or more, even if the value of the high frequency support flag is "0", the process corresponding to the high frequency support mode is executed. However, in the open / close execution mode, the process corresponding to the low frequency support mode is executed regardless of whether or not the high frequency support flag is set to "1". Therefore, during the open / close execution mode, the low-frequency support mode is set regardless of whether the support mode immediately before the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency support mode.

In the game state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that ended this time is either the 12R high-accuracy jackpot result B or the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the high-frequency support flag is set to "1". Is set, or whether or not the value of the high frequency counter is "1" or more is determined. When it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is set to "1" or the high-frequency counter value is "1" or higher, 12R is used in the gaming state, which is the high-frequency support mode. Since it means that the high-probability jackpot result B or the 5R high-probability jackpot result has been obtained, the process for shifting to the gaming state, which is the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, is executed. Specifically, "1" is set for each of the high-probability flag and the high-frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 66, the high-frequency counter provided in the main RAM 66 is cleared to "0", and this game is played. End the state transition process. On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the state in which the high frequency support flag is set to "1" nor the state in which the value of the high frequency counter is "1" or more is determined, in the gaming state in the low frequency support mode. Since it means that the 12R high-probability jackpot result B or the 5R high-probability jackpot result has been obtained, the process for setting the gaming state in the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode is executed. Specifically, the high probability flag in the main RAM 66 is set to "1" to end the game state transition process.

In the game state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that ended this time is the 8R low probability jackpot result, "15" is set in the high frequency counter provided in the main RAM 66. Clear each of the high probability flag and the high frequency support flag to "0", and end the game state transition process. Therefore, when the 8R low probability jackpot result is obtained, the high frequency support mode is set until the 15 game times, which is the end reference number, is exhausted after the open / close execution mode.

In the game state transition process, when the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that ended this time is the 12R low probability jackpot result, the high probability flag, the high frequency support flag, and the high frequency counter in the main RAM 66 are respectively. Is cleared to "0" to end the game state transition process.

In the game state transition process, when the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that ended this time is a small hit result, "30" is set in the small hit post-counter provided in the main RAM 66, and this The game state transition process is terminated. The small hit post-counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify whether or not the game times of the standard number of small hits after the small hit result has already been consumed. The value of the small hit counter is subtracted by 1 each time the game is completed. Further, when the open / close execution mode is changed, the value of the counter after a small hit is cleared to "0". When the value of the counter after the small hit is 1 or more, the display duration in the game round is selected in the corresponding manner after the result of the small hit.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Dimensions of lower play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Is from the dimension of the upper play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Is also small. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a fraudulent jig such as a wire into the play on the lower side to electrically contact the terminals 111 to 116 and the wiring pattern existing on the element mounting surface 61e. , It is possible to prevent the signal from being manipulated illegally by the fraudulent act.

The fixing portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the terminal 111 on one end side of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the terminal 115 on the one end side of the fourth connector CN4 are lower standing wall portions. It extends so as to straddle between 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b along the element mounting surface 61e. Therefore, the signal lines set to the terminal 111 on one end side of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 on the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 on the third connector CN3, and the terminal 115 on the one end side in the fourth connector CN4 are illegal. Priority can be given to protection from fraudulent activities using jigs.

The front case body 121 is fixed to the back case body 122 by screwing the front side first case fixing boss 183 to the front side third case fixing boss 185 to the back side first case fixing boss 186 to the back side third case fixing boss 188. Will be done. In a state where the front case body 121 is fixed to the back case body 122, the lower play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b is the upper standing wall portions 101b to. It is smaller than the upper play existing between 104b and the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a. This makes it easy to maintain a state in which the lower play is smaller than the upper play.

When the state in which the front case body 121 is fixed to the back case body 122 is released, the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are in the vertical direction of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. It can be in the state of being in the center. In this state, the lower play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b is the lower play in the state where the front case body 121 is fixed to the back case body 122. Greater than side play. Therefore, in the process of assembling the substrate box 62, the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are present in the center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the vertical direction. The fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. This makes it easy to insert the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. After that, the lower play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b exists between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a. It can be made smaller than the play of.

Locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are provided on the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Therefore, when the male connector corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 is inserted into the receiving portions 101f to 104f of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and is connected, the male connector is formed. It is possible to prevent the connector from coming off and maintain the state.

The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are located in the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c with respect to the regions facing the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. ~ Exists on the free end side of CN4. In a state where the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located in the center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the vertical direction, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portion are present. The distance between the 156b and 159b is larger than the dimension in which the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h project from the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c toward the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b. Therefore, in the step of assembling the substrate box 62, the work of inserting the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 can be facilitated.

The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are more related than the lower play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. It exists on the standing tip side (free end side) of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the front side facing plate portion 141 side existing on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the main control board 61 is illegally used for play on the lower side. Insert the jig and apply the jig to the terminal 111 on one end of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 on the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 on the third connector CN3, and the terminal 115 on one end of the fourth connector CN4. The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h can prevent the insertion of the fraudulent jig in response to the fraudulent act of contacting the user. This can make the fraudulent activity even more difficult.

The upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are not provided with a locking receiving portion. Of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c, only the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c are provided with the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h, so that the upper standing wall portion is provided. Compared with the configuration in which the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are provided on both the 101b to 104b and the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c, the free end side of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 is the first to the first. In order to enable insertion into the fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, the play provided between the peripheral portions of the first to fourth connector CN1 to CN4 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 is small. can do. As a result, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. The play existing between the peripheral portion of the 159 and the peripheral portion of the 159 can be reduced.

A second guide portion 182 that guides the front case body 121 that slides toward the back side facing plate portion 123 upward while being guided by the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 is integrated with the lower partition wall 125 of the back case body 122. It is formed. The second guide portion 182 exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. The front case body 121 is moved upward with respect to the back case body 122 so that the lower play is smaller than the upper play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a. invite. As a result, it is possible to easily create a state in which the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b are close to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c with good reproducibility.

Lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and lower peripheral edge portions 156b in a state where a part of the free end side of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166. There is a play of common dimensions in the vertical direction between ~ 159b. The vertical direction is the direction in which the front case body 121 is guided by the second guide portion 182. Therefore, when the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide portion 182 while the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the corresponding boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the first to fourth connectors are used. In CN1 to CN4, it is prevented that the play between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b is uneven. As a result, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b can be uniformly brought close to the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a.

The upper partition wall 124 of the back case body 122 is provided with a first guide portion 181 that guides the front case body 121 that slides toward the back side facing plate portion 123 downward while being guided by the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174. ing. After inserting the four position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 into the corresponding four boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the front case body 121 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 123 along the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174. The seven connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166 while eliminating the need for finely adjusting the position of the front case body 121 with respect to the main control board 61. Can be done. The seven connectors CN1 to CN7 are located at the center of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 in the vertical direction of the seven connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 164 to Since it is inserted through the 166, the connector insertion holes 156 to 104h to which the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the locking receiving portions 95j to 97j of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 correspond to each other. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from colliding with the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b, 164b to 166b of 159, 164 to 166. As a result, in the process of assembling the main control device 60, the work of inserting the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 into the corresponding seven connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166 is simplified, and the efficiency of the work is improved. be able to.

The connector group corresponding recess 155 is formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. The side surface 155b of the connector group-corresponding recess 155 stands up substantially vertically from the connector group-corresponding plate portion 155a in the direction opposite to that of the main control board 61. As a result, it is difficult to insert a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire into the gap between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a.

The fixing portions 113b and 114b of all the terminals 113 and 114 of the second connector CN2 and the third connector CN3 are formed along the element mounting surface 61e between the lower upright wall portions 102c and 103c and the lower peripheral edge portions 157b and 158b. It extends so as to straddle. The second connector CN2 and the third connector CN3 have terminals having fixed portions extending so as to straddle between the upper standing wall portions 102b and 103b and the upper peripheral portions 157a and 158a along the element mounting surface 61e. not exist. Therefore, the signal lines set in all the terminals 113 and 114 of the second connector CN2 and the third connector CN3 can be preferentially protected from fraudulent acts using a fraudulent jig such as a wire.

The signal line of the detection signal in the first operation port detection sensor 46a is assigned to the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2. The terminal 113 is preferentially protected from fraud that brings a conductive fraudulent jig close to it. As a result, it is possible to prevent an act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line and illegally creating a situation in which a prize is generated for the first operating port 33 of the game ball.

A signal line for the detection signal of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is assigned to the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3. The terminal 114 is preferentially protected from fraud that brings a conductive fraudulent jig close to it. As a result, it is possible to prevent an act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line and illegally creating a situation in which a prize is generated for the second operating port 34 of the game ball.

The signal line of the detection signal in the radio wave detection sensor 202 is assigned to the 11th terminal which is the one end side terminal 115 of the 4th connector CN4, and the 13th terminal which is the one end side terminal 115 of the 4th connector CN4 is assigned. On the other hand, the signal line of the detection signal in the magnetic detection sensor 203 is assigned. The eleventh terminal and the thirteenth terminal are preferentially protected from fraudulent approaching the conductive fraudulent jig. This makes it possible to prevent an illegal creation of a situation in which an illegal radio wave or magnetism cannot be detected.

For the 11th terminal, which is the terminal 111 on one end of the first connector CN1, the main CPU 64 issues various payout / receive commands (payout restriction command, front door open command, front door close command, main body open command, main body) from the payout side CPU 222. A signal line is assigned to receive a close command, a full tank state command, a full tank status release command, a ballless state command, a ballless state release command, a payout abnormal state command, and a payout abnormal state release command). The thirteenth terminal is preferentially protected from fraud that brings a conductive fraudulent jig close to it. As a result, the front door closing command, the main body closing command, the full tank state release command, the ballless state release command, or the payout abnormal state release command is illegally transmitted, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state and the game machine main body 12 is in the open state. It is possible to prevent the open state, the full tank state, the ballless state, or the payout abnormal state from being illegally released.

For the 13th terminal, which is the terminal 111 on one end of the first connector CN1, the main CPU 64 gives various payout transmission commands (1 prize ball command, 10 prize ball commands, and 15 prize ball commands) to the payout side CPU 222. ) Is assigned to the signal line. The fifteenth terminal is preferentially protected from fraud that brings a conductive fraudulent jig close to it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being illegally paid out due to the act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line.

A signal line is assigned to the 19th terminal, which is the terminal 111 on one end side of the first connector CN1, for the main CPU 64 to receive the prize ball permission signal from the payout side CPU 222. The 19th terminal is preferentially protected from fraud that brings a conductive fraudulent jig close to it. As a result, even though the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 224 is not "0" due to a fraudulent act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line, the payout side from the main CPU 64 It is possible to prevent a situation in which the prize ball command is illegally transmitted to the CPU 222 is created.

When it is specified that the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state in the state other than the open / close execution mode, the special electric abnormality notification is performed, and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) is a process for advancing the game (steps S208 to 27). The process of step S219) is not executed. Further, when it is specified that the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state in the state where the open state winning of the general electric accessory 34a has not occurred, the general electric abnormality notification is performed and the timer interrupt processing (Fig. In 27), the process for advancing the game (processes in steps S208 to S219) is no longer executed. The signal line for the main CPU 64 to transmit the special electric drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32c is assigned to the twelfth terminal which is the other end side terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4. Further, the signal line for the main CPU 64 to transmit the general electric drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34c is assigned to the 14th terminal which is the other end side terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4. In the fourth connector CN4, the terminal 115 on one end is preferentially protected from fraud that brings a conductive jig for fraud closer than the terminal 116 on the other end. One end side of the 4th connector CN4 is a signal line (signal line of special electric drive signal and signal line of general electric drive signal) that can grasp that fraudulent activity has been performed by abnormal notification (special electric abnormality notification and general electric abnormal notification). By arranging the terminal 116 on the other end side (specifically, the 12th terminal and the 14th terminal) instead of the terminal 115, a fraudulent act of illegally opening the special electric winning device 32 and a general electric accessory 34a can be performed. In the case of fraudulent acts that are illegally opened, the manager of the game hall can detect and respond to these fraudulent acts, while the 4th connector CN4 is preferentially protected from fraudulent acts. It is possible to assign a signal line for transmitting or receiving other information to the terminal 115 on one end side.

<Another form of the first embodiment>
The fixing portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 may be in contact with the connector group corresponding plate portions 155a. As a result, the distance between the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 and the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a can be reduced. Therefore, a conductive misuse jig such as a wire is inserted from the upper play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Then, a fraudulent act of contacting the fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the terminal 111 on one end side of the first connector CN1, the terminal 112 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 113 of the third connector CN3, and the terminal 115 on the one end side of the fourth connector CN4. Can be prevented.

The front case body in a state where the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are in contact with each other. The 121 may be fixed to the back case body 122. In this configuration, the second guide portion 182 guides the front case body 121 upward with respect to the back case body 122 and the main control board 61 until the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c come into contact with the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b. To do. In this way, the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b are in contact with each other, so that the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b are in contact with each other. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire into the machine.

Instead of the configuration in which the back case body 122 is provided with the second guide portion 182 that guides the front case body 121 upward with respect to the back case body 122 and the main control board 61 by coming into contact with the front case body 121. A second guide portion that guides the front case body 121 upward with respect to the back case body 122 and the main control board 61 by contacting with the main control board 61 fixed to the back case body 122 is provided on the front case body 121. It may be provided. Specifically, in the front facing plate portion 141 of the front case body 121, a second guide portion is integrally formed at the lower part of the front facing plate portion 141 so as to project toward the main control board 61 side. The second guide portion is the first to seventh in the step in which the front case body 121 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 123 in a state where the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178. After the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166, they come into contact with the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61 to contact the back case body 122 and the back case body 122. A guide surface for guiding the front case body 121 upward with respect to the main control board 61 is provided. The guide surface is inclined downward in the direction from the front side facing plate portion 141 to the back side facing plate portion 123 (left side in FIG. 17A). The front case body 121 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 123 in a state where the lower long side 61b portion of the main control board 61 is in contact with the guide surface, so that the back case body 122 and the main control board 61 The front case body 121 is guided upward with respect to the above, and the lower peripheral edges 156b to the lower peripheral edges 156 to 159 of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are guided upward to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. 159b approaches.

In this way, even if the front case body 121 is provided with a second guide portion that comes into contact with the main control board 61 and guides the front case body 121 upward with respect to the back case body 122 and the main control board 61. , The play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 is the first. The play can be made smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. ..

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control device 230 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The configuration of the main control device 230 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 34 to 38. 34 (a) is a front view of the main control device 230 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 34 (b) is an enlarged front view of the main control device 230 showing the fifth connector CN5, FIG. 34 (c). Is an enlarged front view of the main control device 230 showing the sixth connector CN6, and FIG. 34 (d) is a front view of the main control device 230 showing the seventh connector CN7 in an enlarged manner. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the main control device 230, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of the main control device 230. Further, FIG. 37 (a) is an enlarged sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 34 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the first connector CN1, and FIG. 37 (b) is an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector CN2. FIG. 34 (a) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is an enlarged sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 34 (a) showing the periphery of the third connector CN3. (D) is an enlarged sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 34 (a) showing the periphery of the fourth connector CN4.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the main control device 230 includes a board box 231 for accommodating the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 35, the substrate box 231 is sandwiched between the front case body 232 that covers the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, and the main control board 61 and the front case body 232, and the first to fourth boards. It includes a connector cover 233 that surrounds the connectors CN1 to CN4, and a back case body 234 that covers the substrate back surface 61f (FIG. 36), which is a plate surface on the main control substrate 61 opposite to the element mounting surface 61e. The front case body 232, the connector cover 233, and the back case body 234 are made of a colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin. As a result, the element mounting surface 61e and the substrate back surface 61f of the main control board 61 housed in the board box 231 can be visually recognized from the outside of the board box 231. The materials forming the front case body 232, the connector cover 233, and the back case body 234 are not limited to the transparent polycarbonate resin, and may be a transparent acrylic resin or even a colored transparent material. Good.

As shown in FIG. 35, the back case body 234 includes a back side facing plate portion 235 formed in a substantially rectangular shape with a horizontally long rectangle facing the back surface 61f (FIG. 36) of the main control board 61. The back side facing plate portion 235 has a board facing surface 235a facing the main control board 61. A pair of upper and lower partition walls 236 and a lower partition wall 237 are integrally formed on the back side facing plate portion 235 by projecting the upper and lower long side portions of the substrate facing surface 235a toward the main control board 61 side. Further, on the back side facing plate portion 235, the left first partition wall 238 and the left second partition wall 239 are integrally formed by projecting the upper and lower portions of the left short side portion of the substrate facing surface 235a toward the main control board 61 side. At the same time, the upper and lower portions of the right short side portion of the substrate facing surface 235a are projected toward the main control board 61, and the right first partition wall 241 and the right second partition wall 242 are integrally formed. The back case body 234 is provided with a back side accommodating portion 243 capable of accommodating a part of the back side of the front case body 232 by the back side facing plate portion 235 and the partition walls 236 to 239, 241,242.

The back side facing plate portion 235 has a columnar board fixing boss 244 to which is used for fixing the main control board 61 to the back case body 234 on the left upper part, the left lower part, the right lower part and the right upper part of the board facing surface 235a. 247 are integrally formed. The board fixing bosses 244 to 247 project from the board facing surface 235a toward the main control board 61, and screw holes for screwing the main control board 61 to the free ends of the board fixing bosses 244 to 247 (not shown). ) Is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 36, in the upper left side, lower left side, lower right side and upper right side of the main control board 61, a board fixing through hole for screwing the main control board 61 to the board fixing bosses 244 to 247 251 to 254 are formed. These four substrate fixing through holes 251 to 254 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the four substrate fixing bosses 244 to 247 described above. The main control board 61 is fixed to the front side of the back case body 234 by being screwed to the board fixing bosses 244 to 247 from the element mounting surface 61e side. As a result, the main control board 61 is integrated with the back case body 234. In this state, the back surface 61f (FIG. 36) of the main control board 61 faces the board facing surface 235a at a predetermined distance in the depth direction (front-back direction).

As shown in FIG. 35, the front case body 232 sandwiches the MPU 63 (FIG. 9 (a)) and various elements 91 to 94 (FIG. 9 (a)) mounted on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. A horizontally long rectangular front facing plate portion 261 facing the element mounting surface 61e is provided. As shown in FIG. 36, the front facing plate portion 261 has an element facing surface 261a facing the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 35). A pair of upper and lower upright walls 262 and a lower upright wall 263 are integrally formed on the front side facing plate portion 261 by erecting the upper and lower long sides of the element facing surface 261a on the back side (back case body 234 side). At the same time, the left and right short sides of the element facing surface 261a are erected on the back side (back case body 234 side) to integrally form a pair of left and right standing walls 264 and a right standing wall 265. The upper upright wall 262 and the lower upright wall 263 face each other at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the left upright wall 264 and the right upright wall 265 face each other at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. The front case body 232 is provided with a substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped substrate accommodating portion 266 opened to the back side by a front side facing plate portion 261 and these upright walls 262 to 265, and can accommodate the main control substrate 61. ing.

As shown in FIG. 35, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 34 (a)) are placed in the main control device at positions facing the connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61 in the front facing plate portion 261. A recess 267 corresponding to the connector group for exposing to the surface of 230 is formed. The connector group corresponding recess 267 is formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 261 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the connector group-corresponding recess 267 includes substantially the entire element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 35) of the main control board 61 with the connector cover 233 sandwiched at the bottom of the connector group-corresponding recess 267. It is provided with a horizontally long rectangular connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b) and 38 (a) and (b), the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a is in contact with the connector cover 233.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a penetrates the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the plate thickness direction, and the first connector CN1, the second connector CN2, the third connector CN3, and the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a are penetrated. The first connector insertion hole 271, the second connector insertion hole 272, the third connector insertion hole 273, and the fourth connector insertion hole 274 through which the fourth connector CN4 is inserted are formed. These first to fourth connector insertion holes 270 to 274 are horizontally long rectangular through holes.

Next, the configuration of the connector cover 233 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the connector cover 233 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate. The connector cover 233 has a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 34 (a)) mounted on the main control board 61, and these first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are associated with each other. The first cover side insertion hole 275, the second cover side insertion hole 276, the third cover side insertion hole 277, and the fourth cover side insertion hole 278 are formed. The first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are through holes formed by penetrating the connector cover 233 in the thickness direction.

As shown in FIG. 36, the connector cover 233 is fixed to the back surface of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. The connector group compatible plate portion 267a has a pair of left and right cover position adjusting bosses 281,282 on the back surface of the connector group compatible plate portion 267a to prevent the fixed position of the connector cover 233 from being displaced with respect to the connector group compatible plate portion 267a. Are integrally formed. The cover position adjusting bosses 281,282 project from the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a to the back side (main control board 61 side).

A pair of left and right cover position adjusting holes 283 and 284 are formed at both ends of the connector cover 233 in the longitudinal direction so that the cover position adjusting bosses 281,282 can be inserted. The cover position adjusting holes 283 and 284 are through holes that penetrate the connector cover 233 in the thickness direction. One plate surface of the connector cover 233 is an adhesive surface coated with an adhesive for fixing the connector cover 233 to the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. The connector cover 233 is attached to the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a from the back side of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a so that the cover position adjusting holes 283 and 284 are inserted into the cover position adjusting bosses 281, 228. Is fixed to the front case body 232.

As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b) and 38 (a) and 38 (b), the first cover side insertion hole 275 is an insertion hole corresponding to the first connector insertion hole 271 and is the second cover side. The insertion hole 276 is an insertion hole corresponding to the second connector insertion hole 272, the third cover side insertion hole 277 is an insertion hole corresponding to the third connector insertion hole 273, and the fourth cover side insertion hole 278 is the fourth. It is an insertion hole corresponding to the connector insertion hole 274. The first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are formed to be slightly smaller than the corresponding connector insertion holes 270 to 274. The opening area of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is smaller than the opening area of the corresponding connector insertion holes 270 to 274. The vertical dimensions from the upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 to the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b are below the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the corresponding connector insertion holes 270-274. It is approximately 2 mm smaller than the vertical dimensions of the side peripheral portions 271b to 274b.

In a state where the connector cover 233 is fixed to the front case body 232 (FIG. 36), the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are in a state of being communicated with the corresponding connector insertion holes 270 to 274. There is. The upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are located below the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the corresponding connector insertion holes 270 to 274, and the first to fourth covers are inserted. The lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the cover-side insertion holes 275-278 are located above the lower peripheral edges 271b-274b of the corresponding connector insertion holes 271-274. The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into both the first to fourth connector insertion holes 270 to 274 and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 to be exposed on the surface of the main control device 230. Then, the male connector (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be accepted.

The vertical dimensions from the upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a to the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. It is set to be approximately 0.8 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the lock receiving portion 101h to the lower end of the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h. This makes it possible to insert the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the insertion holes 275 to 278 on the first to fourth cover sides. The vertical dimensions of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are from the upper end of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 to the lower end of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. It is set approximately 1.8 mm larger than the size. Therefore, in a state where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the first to fourth cover side insertions are inserted. Between the upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a of the holes 275 to 278, and between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. A total of approximately 1.8 mm of play occurs.

The connector cover 233 exists in a range facing the connector group mounting area 88 (FIG. 35) on which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are mounted on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b) and 38 (a) and 38 (b), the connector cover 233 has the element mounting surface 61e and the front-rear direction (FIGS. 37 (a), (b) and 38 (b). They face each other with a predetermined interval (specifically, an interval of about 1.5 mm) in the left-right directions in a) and (b), and the first to first control boards 61 and the connector cover 233 are opposed to each other. There are fixed portions 111b to 116b of terminals 111 to 116 in the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. There is some play between the fixing portions 111b to 116b and the connector cover 233.

The connector cover 233 is a member smaller than the front case body 232. The vertical dimensional error from the upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a to the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 that may occur when the connector cover 233 is resin-molded is the front case body 232. It is smaller than the vertical dimensional error from the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a to the lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 that may occur when the resin is molded. The vertical dimensions of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 formed in the connector cover 233, which is a member smaller than the front case body 232, are formed in the front case body 232. By setting it smaller than the vertical dimension of, even if an error occurs during resin molding, the corresponding first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 and the first to first first connectors CN1 to CN4 can be connected to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. It is possible to reduce the play existing around the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 while enabling the insertion into the four connector insertion holes 271-274.

The front case body 232 that covers most of the element mounting surface 61e side of the main control board 61 and the connector cover 233 on which the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are formed are separate members. The connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61 allows the front case body 232 having a common shape to be used in a plurality of models having different types and arrangements of connectors mounted on the connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61. The connector cover 233 can be selected for each model according to the type and arrangement of the connectors mounted on the.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are mainly located at positions facing the fifth to seventh connector mounting areas 85a to 87a of the main control board 61 in the front facing plate portion 261. The fifth to seventh connector compatible recesses 285 to 287 are formed to be exposed on the surface of the control device 230, and the fifth to seventh connector compatible plate portions 285a of these fifth to seventh connector compatible recesses 285 to 287 are formed. No. 5 to 7th connector insertion holes 291 to 293 are formed in ~ 287a so that the corresponding connectors CN5 to CN7 can be inserted.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), position adjusting bosses 294 to 297 are provided at the four corners of the element facing surface 261a of the front facing plate portion 261, and boss insertion holes 301 to the four corners of the main control board 61. 304 is provided. Similar to the first embodiment, the front case body 232 is guided by the position adjusting bosses 294 to 297 after the position adjusting bosses 294 to 297 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 301 to 304. It is slid to the back case body 234 side.

FIG. 39 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device 230 when cut at a cut surface (line EE of FIG. 34 (a)) passing through the first connector CN1 and the sixth connector CN6. As shown in FIG. 39, the upper partition wall 236 of the back case body 234 is provided with a first guide portion 305 that guides the front case body 232 downward. The first guide portion 305 is a front case body that comes into contact with the first guide portion 305 in the process of sliding the position adjusting bosses 294 to 297 toward the back side facing plate portion 235 while being inserted into the boss insertion holes 301 to 304. Guide 232 down approximately 0.7 mm. Similar to the first embodiment, after the position adjusting bosses 294 to 297 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 301 to 304, the front case body 232 is guided downward by the first guide portion 305, whereby the first ~ 4th connectors CN1 to CN4 are located in the center of the corresponding connector insertion holes 270 to 274 and the corresponding cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 in the vertical direction, and the 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7 correspond to each other. The connector insertion holes 291 to 293 are located at the center in the vertical direction. Then, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 270 to 274 and the corresponding cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 correspond to each other. It can be inserted through the connector insertion holes 291 to 293.

As shown in FIG. 39, the lower partition wall 237 of the back case body 234 is provided with a second guide portion 306 that guides the front case body 232 upward after being guided downward by the first guide portion 305. There is. The second guide portion 306 guides the front case body 232 in contact with the second guide portion 306 approximately 0.7 mm upward. When the front case body 232 is guided upward by the second guide portion 306, the connector cover 233 is guided upward following the front case body 232. By guiding the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 upward by the second guide portion 306, as shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b) and 38 (a) and (b), the first 1st The lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 and the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are in close contact with each other. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that an unauthorized jig will be inserted between the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b and the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c.

In a state where the front case body 232 is fixed to the back case body 234 with the connector cover 233 and the main control board 61 interposed therebetween, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), the fixing portion 111b at one end side terminal 111 of the first connector CN1. Extends downward from a position lower than the center of the first housing 101 in the lateral direction (closer to the lower standing wall portion 101c), and is below the lower standing wall portion 101c and the first connector insertion hole 271. It extends so as to straddle the peripheral portion 271b and the lower peripheral portion 275b between the lower upright wall portion 101c and the first cover side insertion hole 275 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. ing. Further, the fixing portion 112b of the other end side terminal 112 extends upward from a position closer to the center of the first housing 101 in the lateral direction (closer to the upper standing wall portion 101b), and extends upward from the position of the upper standing wall portion 101b. Between the upper peripheral edge portion 271a of the first connector insertion hole 271 and between the upper standing wall portion 101b and the upper peripheral edge portion 275a of the first cover side insertion hole 275 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. It extends to straddle.

As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the fixing portion 113b of the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2 extends downward from the central position in the lateral direction of the second housing 102, and extends downward from the lower standing wall portion 102c and the second housing 102. Between the lower peripheral edge portion 272b of the 2 connector insertion hole 272 and between the lower upright wall portion 102c and the lower peripheral edge portion 276b of the second cover side insertion hole 276 on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. It extends so as to straddle along. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the fixing portion 114b of the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3 extends downward from the central position in the lateral direction of the third housing 103, and extends downward from the lower standing wall portion 103c and the third housing 103. 3 The element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 is between the lower peripheral edge portion 273b of the connector insertion hole 273 and between the lower upright wall portion 103c and the lower peripheral edge portion 277b of the third cover side insertion hole 277. It extends so as to straddle along.

As shown in FIG. 38 (b), the fixed portion 115b of the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector is located below the center of the fourth housing 104 in the lateral direction (closer to the lower standing wall portion 104c). It extends downward, between the lower upright wall portion 104c and the lower peripheral edge portion 274b of the fourth connector insertion hole 274, and between the lower upright wall portion 104c and the fourth cover side insertion hole 278, the lower peripheral edge portion 278b. It extends so as to straddle the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. Further, the fixing portion 116b of the terminal 116 on the other end extends upward from a position closer to the center of the fourth housing 104 in the lateral direction (closer to the upper standing wall portion 104b), and extends upward from the position of the upper standing wall portion 104b. Between the upper peripheral edge portion 274a of the fourth connector insertion hole 274 and between the upper standing wall portion 104b and the upper peripheral edge portion 278a of the fourth cover side insertion hole 278 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. It extends to straddle.

As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b) and 38 (a) and (b), the front case body 232 is fixed to the back case body 234 with the connector cover 233 and the main control board 61 sandwiched between them. , The play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 is the first. It is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. As a result, the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 The fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire is prevented.

The play dimension existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is preferably 0.8 mm or less. It is more preferably 0.5 mm or less. By setting the play size to 0.8 mm or less, a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire can be inserted from the play to insert one end side terminal 111 of the first connector CN1 and the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which the terminals 114 of the 3 connector CN3 and the fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the terminal 115 on one end side of the 4th connector CN4 are brought into contact with each other. By setting the size of the play to 0.5 mm or less, it is difficult to insert the fraudulent jig into the play, and the effect of preventing the fraudulent activity can be enhanced.

The play between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 is the upper standing wall portion 101b. It is smaller than the play between ~ 104b and the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. As a result, the play such as a wire existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 can be used. The possibility of fraudulent insertion of a conductive fraudulent jig is reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b) and 38 (a) and (b), the rear of the connector cover 233 (FIG. 37 (a), (FIG. 37 (a), 3), around the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. In b) and the right side in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a exists. Therefore, the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278, the first -Illegal use of wires, etc. from play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278. When the jig is to be inserted, the insertion angle of the illegal jig is limited by the presence of the plate portion 267a corresponding to the connector group. As described above, the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a is formed in the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a by the configuration in which the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a exists behind the connector cover 233 around the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Even if the first to fourth connector insertion holes 270 to 274 are larger than the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 formed in the connector cover 233, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a fraudulent jig from the vertical play of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 existing between the connector cover 233 and the connector cover 233.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A connector cover 233 that surrounds the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 is provided between the main control board 61 and the front case body 232. The play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 is the upper standing wall portion. It is smaller than the play existing between 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. Therefore, the connector cover 233 exposes the board box 231 to the outside through the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. The range of the main control board 61 can be narrowed. As a result, a conductive misuse jig such as a wire is inserted into the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fraudulent jig will reach the terminals 111 to 116 and the wiring pattern existing on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 when a fraudulent act is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally manipulating signals by using a conductive fraudulent jig.

The connector cover 233 exists between the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a and the fixing portions 111b to 116b at the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Since the connector cover 233 is located closer to the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a than the fixed portions 111b to 116b, the connector cover 233 may prevent the unauthorized jig from coming into contact with the fixed portions 111b to 116b. it can. Since the connector cover 233 is located closer to the main control board 61 than the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a, it is possible to prevent the connector cover 233 from being illegally removed.

The opening area of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 formed in the connector cover 233 is the opening area of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 270 to 274 formed in the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. Narrower than. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the connector cover 233 is not provided and the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted only through the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-276, the first control board 61 has a first position. It is possible to reduce the area of the region exposed to the outside of the substrate box 231 around the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts in which the conductive fraudulent jig is electrically contacted with the region exposed to the outside of the board box 231 in the main control board 61.

The lower partition wall 237 of the back case body 234 is integrated with a second guide portion 306 that guides the front case body 232 that slides toward the back side facing plate portion 235 upward while being guided by the position adjusting bosses 294 to 297. It is formed. When the front case body 232 is guided upward by the second guide portion 306, the connector cover 233 is guided upward following the front case body 232, and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are guided upward. The lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b and the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are in close contact with each other. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that an unauthorized jig will be inserted between the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b and the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c.

<Another form of the second embodiment>
A predetermined play (specifically, a play of about 1 mm) may be provided between the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a and the connector cover 233. As a result, the distance from the fixed portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 to the surface of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a can be extended. Therefore, the upper play or the lower upright wall portion existing between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 from the front case body 232 side. First, a conductive misuse jig such as a wire is inserted into the lower play existing between 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. It is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts in which the fixing portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are brought into contact with each other.

-The connector cover 233 may be configured to easily bend when it comes into contact with the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Specifically, the connector cover 233 is made of a colorless and transparent polyethylene resin. The material forming the connector cover 233 is not limited to the colorless and transparent polyethylene resin, and may be a colorless and transparent urethane resin, or may be colored and transparent. As already described in the second embodiment, the front case body 232 is made of a polycarbonate resin. The plate thickness of the connector cover 233 is approximately 0.5 mm, which is thinner than the plate thickness (approximately 1 mm) of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the front case body 232. The connector cover 233 has higher flexibility than the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. When the front case body 232 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 235 with the position adjusting boss inserted into the boss insertion hole, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are formed on the connector cover 233. When the peripheral portions 275a to 278a, 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 come into contact with each other, they are pushed by the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the connector cover 233 bends. The slide of the front case body 232 to the back case body 234 can be continued.

Therefore, in a configuration in which the connector cover 233 can be easily deformed, the upper peripheral edge portion 275a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is prevented from being lowered in the assembly efficiency of the main control device 60. The vertical dimension from ~ 278a to the lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b can be set small. As a result, the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, and the first The play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is set to be small. Can be done.

The surface of the connector cover 233 is covered with the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a, except for the portion protruding inside the first to fourth connector insertion holes 270 to 274. As a result, the connector cover 233 existing between the housings 101 to 104 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 is turned over and misused from the turned up part. The possibility that the jig will be inserted can be reduced.

The front case in a state where the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 are in contact with each other. The body 232 may be fixed to the back case body 234. In this configuration, the second guide portion 306 has the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 with respect to the back case body 234 and the main control board 61 until the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c come into contact with the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b. Guide upwards. In this way, the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b are in contact with each other, so that the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b are in contact with each other. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire into the machine.

A second guide portion 306 that guides the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 upward with respect to the back case body 234 and the main control board 61 by coming into contact with the front case body 232 is provided on the back case body 234. Instead of the configuration, the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 are guided upward with respect to the back case body 234 and the main control board 61 by contacting with the main control board 61 fixed to the back case body 234. The guide portion may be provided on the front case body 232.

Specifically, in the front facing plate portion 261 of the front case body 232, a second guide portion is integrally formed at the lower part of the front facing plate portion 261 so as to project from the element facing surface 261a toward the main control board 61. ing. The second guide portion is the first to seventh in the step in which the front case body 232 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 235 in a state where the position adjusting bosses 294 to 297 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 301 to 304. After the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the first to seventh connector insertion holes 271-274, 291 to 293, they come into contact with the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61 to contact the back case body 234 and the back case body 234 and the back case body 234. A guide surface for guiding the front case body 232 upward with respect to the main control board 61 is provided. The guide surface is inclined downward in the direction from the front side facing plate portion 261 to the back side facing plate portion 235 (left side in FIG. 39). The front case body 232 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 235 in a state where the lower long side 61b portion of the main control board 61 is in contact with the guide surface, so that the back case body 234 and the main control board 61 The front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 are guided upward with respect to the above, and below the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 in the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The side peripheral portions 275b to 278b approach each other.

In this way, the front case body 232 is provided with a second guide portion that comes into contact with the main control board 61 and guides the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 upward with respect to the back case body 234 and the main control board 61. Even in such a configuration, it exists between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. Play can be reduced.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control device 310 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The configuration of the main control device 310 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 40 to 44. FIG. 40 (a) is a front view of the main control device 310 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 40 (b) is a front view of the main control device 310 in which the periphery of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 is enlarged. 41 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the main control device 310, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of the main control device 310. Further, FIG. 43 (a) is an enlarged sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 40 (a) showing an enlarged periphery of the first connector CN1, and FIG. 43 (b) is an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector CN2. FIG. 40 (a) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 40 (a), and FIG. 44 (a) is an enlarged sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 40 (a) showing the periphery of the third connector CN3. (B) is an enlarged sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 40 (a) showing the periphery of the fourth connector CN4.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the main control device 310 includes a main control board 61 already described in the first embodiment and a board box 311 for accommodating the main control board 61. Similar to the first embodiment, MPU63 (FIG. 9A), first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7, and various elements (resistor 91, capacitor 92, A transistor 93 and an IC 94 (FIG. 9 (a)) are mounted, and the plate surface on one side thereof is an element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41).

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the board box 311 has a front case body 312 that covers the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41) of the main control board 61 and a side opposite to the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. It includes a back case body 313 that covers the back surface 61f (FIG. 42) of the substrate, which is a plate surface, and a connector-compatible plate 314 that is fixed to the main control board 61 and surrounds the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The connector-corresponding plate 314 exists between the main control board 61 and the front case body 312. The front case body 312, the back case body 313, and the connector-compatible plate 314 are made of a colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin. As a result, the element mounting surface 61e and the substrate back surface 61f of the main control board 61 housed in the board box 311 can be visually recognized from the outside of the board box 311. The material forming the front case body 312, the back case body 313, and the connector-compatible plate 314 is not limited to the transparent polycarbonate resin, and may be a transparent acrylic resin, and may be colored and transparent. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 41, the back case body 313 includes a back side facing plate portion 315 formed in a substantially rectangular shape with a horizontally long rectangle facing the back surface 61f (FIG. 42) of the main control board 61. The back side facing plate portion 315 has a board facing surface 315a facing the main control board 61. A pair of upper and lower partition walls 316 and a lower partition wall 317 are integrally formed on the back side facing plate portion 315 by projecting the upper and lower long side portions of the substrate facing surface 315a toward the main control board 61 side. Further, on the back side facing plate portion 315, the left first partition wall 318 and the left second partition wall 319 are integrally formed by projecting the upper and lower portions of the left short side portion of the substrate facing surface 315a toward the main control board 61 side. At the same time, the upper and lower portions of the right short side portion of the substrate facing surface 315a are projected toward the main control board 61, and the right first partition wall 321 and the right second partition wall 322 are integrally formed.

The upper partition wall 316 and the lower partition wall 317 face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Further, the left side first section wall 318 and the left side second section wall 319 and the right side first section wall 321 and the right side second section wall 322 face each other at predetermined intervals in the lateral direction. The back case body 313 is provided with a back side accommodating portion 323 capable of accommodating a part of the back side of the front case body 312 by the back side facing plate portion 315 and these partition walls 316 to 319, 321 and 322.

The back side facing plate portion 315 has a columnar board fixing boss 324 to be used for fixing the main control board 61 to the back case body 313 on the upper left side, the lower left side, the lower right side and the upper right side of the board facing surface 315a. 327 is integrally formed. The board fixing bosses 324 to 327 project from the board facing surface 315a toward the main control board 61, and screw holes for screwing the main control board 61 to the free ends of the board fixing bosses 324 to 327 (not shown). ) Is formed. Further, in the upper left side, the lower left side, the lower right side, and the upper right side of the main control board 61 when viewed from the front, board fixing through holes 331 to 334 that allow the main control board 61 to be screwed to the board fixing bosses 324 to 327 It is formed. These four substrate fixing through holes 331 to 334 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the above-mentioned four substrate fixing bosses 324 to 327. The main control board 61 is fixed to the front side of the back case body 313 by being screwed to the board fixing bosses 324 to 327 from the element mounting surface 61e side. As a result, the main control board 61 is integrated with the back case body 313. In this state, the back surface 61f (FIG. 42) of the main control board 61 faces the board facing surface 315a at a predetermined distance in the depth direction (front-back direction).

Next, the configuration of the connector-compatible plate 314 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the connector-corresponding plate 314 includes a plate-shaped portion 335 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. The plate-shaped portion 335 has a first plate-side insertion hole 336 and a second connector CN2 (FIG. 40 (a)) through which the first connector CN1 (FIG. 40 (a)) mounted on the main control board 61 can be inserted. The second plate side insertion hole 337 and the third connector CN3 (FIG. 40 (a)) through which the third plate side insertion hole 338 and the fourth connector CN4 (FIG. 40 (a)) can be inserted. A fourth plate-side insertion hole 339 is formed so that the insertion is possible. These first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 are horizontally long rectangular through holes.

As shown in FIG. 42, the plate-shaped portion 335 has a pair of left and right plate fixing bosses 341 for screwing the connector-compatible plates 314 to the main control board 61 at both ends of the plate-shaped portion 335 in the longitudinal direction. The 342 is integrally formed, and a pair of left and right plate position adjusting bosses 343 and 344 for preventing the fixed position of the connector-corresponding plate 314 from being displaced with respect to the main control board 61 are integrally formed. The plate fixing bosses 341 and 342 and the plate position adjusting bosses 343 and 344 project toward the main control board 61, and screw holes (screw holes) for screwing the connector-compatible plate 314 to the protruding ends of the plate fixing bosses 341 and 342 ( (Not shown) is formed.

As shown in FIG. 41, a pair of left and right plates on which screws 349 for fixing the connector-compatible plate 314 to the main control board 61 can be inserted at both ends of the connector group mounting area 88 in the longitudinal direction of the main control board 61. The fixing holes 345 and 346 and the plate position adjusting holes 347 and 348 that allow the free end of the plate position adjusting boss 343, 344 (FIG. 42) extending from the plate-shaped portion 335 of the connector-compatible plate 314 to be inserted are formed. .. These plate fixing holes 345, 346 and plate position adjusting holes 347, 348 are through holes that penetrate the main control board 61 in the plate thickness direction.

As shown in FIG. 42, the protruding dimensions of the plate position adjusting bosses 343 and 344 are larger than the protruding dimensions of the plate fixing bosses 341 and 342. The connector-compatible plate 314 is inserted into the plate-side insertion holes 336 to 339 corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, and then the two plate position adjustment bosses 343 and 344 correspond to the two plate position adjustment holes 347. , 348 is inserted. By inserting the two plate position adjusting bosses 343 and 344 into the corresponding two plate position adjusting holes 347 and 348, the fixing position of the connector corresponding plate 314 with respect to the main control board 61 is determined. After that, the connector-compatible plate 314 is fixed to the element mounting surface 61e side of the main control board 61 by screwing the plate fixing bosses 341 and 342 to the main control board 61 from the back side of the main control board 61.

The connector-compatible plate 314 covers substantially the entire connector group mounting area 88 (FIG. 41) on which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 40 (a)) are mounted on the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41). .. As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b) and FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the connector-compatible plate 314 has the element mounting surface 61e and the front-rear direction (FIGS. 43 (a), (b) and 44. They face each other with a predetermined interval (specifically, an interval of about 1.5 mm) in the left-right directions in (a) and (b), and the main control board 61 and the connector-compatible plate 314 have a second position. Fixing portions 111b to 116b of terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are present. There is some play between the fixing portions 111b to 116b and the connector-corresponding plate 314.

As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b) and FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), in a state where the connector-compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are , The corresponding plate-side insertion holes 336-339 are present near the center in the vertical direction. In a state where the connector-compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the upper peripheral portions of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339. Between 336a and 339a, and between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 336b to 339b of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339. Has a play of approximately 1 mm.

Next, the configuration of the front case body 312 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the front case body 312 sandwiches the MPU 63 (FIG. 9 (a)) and various elements 91 to 94 (FIG. 9 (a)) mounted on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. A horizontally long rectangular front facing plate portion 351 facing the element mounting surface 61e is provided. As shown in FIG. 42, the front facing plate portion 351 has an element facing surface 351a facing the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41). A pair of upper and lower upright walls 352 and a lower upright wall 353 are integrally formed on the front side facing plate portion 351 by erecting the upper and lower long sides of the element facing surface 351a on the back side (back case body 313 side). At the same time, the left and right short sides of the element facing surface 351a are erected on the back side (back case body 313 side) to integrally form a pair of left and right standing walls 354 and a right standing wall 355. The upper standing wall 352 and the lower standing wall 353 face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and the left standing wall 354 and the right standing wall 355 face each other at a predetermined interval in the lateral direction. The front case body 312 is provided with a substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped substrate accommodating portion 356 opened to the back side by a front side facing plate portion 351 and these upright walls 352 to 355, and can accommodate the main control substrate 61. ing.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 40 (a)) are placed in the main control device at positions facing the connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61 in the front facing plate portion 351. A recess 361 corresponding to the connector group for exposing to the surface of 310 is formed. The connector group corresponding recess 361 is formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 351 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the connector group-compatible recess 361 is a horizontally long rectangular connector group-compatible plate portion that faces the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41) of the main control board 61 at the bottom of the connector group-compatible recess 361. It is equipped with 361a.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a is made to penetrate the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the plate thickness direction, and the first connector CN1, the second connector CN2, the third connector CN3 and The first front side connector insertion hole 362, the second front side connector insertion hole 363, the third front side connector insertion hole 364, and the fourth front side connector insertion hole 365 through which the fourth connector CN4 is inserted are formed. These first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are horizontally long rectangular through holes. In the present embodiment, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 formed in the front case body 312, and the plate side insertion holes 336 formed in the connector corresponding plate 314. By being inserted through ~ 339, the surface of the main control device 310 is exposed, and a male connector (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be accepted.

As shown in FIG. 41, the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are placed in the main control device 310 at positions facing the fifth to seventh connector mounting areas 85a to 87a of the main control board 61 in the front facing plate portion 351. The recesses 371 to 373 corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors are formed to be exposed on the surface of the above. As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the fifth to seventh connector-compatible recesses 371 to 373 are formed on the bottom of the fifth to seventh connector-compatible recesses 371 to 373 with the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 (FIG. 41). ) Is provided as a horizontally long rectangular plate portion 371a to 373a corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors, and the plate portions 371a to 373a corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors are provided with the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. The fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 374 to 376 through which the connector is inserted are formed. Similar to the first embodiment, the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are exposed to the surface of the main control device 310 by being inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 374 to 376, and the fifth -A male connector (not shown) corresponding to the seventh connector CN5 to CN7 can be accepted.

As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b) and FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a to the lower peripheral edges 362b to the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. The vertical dimension up to 365b is set to be approximately 3 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the corresponding first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 to the lower end of the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h. .. Therefore, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 362 to 365. The vertical dimensions of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are from the upper end of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b in the corresponding first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 to the lower end of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. It is approximately 4 mm larger than the dimensions up to. Therefore, in a state where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 362 to 365, the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a of the connector insertion holes 362 to 365 A total of approximately 4 mm of play is generated between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b of the connector insertion holes 362 to 365.

The first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 are formed to be slightly smaller than the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 corresponding to the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339. .. The opening area of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 is smaller than the corresponding first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. The vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge portion 336a to the lower peripheral edge portion 336b of the first plate side insertion hole 336 is approximately 2 mm from the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge portion 362a to the lower peripheral edge portion 362b of the first front side connector insertion hole 362. It is small, and the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge portion 337a to the lower peripheral edge portion 337b of the second plate side insertion hole 337 is larger than the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge portion 363a to the lower peripheral edge portion 363b of the second front side connector insertion hole 363. It is approximately 2 mm smaller, and the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge portion 338a to the lower peripheral edge portion 338b of the third plate side insertion hole 338 is the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge portion 364a to the lower peripheral edge portion 364b of the third front side connector insertion hole 364. The vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge portion 339a to the lower peripheral edge portion 339b of the fourth plate side insertion hole 339 is approximately 2 mm smaller than that of the fourth front side connector insertion hole 365 from the upper peripheral edge portion 365a to the lower peripheral edge portion 365b. It is approximately 2 mm smaller than the vertical dimension.

The connector-compatible plate 314 is a component that surrounds the periphery of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, and is a smaller component than the front case body 312 that covers most of the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. In order to fix the connector-compatible plate 314 to the main control board 61, the work of inserting the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the corresponding plate-side insertion holes 336 to 339 involves seven operations mounted on the main control board 61. This is an easier operation than the work of inserting the connectors CN1 to CN7 into the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 and the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 374 to 376. Therefore, the plate-side insertion holes 336 to 339 formed in the connector-corresponding plate 314 can be made slightly smaller than the front-side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 formed in the front case body 312. By using the connector-compatible plate 314, it is possible to prevent the play existing on the upper side of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 from becoming large while suppressing the assembly process from becoming complicated. ..

As shown in FIG. 42, position adjusting bosses 381 to 384 are provided at the four corners of the element facing surface 351a of the front facing plate portion 351 as in the first embodiment. Further, as shown in FIG. 40A, boss insertion holes 385 to 388 are provided at the four corners of the main control board 61. The boss insertion holes 385 to 388 are elongated holes extending vertically along the short sides 61c and 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimension of the boss insertion holes 385-388 is such that the front case body 312 is allowed to move approximately 4 mm in the vertical direction when the position adjustment bosses 381-384 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 385-388. , The diameter is set to be approximately 4 mm larger than the diameter of the position adjusting bosses 381 to 384.

In the process of assembling the main control device 310, the main control board 61 is screwed to the back case body 313 as described above. After that, the connector-compatible plate 314 is screw-fixed to the element mounting surface 61e side of the main control board 61. After that, the position adjusting bosses 381 to 384 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 385 to 388 of the main control board 61, and are inserted into the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. After the 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted into the corresponding 5th to 7th connector insertion holes 374 to 376, the free end of the position adjustment boss 381 to 384 is on the back side. The front case body 312 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 315 until it comes into contact with the facing plate portion 315.

After that, the front case body 312 slides approximately 2 mm upward until the position adjusting bosses 381 to 384 contact the upper ends of the boss insertion holes 385-388 and the front case body 312 cannot be slid further upward. Will be done. As described above, the boss insertion holes 385-388 allow a vertical movement of approximately 2 mm upward of the front case body 312 in a state where the position adjusting bosses 381-384 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 385-388. Has dimensions.

In the state where the front case body 312 has been slid upward, the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. And they are approaching each other at a predetermined interval. The lower play existing between the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 and the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c is preferably 0.8 mm or less, more preferably 0. It is 5.5 mm or less. By setting the lower play to 0.8 mm or less, the possibility that a conductive misuse jig such as a wire is inserted from the lower play can be reduced, and the lower play can be reduced. By setting the play to 0.5 mm or less, the possibility can be further reduced.

After that, the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 are in a state where the upper slide of the front case body 312 is completed and the position adjusting bosses 381 to 384 are located at the upper ends of the boss insertion holes 385-388. It is fixed with screws. In a state where the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 are fixed with screws, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 have the corresponding plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 and the corresponding front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. By being inserted through both of the above, the surface of the main control device 310 is exposed, and the male connector (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be accepted. In this state, the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a of the front case body 312 is in contact with the plate-shaped portion 335 of the connector corresponding plate 314.

FIG. 45 (a) is a front view of the front case body 312, and FIG. 45 (b) is a front view of the back case body 313. As shown in FIG. 45A, the left side standing wall 354 is integrally formed with the front side first case fixing boss 391 at the end of the standing point of the left side standing wall 354, and the right side standing wall 355 is formed with the front side first case fixing boss 391. The front side second case fixing boss 392 and the front side third case fixing boss 393 are integrally formed at the end of the standing tip of the right side standing wall 355. The front side first case fixing boss 391 is provided substantially in the center of the left side standing wall 354 in the vertical direction, and protrudes to the left from the left side standing wall 354. The front side second case fixing boss 392 and the front side third case fixing boss 393 are provided at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and project to the right from the right standing wall 355. The case fixing bosses 391-393 are formed with through holes 391a to 393a through which screws 389 (FIG. 41) for fixing the front case body 312 to the back case body 313 are inserted.

As shown in FIG. 45B, the back side facing plate portion 315 of the back case body 313 is integrally formed with the back side first case fixing boss 394 on the short side portion on the left side of the back side facing plate portion 315. The back side second case fixing boss 395 and the back side third case fixing boss 396 are integrally formed on the short side portion on the right side of the back side facing plate portion 315. The back side first case fixing boss 394 corresponds to the front side first case fixing boss 391, the back side second case fixing boss 395 corresponds to the front side second case fixing boss 392, and the back side third case fixing boss 396 corresponds to the back side third case fixing boss 396. It corresponds to the front side third case fixed boss 393. The back side first case fixing boss 394 is provided at a position between the left side first section wall 318 and the left side second section wall 319 in the vertical direction, and protrudes to the left from the back side facing plate portion 315. Further, the back side second case fixing boss 395 and the back side third case fixing boss 396 are provided at a predetermined distance between the right side first section wall 321 and the right side second section wall 322 in the vertical direction. , Protrudes to the right from the back side facing plate portion 315. The case fixing bosses 394 to 396 are formed with screw holes 394a to 396a that allow the front case body 312 to be screw-fixed.

FIG. 46A shows the positions of the through hole 391a formed in the front side first case fixing boss 391 and the screw hole 394a formed in the back side first case fixing boss 394 before the front case body 312 is slid upward. FIG. 46B is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship, and FIG. 46B shows a through hole 391a formed in the front side first case fixing boss 391 and the back side first case fixing boss after the front case body 312 is slid upward. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship with the screw hole 394a formed in 394. Before the front case body 312 is slid upward, as shown in FIG. 46A, the through hole 391a of the front side first case fixing boss 391 and the screw hole 394a of the back side first case fixing boss 394 are , Vertically offset. Although not shown, similarly, through holes 392a and 393a (FIG. 45A) of the front side second case fixing boss 392 and the front side third case fixing boss 393, and the back side second case fixing boss 395 and the back side third The screw holes 395a and 396a (FIG. 45B) of the case fixing boss 396 are displaced in the vertical direction. Therefore, the screws cannot be fixed as they are.

After the front case body 312 is slid upward, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the deviation between the through hole 391a of the front side first case fixing boss 391 and the screw hole 394a of the back side first case fixing boss 394. Is eliminated, and the through hole 391a and the screw hole 394a are in communication with each other. Although not shown, similarly, through holes 392a and 393a (FIG. 45A) of the front side second case fixing boss 392 and the front side third case fixing boss 393, and the back side second case fixing boss 395 and the back side third The screw holes 395a and 396a (FIG. 45B) of the case fixing boss 396 are in communication with each other. As a result, the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 can be fixed with screws. The front case body 312 and the back case body 313 cannot be fixed by screws unless the front case body 312 is slid upward, so that the front case body 312 is not slid upward. It is prevented that the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 are fixed in a state where the slide is performed only halfway.

In a state where the front case body 312 is fixed to the back case body 313 with the connector-compatible plate 314 and the main control board 61 sandwiched between them, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), the fixing portion at one end side terminal 111 of the first connector CN1. 111b extends downward from a position lower than the center of the first housing 101 in the lateral direction (closer to the lower standing wall portion 101c), and is formed of the lower standing wall portion 101c and the first front side connector insertion hole 362. Extends between the lower peripheral edge portion 362b and between the lower upright wall portion 101c and the lower peripheral edge portion 336b of the first plate side insertion hole 336 so as to straddle along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. Exists. Further, the fixing portion 112b of the terminal 112 on the other end extends upward from a position closer to the center of the first housing 101 in the lateral direction (closer to the upper standing wall portion 101b), and extends upward from the position of the upper standing wall portion 101b. Along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the upper peripheral edge portion 362a of the first front side connector insertion hole 362 and between the upper standing wall portion 101b and the upper peripheral edge portion 336a of the first plate side insertion hole 336. It extends so as to straddle.

As shown in FIG. 43B, the fixing portion 113b of the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2 extends downward from the central position in the lateral direction of the second housing 102, and extends downward from the lower standing wall portion 102c and the second housing 102. 2 The element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 is between the lower peripheral edge portion 363b of the front side connector insertion hole 363 and between the lower standing wall portion 102c and the lower peripheral edge portion 337b of the second plate side insertion hole 337. It extends so as to straddle along. As shown in FIG. 44A, the fixing portion 114b of the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3 extends downward from the central position in the lateral direction of the third housing 103, and extends downward from the lower standing wall portion 103c and the third housing 103. 3 The element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 is between the lower peripheral edge portion 364b of the front side connector insertion hole 364 and between the lower upright wall portion 103c and the lower peripheral edge portion 338b of the third plate side insertion hole 338. It extends so as to straddle along.

As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the fixed portion 115b of the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4 is located below the center of the fourth housing 104 in the lateral direction (closer to the lower standing wall portion 104c). The lower peripheral edge of the lower standing wall portion 104c and the lower peripheral edge portion 365b of the fourth front side connector insertion hole 365, and the lower peripheral edge portion of the lower standing wall portion 104c and the fourth plate side insertion hole 339. It extends so as to straddle the unit 339b along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. Further, the fixed portion 116b of the terminal 116 on the other end extends upward from a position closer to the center of the fourth housing 104 in the lateral direction (closer to the upper standing wall portion 104b), and extends upward from the position of the upper standing wall portion 104b. Along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the upper peripheral edge portion 365a of the fourth front side connector insertion hole 365 and between the upper standing wall portion 104b and the upper peripheral edge portion 339a of the fourth plate side insertion hole 339. It extends so as to straddle.

As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b) and FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The size of the play existing between the upper peripheral portions 336a to 339a is based on the size of the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a of the front connector insertion holes 362 to 365. Is also small. As described above, since the connector-compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the connector-compatible plate 314 does not follow the front case body 312 even if the front case body 312 (FIG. 42) is slid upward. Therefore, the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral peripheral portions 336a to 339a does not spread due to the upward slide of the front case body 312. As a result, a conductive misuse jig such as a wire is formed between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 336a to 339a of the plate side insertion holes 336 to 339. The possibility of being inserted can be reduced.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The connector-compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61. In a state where the connector-compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the connector-compatible plate 314 moves following the main control board 61. Therefore, by moving the front case body 312 with respect to the main control board 61 and the connector compatible plate 314 while the connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 Positions of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 with respect to the first to fourth connector CN1 to CN4 while preventing the positions of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 from changing. Can be made possible to change.

The front case body 312 has a back case body 313 by screwing the front side first case fixing boss 391 to the front side third case fixing boss 393 to the back side first case fixing boss 394 to the back side third case fixing boss 396. Is fixed to. In a state where the front case body 312 is fixed to the back case body 313, the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower side of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. The play existing between the peripheral edges 362b to 365b is the upper peripheral wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 362a to the upper peripheral portions 362a to 362 to 365 of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. It is smaller than the play that exists between 365a. Therefore, by fixing the front case body 312 to the back case body 313, the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral peripheral portions 362b to 365b is reduced to the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b. It is possible to maintain a state smaller than the play existing between the upper peripheral edge portions 362a to 365a.

Before the front case body 312 is slid upward, the through holes 391a to 393a of the front side first case fixing boss 391 to the front side third case fixing boss 393 and the back side first case fixing boss 394 to the back side third case fixing The screw holes 394a to 396a of the boss 396 are displaced in the vertical direction, and the screws cannot be fixed as they are. After the front case body 312 is slid upward, the through holes 391a to 393a of the front side first case fixing boss 391 to the front side third case fixing boss 393 and the back side first case fixing boss 394 to the back side third case fixing boss The deviation of the 396 screw holes 394a to 396a is eliminated, and the through holes 391a to 393a and the screw holes 394a to 396a are in communication with each other, and the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 are screwed and fixed. It becomes possible. The front case body 312 and the back case body 313 cannot be fixed by screws unless the front case body 312 is slid upward, so that the front case body 312 is not slid upward. It is prevented that the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 are fixed in a state where the slide is performed only halfway.

When the state in which the front case body 312 is fixed to the back case body 313 is released, the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are above and below the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. It can be in a state of being in the center of the direction. In this state, the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the first to fourth front sides of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are compared with the state in which the front case body 312 is fixed to the back case body 313. The size of the play existing between the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the connector insertion holes 362 to 365 is increased. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box 311, the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are set to be in the center of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the vertical direction. As a result, the work of inserting the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 can be facilitated. After that, the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 is formed between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edge. The front case body 312 can be fixed to the back case body 313 in a state smaller than the play existing between the portions 362a to 365a. As a result, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b can be brought into close contact with each other.

By moving the front case body 312 upward with respect to the main control board 61 and the connector-compatible plate 314, the upper peripheral edges of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 with respect to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The upper side of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 with respect to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 while preventing the positions of 336a to 339a and the lower peripheral edges 336b to 339b from changing. The peripheral edges 362a to 365a and the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b can be moved upward. By moving upward, the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are brought closer to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. , The play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the side peripheral edges portions 362b to 365b can be reduced. Due to the upward movement, it exists between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. Although the play becomes large, the size of the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 336a to 339a of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 does not change. Therefore, on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, the area of the region exposed to the outside of the board box 311 becomes large around the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. While suppressing this, the area of the region exposed to the outside of the substrate box 311 can be reduced around the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c.

A connector-compatible plate 314 that surrounds the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 is provided between the main control board 61 and the front case body 312. The play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 336a to 339a of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 is the upper standing wall portion. It is smaller than the play existing between 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. Therefore, the connector-compatible plate 314 allows the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b to reach the outside of the board box 311 through play existing between the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365a. The range of the exposed main control board 61 can be narrowed. As a result, a conductive misuse jig such as a wire is inserted into the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fraudulent jig will reach the terminals 111 to 116 and the wiring pattern existing on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 when the fraudulent act is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally manipulating signals by using a conductive fraudulent jig.

The connector-corresponding plate 314 exists between the connector group-corresponding plate portion 361a and the fixing portions 111b to 116b at the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Since the connector-compatible plate 314 exists on the connector group-compatible plate portion 361a side of the fixing portions 111b to 116b, the connector-compatible plate 314 prevents the unauthorized jig from coming into contact with the fixing portions 111b to 116b. be able to. Since the connector-compatible plate 314 is present on the main control board 61 side of the connector group-compatible plate portion 361a, it is possible to prevent the connector-compatible plate 314 from being illegally removed.

The opening areas of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 formed in the connector corresponding plate 314 are the opening areas of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 formed in the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a. It is narrower than the opening area. Therefore, in the main control board 61, as compared with the configuration in which the connector-compatible plate 314 is not provided and the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted only through the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. The area of the region exposed to the outside of the substrate box 311 around the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts in which the conductive fraudulent jig is electrically contacted with the region exposed to the outside of the board box 311 in the main control board 61.

<Another form of the third embodiment>
The connector-compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61 in such a manner that the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 336a to 339a of the connector-compatible plate 314 are in contact with each other. May be. Specifically, in the main control board 61, a pair of left and right plate fixing holes that allow screws 349 for fixing the connector-compatible plate 314 to the main control board 61 can be inserted at both ends of the connector group mounting area 88 in the longitudinal direction. And a plate position adjusting hole that allows the free end of the plate position adjusting bosses 343 and 344 extending from the plate-shaped portion 335 of the connector-corresponding plate 314 to be inserted are formed. These plate fixing holes and plate position adjusting holes are through holes that penetrate the main control board 61 in the plate thickness direction. In this configuration, the connector-compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61 in such a manner that the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 336a to 339a of the connector-compatible plate 314 are in contact with each other. A plate fixing hole and a plate position adjusting hole are formed at the positions to be formed.

In the process of assembling the main control device 310, the connector-corresponding plate 314 is inserted into the plate-side insertion holes 336 to 339 corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, and then the two plate position adjusting bosses 343 and 344 are inserted. It is assumed that it is inserted through the two corresponding plate position adjustment holes. By inserting the two plate position adjusting bosses 343 and 344 into the corresponding two plate position adjusting holes, the fixing position of the connector corresponding plate 314 with respect to the main control board 61 is determined. After that, the plate fixing bosses 341 and 342 are screwed to the main control board 61 from the back side of the main control board 61 to be fixed to the main control board 61. In a state where the connector-compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding plate-side insertion holes 336 to 339, and the first to fourth connectors CN1 are inserted. The upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of ~ CN4 are in contact with the upper peripheral portions 336a to 339a of the connector-corresponding plate 314. This makes it possible to prevent a conductive misuse jig such as a wire from being inserted between the other end of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the plate-shaped portion 335. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity in which the conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the terminals 112 and 116 on the other ends of the first connector CN1 and the fourth connector CN4.

In the front case body 312, as already described in the third embodiment, the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are below the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. It is slid upward until it comes close to the side standing wall portions 101c to 104c, and is fixed to the back case body 313 in the state where the slide is completed. The lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are close to each other, and the first to first to fourth connectors are close to each other. The first to first ones are configured such that the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 336a to 339a of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 are in contact with each other. It is possible to protect all terminals 111 to 116 of the four connectors CN1 to CN4 from fraud in which a conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to them.

-A configuration in which the connector group compatible plate portion 361a abuts on the plate-shaped portion 335 of the connector compatible plate 314 in a state where the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 are fixed so as to sandwich the connector compatible plate 314 and the main control board 61. Alternatively, in this state, the connector group-corresponding plate portion 361a may be in a state of approaching the plate-shaped portion 335 of the connector-corresponding plate 314 at a predetermined interval (approximately 1 mm interval). The predetermined interval is an interval that makes it difficult to insert a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire. Even if the configurations are such that they are brought close to each other at a predetermined interval, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized jig from being inserted from the play existing between the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a and the plate-shaped portion 335. ..

The fixing portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 may be in contact with the connector-compatible plate 314. As a result, the distance between the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 and the connector-compatible plate 314 can be reduced. Therefore, a conductive misuse jig such as a wire is inserted from the upper play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Then, a fraudulent act of contacting the fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the terminal 111 on one end side of the first connector CN1, the terminal 112 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 113 of the third connector CN3, and the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4. Can be prevented.

The front case in a state where the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are in contact with each other. The body 312 may be fixed to the back case body 313. In this configuration, the front case body 312 is manually slid upward with respect to the back case body 313, the main control board 61, and the connector compatible plate 314 until the position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 come into contact with the upper ends of the boss insertion holes 385 to 388. By doing so, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 401 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 47 (a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 47 (b) is a plan view of the main control board 401 showing a part of the MPU 402 in an enlarged manner. 48 (a) is a plan view showing the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401, and FIG. 48 (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 48 (a). Similar to the first embodiment, the main control board 401 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle, and as shown in FIG. 47 (a), a pair of upper and lower sides 401a and a lower side 401b and a pair of left and right left sides 401c are formed on the peripheral edge. And the right side 401d. A large number of through-hole mounting components such as MPU 402, first to seventh connectors CN41 to CN47, and various elements are mounted on the main control board 401. These through-hole mounting components are mounted only on one plate surface of the main control board 401, and the plate surface is the element mounting surface 401e.

The MPU 402 and the first connector CN41 include pins 411 to 413,415,416 (FIG. 48A) extending linearly in the plate thickness direction of the main control board 401. Although not shown, the through-hole mounting components other than the MPU 402 and the first connector CN41 also have pins extending linearly in the plate thickness direction of the main control board 401. The insertion mounting components including the MPU 402 and the first connector CN41 are in a state in which these pins 411 to 413,415 and 416 are inserted into through holes (not shown) provided by penetrating the main control board 401 in the plate thickness direction. It is soldered and mounted by through-hole mounting technology such as flow soldering. As shown in FIG. 48A, the plate surface of the main control board 401 opposite to the element mounting surface 401e is the solder surface 401f to which the pins 411 to 413, 415 and 416 of the through-hole mounting parts are soldered. ing.

As already described with reference to FIG. 7 in the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is mounted so that the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. In the installed state in the game hall, the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the solder surface 401f faces the front of the pachinko machine 10. By opening the gaming machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11 to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 becomes visible. In this case, the main control device 60 constitutes the back portion of the gaming machine main body 12, and further, since the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, the gaming machine main body 12 is removed. By opening to the frame 11, the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 becomes visible through the transparent front case body 121.

In a configuration in which a through-hole mounting component is mounted on the element mounting surface 401e and the plate surface opposite to the element mounting surface 401e is a solder surface 401f as in the present embodiment, conductivity of a flat-blade screwdriver or the like is provided. There is a risk that the fraudulent jig will be inserted from the side surface side of the main control device 60 and brought into contact with the pins 411 to 413, 415, 416 (FIG. 48 (a)) protruding toward the solder surface 401f side. .. Further, a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is inserted from the side surface side or the front side of the main control device 60 into the pins 411 to 413 (FIG. 47 (b)) exposed on the element mounting surface 401e side. There is a risk of fraudulent contact. Here, the side surfaces of the main control device 60 are the upper partition wall 124, the lower partition wall 125, the left first partition wall 126, and the left second partition wall of the back case body 122 already described in the first embodiment. 127, the right side first section wall 128 and the right side second section wall 129 (FIG. 16 (b)). A configuration for detecting these frauds will be described.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 is provided with a GND line 405 that goes around the peripheral edge of the element mounting surface 401e, and is more main than the GND line 405. A fraud detection line 406 that goes around the peripheral edge of the element mounting surface 401e is provided at a position closer to the center of the control board 401. The GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are formed by etching a conductive metal foil (specifically, a copper foil).

The fraud detection line 406 is an electrical wiring that makes it possible to grasp that a conductive fraud jig such as a minus driver has been inserted from the side surface side of the main control device 60 or the like. A fraud detection voltage (specifically, a + 5V voltage) is supplied to the fraud detection line 406. When the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 and finds that the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are conducted by a conductive fraud jig and the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 drops. To identify that fraud has been committed.

The GND line 405 includes an upper GND line 405a that extends linearly with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm) from the left end to the right end of the upper side 401a along the upper side 401a of the main control board 401. A lower GND line 405b extending linearly with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm) from the left end to the right end of the lower side 401b along the lower side 401b of the control board 401, and the left side of the main control board 401. The left GND line 405c extending linearly with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm) from the upper end to the lower end of the left side 401c along the 401c, and the right side along the right side 401d of the main control board 401. It is provided with a right-side GND line 405d that extends linearly from the upper end to the lower end of the 401d with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm).

The fraud detection line 406 includes an upper fraud detection line 406a provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm below the upper GND line 405a and a lower side provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm above the lower GND line 405b. The fraud detection line 406b, the left fraud detection line 406c provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm to the right from the left GND line 405c, and the right side provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm to the left from the right GND line 405d. It is equipped with a fraud detection line 406d. The upper fraud detection line 406a extends linearly from the upper end of the left fraud detection line 406c to the upper end of the right fraud detection line 406d with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm), and the lower fraud detection line 406a. The detection line 406b extends linearly from the lower end of the left fraud detection line 406c to the lower end of the right fraud detection line 406d with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm). The top, bottom, left, and right fraud detection lines 403a to 403d are electrically connected.

The peripheral edge of the element mounting surface 401e is doubly surrounded by the outer GND line 405 and the inner fraud detection line 406. These GND lines 405 and fraud detection line 406 are exposed on the surface of the main control board 401, and when a conductive fraudulent jig comes into contact with the GND line 405 and fraud detection line 406, the GND line 405 and fraud detection are detected. Line 406 is conducted. Since the fraud detection line 406 is provided close to the GND line 405, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought closer to the element mounting surface 401e, the fraud detection jig will be used for the GND line 405 and the fraud detection. There is a high possibility that the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 will drop because it is in contact with both lines 406.

A large number of GND contact portions 407 are formed on the top, bottom, left, and right GND lines 405a to 405d so as to form one row in the extending direction of the GND lines 405a to 405d. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the GND contact portion 407 penetrates the main control board 401 in the plate thickness direction, and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). The through holes 407a and the lands 407b and 407c provided in a circle on the peripheral edge of the through holes 407a on the element mounting surface 401e and the solder surface 401f are provided. The lands 407b and 407c are made of metal, specifically copper. The diameter of the through hole 407a is about 0.6 mm, and the diameter of the lands 407b and 407c is about 1.2 mm.

The GND contact portion 407 includes a solder bulging portion 407d that bulges approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f. The solder bulging portion 407d is formed by allowing solder to flow into the inside of the through hole 407a and the land 407c on the solder surface 401f side from the solder surface 401f side. The solder bulging portions 407d of all GND contact portions 407 are electrically connected to the GND line 405. Since the solder bulging portion 407d bulges from the solder surface 401f, the possibility that the conductive fraudulent jig brought close to the solder surface 401f comes into contact with the solder bulging portion 407d is increased. In the top, bottom, left, and right GND lines 405a to 405d, the GND contact portions 407 are provided at equal intervals so that the distance between the centers of the adjacent GND contact portions 407 is approximately 3 mm. As a result, the possibility that the conductive misuse jig brought close to the solder surface 401f comes into contact with the solder bulging portion 407d of any of the GND contact portions 407 is increased.

A large number of fraud detection contact portions 408 are formed on the top, bottom, left, and right fraud detection lines 406a to 406d so as to form one row in the extending direction of the fraud detection lines 406a to 406d. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the fraud detection contact portion 408 penetrates the main control board 401 in the plate thickness direction, and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). The through holes 408a and the lands 408b and 408c provided in a circular shape on the peripheral edge of the through holes 408a on the element mounting surface 401e and the solder surface 401f are provided. The lands 408b and 408c are made of metal, specifically copper. The diameter of the through hole 408a is approximately 0.6 mm, and the diameter of the lands 408b and 408c is approximately 1.2 mm.

The fraud detection contact portion 408 includes a solder bulging portion 408d that bulges approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f. The solder bulging portion 408d is formed by allowing solder to flow into the inside of the through hole 408a and the land 408c on the solder surface 401f side from the solder surface 401f side. The solder bulging portions 408d of all fraud detection contact portions 408 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 406. Since the solder bulging portion 408d bulges from the solder surface 401f, the possibility that the conductive fraudulent jig brought close to the solder surface 401f comes into contact with the solder bulging portion 408d is increased. In the up, down, left, and right fraud detection lines 406a to 406d, the fraud detection contact portions 408 are provided at equal intervals so that the distance between the centers of the adjacent fraud detection contact portions 408 is approximately 3 mm. As a result, the possibility that the conductive fraudulent jig brought close to the solder surface 401f comes into contact with the solder bulging portion 408d of any fraud detection contact portion 408 is increased.

As described above, the fraud detection line 406 is provided close to the GND line 405 on the element mounting surface 401e. Therefore, the fraud detection contact portion 408 and the GND contact portion 407 are close to each other on the solder surface 401f. As a result, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the solder surface 401f, one or more GND contact portions 407 and one or more fraud detection contact portions 408 are in contact with each other, and the fraud detection line 406 There is an increased possibility that the voltage of the solder will drop.

As shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), the MPU 402 is mounted near the center of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. The MPU 402 includes a large number of pins 411 to 413 including the GND connection pin 411 and the fraud detection connection pin 412, and these pins 411 to 413 are soldered on the solder surface 401f. As shown in FIG. 48A, a gap larger than the above-mentioned 3 mm gap between adjacent fraud detection contact portions 408 is provided near the center of the right side 401d of the solder surface 401f, and 1 is provided through the gap. A copper wiring 414 is formed that electrically connects the GND contact portion 407 and the GND connection pin 411 of the MPU 402. The wiring 414 is covered with an insulator resist (not shown) so as not to be exposed on the surface.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the first connector CN41 is mounted on the upper side 401a side of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. The first connector CN41 includes a large number of pins 415 and 416 (FIG. 48 (a)), and one of the large number of pins 415 and 416 supplies a voltage to the fraud detection line 406 (FIG. 48 (a)). It is a voltage supply pin 415 (FIG. 48 (a)). The large number of pins 415 and 416 including the voltage supply pin 415 are soldered on the solder surface 401f. As shown in FIG. 48A, one fraud detection contact portion 408 provided near the right side 401d of the main control board 401 and the fraud detection connection pin 412 of the MPU 402 are electrically connected to the solder surface 401f. The copper wiring 417 is formed, and the copper wiring 417 is electrically connected to the one fraud detection contact portion 408 provided near the upper side 401a of the main control board 401 and the voltage supply pin 415 of the first connector CN41. Wiring 418 is formed. These wirings 417 and 418 are covered with an insulator resist (not shown) so as not to be exposed on the surface.

In a state where the operating power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, the fraud detection line 406 is connected to the fraud detection line 406 via the voltage supply pin 415 and the wiring 418 of the first connector CN41 to detect fraud (specifically, + 5V voltage) is supplied, and the fraud detection voltage is supplied to the input side of the MPU 402 via the fraud detection line 406, the fraud detection connection pin 412, and the wiring 417. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage supplied to the input side of the MPU 402 via the fraud detection connection pin 412, and when the voltage is the fraud detection voltage, it can be grasped that it is in a normal state. it can.

As described above, the GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection contact portion 408 are close to each other on the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401. Therefore, a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is inserted from the side surface side of the main control device 60 to the solder surface 401f side and is in contact with the GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection contact portion 408. In that case, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are conducted by the fraud jig. Further, as described above, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are provided close to each other on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. Therefore, a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is inserted from the side surface side or the front side of the main control device 60 to the element mounting surface 401e side and is in contact with the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406. In that case, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are conducted by the fraud jig. When the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 and identifies that the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are conducted and the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 drops, an abnormality occurs in the fraud detection line 406. Know what happened.

Next, the fraud detection process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The fraud detection process is executed in step S205 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the fraud detection process, first, the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 connected to the input side of the MPU 402 is monitored, and it is determined whether or not a drop in the voltage is detected (step S901). If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not the monitoring target is fraudulent (step S902). In step S902, the monitoring target is based on the detection signals received from the radio wave detection sensor 202 and the magnetic detection sensor 203, as in the fraud detection process (step S205 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) in the first embodiment. Identify that fraud has occurred. If the fraud to be monitored has not occurred (step S902: NO), the fraud detection process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S902, the abnormality notification process is executed (step S903). In the abnormality notification process, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. The abnormality notification command is a command for causing the voice emission control device 70 to execute a process for performing abnormality notification for notifying that an abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, or a magnetic abnormality has occurred in the fraud detection line 406. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the abnormality notification command, the voice emission control device 70 controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54, the light emission control of the display light emission unit 53, and the display control device 90 for notifying that the fraud is detected. .. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406, a radio wave abnormality, or a magnetic abnormality has been detected. Further, in the abnormality notification process in step S903, an abnormality signal is output to the management computer (not shown) of the game hall, which is an external device. As a result, it is possible for the management computer to grasp that an abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, or a magnetic abnormality of the fraud detection line 406 has been detected.

After that, "1" is set in the game stop flag in the main RAM 66 (step S904), and the fraud detection process ends. As already described in the first embodiment, the process for advancing the game in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) by setting the game stop flag to "1" (processes in steps S208 to S219). Will not be executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A GND line 405 and a fraud detection line 406 are provided on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. The fraud detection line 406 is an electrical wiring that makes it possible to grasp that a conductive fraud jig such as a minus driver has been inserted from the side surface side of the main control device 60 or the like. A fraud detection voltage is supplied to the fraud detection line 406. The main control board 401 is provided with a large number of GND contact portions 407 along the GND line 405, and is provided with a large number of fraud detection contact portions 408 along the fraud detection line 406. All GND contact parts 407 are electrically connected to the GND line 405, and all fraud detection contact parts 408 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 406. The GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection contact portion 408 include solder bulging portions 407d and 408d that bulge from the solder surface 401f. A conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401, and the fraudulent jig is a solder bulging portion 407d and one or more fraud detection contact portions 408 in one or more GND contact portions 407. When the solder bulging portion 408d is in contact with both of the solder bulging portions 408d, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected. When the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 and finds that the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are conducted by a conductive fraud jig and the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 drops. To identify that fraud has been committed. As a result, it is possible to detect an illegal act of inserting a conductive illegal use jig on the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401. When pins 411 to 413,415,416 of various electronic components are fixed by solder on the solder surface 401f, when a fraudulent act is performed in which a conductive fraudulent jig is brought into contact with the fixed portion by solder and its periphery. There is a risk that the signal transmitted from various electronic components or the signal received by various electronic components may be tampered with. On the other hand, by making it possible to grasp the fraudulent act of bringing the conductive fraudulent jig close to the solder surface 401f, the possibility that the fraudulent act is performed without the manager of the game hall noticing is reduced. Has been done.

On the element mounting surface 401e, the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are exposed on the surface. For this reason, when a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraudulent jig closer to the element mounting surface 401e is performed and the fraudulent jig is in contact with both the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406, , The GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are conducted, and the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 drops. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the fraudulent act has been committed.

On the element mounting surface 401e, the fraud detection line 406 is arranged side by side with the GND line 405. As a result, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought closer to the element mounting surface 401e side, the fraudulent jig is in contact with both the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406, and the fraud detection line 406 is in contact with the fraud detection line 406. The possibility of voltage drop is increased.

When the main CPU 64 detects a voltage drop in the fraud detection line 406, it executes an abnormality notification process. As a result, the abnormality of the fraud detection line 406 can be notified to the manager of the game hall.

Each of the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 is provided along the peripheral edge portion of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. Therefore, when a fraudulent act is performed in which the conductive fraudulent jig approaches the element mounting surface 401e side of the main control board 401 from the side surface side of the main control device 60, the fraudulent jig detects the GND line 405 and the fraudulent act. It is possible to increase the possibility that the line 406 will be in a conductive state. As a result, the fraudulent activity can be grasped at an early stage.

Each of the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 is provided over the entire circumference of the peripheral edge portion of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which at least one of the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 is provided only on a part of the peripheral edge of the element mounting surface 401e, the main control board 401 is viewed from the side surface side of the main control device 60. When a fraudulent act is performed in which a conductive fraudulent jig approaches the element mounting surface 401e, it is possible to increase the possibility that the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are connected by the fraudulent jig. .. As a result, the fraudulent activity can be grasped at an early stage.

The main control board 401 is provided with a large number of GND contact portions 407 along the GND line 405, and is provided with a large number of fraud detection contact portions 408 along the fraud detection line 406. All GND contact parts 407 are electrically connected to the GND line 405, and all fraud detection contact parts 408 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 406. The GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection contact portion 408 include solder bulging portions 407d and 408d that bulge from the solder surface 401f. Since the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 bulges from the solder surface 401f, the conductive illegal jig brought closer to the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401 causes the solder bulging portion 407 of the GND contact portion 407 to bulge. The possibility of electrical contact with the portion 407d is increased. Since the solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 bulges from the solder surface 401f, the conductive fraudulent jig brought closer to the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401 is soldered to the fraud detection contact portion 408. The possibility of electrical contact with the bulging portion 408d is increased. Therefore, when a conductive illegal jig is brought close to the solder surface 401f where various electronic components mounted on the main control board 401 and the main control board 401 are fixed by soldering, the jig is brought close to the solder surface 401f. It is possible to increase the possibility that the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 are in a conductive state by the fraudulent jig. When pins 411 to 413,415,416 of various electronic components are fixed by solder on the solder surface 401f, when a fraudulent act is performed in which a conductive fraudulent jig is brought into contact with the fixed portion by solder and its periphery. There is a risk that the signal transmitted from various electronic components or the signal received by various electronic components may be tampered with. On the other hand, by making it possible to grasp the fraudulent act of bringing the conductive fraudulent jig close to the solder surface 401f, the possibility that the fraudulent act is performed without the manager of the game hall noticing is reduced. Has been done.

On the solder surface 401f, the solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 is arranged side by side with the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407. As a result, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought closer to the solder surface 401f side, the fraudulent jig is attached to the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408. There is a high possibility that the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 will drop because it is in contact with both.

The peripheral edge of the solder surface 401f is intermittently arranged at a position closer to the center of the main control board 401 than the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407. It is doubly surrounded by the solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 arranged so as to be. Therefore, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought closer to the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401 from the side surface side of the main control device 60, the fraudulent jig becomes the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulging portion 407d. There is an increased possibility that the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 will drop because the fraud detection contact portion 408 is in contact with both the solder bulging portions 408d.

The GND line 405 is a continuous upper GND line 405a, lower GND line 405b, and left GND line 405c on the upper peripheral edge portion, the lower peripheral edge portion, the left peripheral peripheral portion, and the right peripheral edge portion on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. And the right side GND line 405d. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the GND lines 405a to 405c are intermittently formed, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought closer to the main control board 401, any of the fraudulent jigs is used. It is possible to increase the possibility of contacting the GND lines 405a to 405d.

The four GND lines 405a to 405d are connected to the ground of the main control board 401. As a result, when the conductive fraudulent jig comes into contact with any of the GND lines 405a to 405d and the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 become conductive, the fraud detection is performed. It is possible to create a state in which the voltage at line 406 is dropping. Therefore, it is possible to easily identify that the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are in a conductive state.

The fraud detection line 406 is located on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 at a position closer to the center than the four GND lines 405a to 405d, and is a continuous upper fraud detection line 406a, lower fraud detection line 406b, and left fraud detection line. It is equipped with a 406c and a right fraud detection line 406d. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the fraud detection lines 406a to 406c are intermittently formed, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought closer to the main control board 401, the fraudulent jig will eventually be used. The possibility of contacting the fraud detection lines 406a to 406d can be increased.

A fraud detection voltage is supplied to all of the four fraud detection lines 406a to 406d. As a result, if the conductive fraudulent jig is in contact with both the GND lines 405a to 405d and the fraud detection lines 406a to 406d, the fraudulent jig is fraudulent. Regardless of where the detection lines 406a to 406d are touched, it is possible to create a state in which the voltage in the fraud detection line 406 is reduced as the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected. .. Therefore, it is possible to easily identify that the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are in a conductive state.

The GND contact portion 407 is such that the distance between the centers of the adjacent GND contact portions 407 is approximately 3 mm along the upper GND line 405a, the lower GND line 405b, the left GND line 405c, and the right GND line 405d. It is provided at intervals. As a result, the possibility that the conductive misuse jig brought close to the solder surface 401f comes into contact with the solder bulging portion 407d of any of the GND contact portions 407 is increased.

In the fraud detection contact portion 408, the distance between the centers of the adjacent fraud detection contact portions 408 is approximately approximately along the upper fraud detection line 406a, the lower fraud detection line 406b, the left fraud detection line 406c, and the right fraud detection line 406d. It is provided at equal intervals so as to be 3 mm. As a result, the possibility that the conductive fraudulent jig brought close to the solder surface 401f comes into contact with the solder bulging portion 408d of any fraud detection contact portion 408 is increased.

<Another form of the fourth embodiment>
-In the abnormality notification process performed in step S903 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 49), the mode of abnormality notification performed when an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 is detected, and the case where a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality is detected. The configuration may be different from the mode of the abnormality notification performed in. Specifically, when an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 is detected, the main CPU 64 transmits a first abnormality notification command to the voice emission control device 70 in the abnormality notification process. The first abnormality notification command is a command for causing the voice emission control device 70 to execute a process for performing the first abnormality notification for notifying that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the first abnormality notification command, the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 and the light emission control and display of the display light emission unit 53 for notifying that the abnormality of the fraud detection line 406 has been detected. The control device 90 is controlled. In the first abnormality notification, a voice "first abnormality has occurred" is output from the speaker unit 54, the display light emitting unit 53 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality of the fraud detection line 406, and the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 The characters "first abnormality occurred" are displayed in. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected. When an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 is detected, the main CPU 64 outputs a first abnormality signal to the management computer (not shown) of the game hall, which is an external device, in the abnormality notification process. As a result, it is possible for the management computer to grasp that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected.

When a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality is detected, the main CPU 64 transmits a second abnormality notification command to the voice emission control device 70 in the abnormality notification process. The second abnormality notification command is a command for causing the voice emission control device 70 to execute a process for performing a second abnormality notification for notifying that a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality has been detected. When the voice light emission control device 70 receives the second abnormality notification command, the sound output control of the speaker unit 54, the light emission control and the display control of the display light emission unit 53 for notifying that a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality has been detected. Control the device 90. In the second abnormality notification, a voice "second abnormality has occurred" is output from the speaker unit 54, the display light emitting unit 53 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality, and is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The characters "second anomaly have occurred" are displayed. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 that a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality has been detected. When a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality is detected, the main CPU 64 outputs a second abnormality signal to the management computer (not shown) of the game hall, which is an external device, in the abnormality notification process. As a result, it is possible for the management computer to grasp that a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality has been detected.

In this way, in a configuration in which a second abnormality notification is performed when a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality is detected, when an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 is detected, a first abnormality notification different from the second abnormality notification is performed. With the configuration in which the above is performed, it is possible to quickly grasp that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected.

In the main control board 401, the wiring 414 that electrically connects one GND contact portion 407 and the GND connection pin 411 of the MPU 402, one fraud detection contact portion 408, and the fraud detection connection pin 412 of the MPU 402 are electrically connected. The plate surface on which the wiring 417 to be connected and the wiring 418 for electrically connecting one fraud detection contact portion 408 and the voltage supply pin 415 of the first connector CN41 is formed is not limited to the solder surface 401f. .. A part or all of these wirings 414, 417, 418 may be formed on the element mounting surface 401e.

In the main control board 401, a plate surface on which the GND line 405 is provided (element mounting surface 401e in the fourth embodiment) and a plate surface on which the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 is provided (fourth). In the embodiment of the above, the solder surface 401f) may be reversed. By configuring the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 to bulge toward the element mounting surface 401e, the conductive fraudulent jig brought closer to the element mounting surface 401e side of the main control board 401 comes into contact with the GND. The possibility of contact with the portion 407 can be increased.

In the main control board 401, a plate surface provided with a fraud detection line 406 (element mounting surface 401e in the fourth embodiment) and a plate surface provided with a solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 (in the fourth embodiment). In the fourth embodiment, the solder surface 401f) may be reversed. By configuring the solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 to bulge toward the element mounting surface 401e, the conductive fraudulent jig brought closer to the element mounting surface 401e side of the main control board 401 is fraudulent. The possibility of contact with the detection contact portion 408 can be increased.

A solder swelling region may be formed by adhering solder to the entire area of the GND line 405 formed on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. The solder swelling region bulges approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 401e. Thereby, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e side, the possibility that the fraudulent jig comes into electrical contact with the GND line 405 through the solder swelling region can be increased.

A solder swelling region may be formed by adhering solder to the entire area of the fraud detection line 406 formed on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. The solder swelling region bulges approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 401e. As a result, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e, the possibility that the fraudulent jig comes into electrical contact with the fraud detection line 406 through the solder swelling region can be increased.

Instead of the configuration in which both the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 are provided on the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401, these 2 are provided on the solder surface 401f. A configuration may be configured in which only one of the types of solder bulging portions 407d and 408d is provided. In a configuration in which only the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 is provided on the solder surface 401f, the fraud detection contact portion 408 is provided with the solder contact portion on the solder surface 401f. The solder contact portion is formed by allowing solder to flow into the through hole 408a of the fraud detection contact portion 408 from the solder surface 401f side, but does not bulge from the solder surface 401f and is formed on the solder surface 401f and the surface. It is one. The solder contact portion is exposed, and the conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the solder surface 401f side and comes into contact with both the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder contact portion of the fraud detection contact portion 408. In this state, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are conducted by the fraudulent jig. Further, in a configuration in which only the solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 is provided on the solder surface 401f, the GND contact portion 407 includes a solder contact portion on the solder surface 401f. The solder contact portion is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 407a of the GND contact portion 407 from the solder surface 401f side, but does not bulge from the solder surface 401f and is flush with the solder surface 401f. It has become. The solder contact portion is exposed, and the conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the solder surface 401f side and comes into contact with both the solder contact portion of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulge portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408. In this state, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are conducted by the fraudulent jig. As described above, even if only one of the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 is provided on the solder surface 401f, the solder contact portion is provided on the other. With the provided configuration, it is possible to grasp that a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraudulent jig closer to the solder surface 401f side has been performed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a configuration for monitoring fraudulent activity in a power-off state in which the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for monitoring fraudulent activity in a power-off state in the present embodiment.

Similar to the fourth embodiment, the element mounting surface 401e (FIG. 47 (a)) of the main control board 401 is provided with a GND line 405 and a fraud detection line 406. Further, on the solder surface 401f (FIG. 48 (a)) of the main control board 401, a large number of GND contact portions 407 electrically connected to the GND line 405 and a large number of electrical connections to the fraud detection line 406 are provided. The fraud detection contact unit 408 is provided. The main control board 401 in the present embodiment includes a MOSFET 421 that can switch between a state in which voltage is supplied to the fraud detection line 406 and a state in which voltage is not supplied, and a conductive fraudulent jig such as a flat-blade screwdriver in a power-off state. A fraud detection capacitor 422 is provided so that a fraudulent act can be grasped so as to bring the solder surface closer to the solder surface 401f. The MOSFET 421 and the fraud detection capacitor 422 are mounted on the element mounting surface 401e.

The MOSFET 421 includes a gate terminal 421a, a source terminal 421b, and a drain terminal 421c. In the MOSFET 421, a current flows between the source terminal 421b and the drain terminal 421c when the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a is in the HI state, and the source terminal is in the LOW state when the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a is in the LOW state. No current flows between the 421b and the drain terminal 421c.

The gate terminal 421a is electrically connected to the main CPU 64 by a copper wiring 423. The main CPU 64 controls the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a. The source terminal 421b is connected to the voltage supply pin 415 of the first connector CN41 that supplies voltage to the fraud detection line 406, and the drain terminal 421c is connected to the fraud detection line 406.

The fraud detection capacitor 422 includes a first terminal 422a and a second terminal 422b. The first terminal 422a is electrically connected to the wiring 425 connecting the fraud detection line 406 and the main CPU 64 by the copper wiring 424. The second terminal 422b is electrically connected to the GND line 405.

The main CPU 64 sets the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a to the HI state after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. As a result, the voltage is supplied to the fraud detection line 406, and the electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a of the fraud detection capacitor 422. The main CPU 64 can grasp whether or not the electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a based on the voltage of the wiring 425.

When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the power is cut off while the electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a, the electric charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a is retained as it is. In the power cut-off state, one or more GND contact portions 407 and one are brought close to the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401 from the side surface side of the main control device 60 by a conductive misuse jig such as a minus driver. When the fraud detection contact portion 408 is in contact with the above, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are conducted. Further, in the power cut-off state, a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is brought closer to the element mounting surface 401e side of the main control board 401 from the side surface side or the front side of the main control device 60, and the GND line 405 and the fraudulent Even when the detection line 406 is in contact with the detection line 406, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected. When the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are conducted, the electric charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a escapes to the GND line 405. As a result, the electric charge is not accumulated in the first terminal 422a. When the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the main CPU 64 determines whether or not the electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a, and when the electric charge is not accumulated in the first terminal 422a. Understand that fraudulent acts have been performed by bringing the fraudulent jig closer to the machine while the power is cut off.

Next, the power-on setting process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The power-on setting process is executed in step S109 of the main process (FIG. 26).

In the power-on setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a of the fraud detection capacitor 422 (step S1001). When the electric charge is not accumulated in the first terminal 422a (step S1001: NO), it means that the electric charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a is lost in the power cutoff state. The process is executed (step S1002). In the abnormality notification process, the corresponding abnormality notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 70. When the voice emission control device 70 receives the abnormality notification command, the sound output control of the speaker unit 54, the light emission control of the display light emission unit 53, and the display control device 90 for notifying that an illegality in the power cut state is detected. To control. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 that fraud in the power-off state has been detected. Further, in the abnormality notification process in step S1002, an abnormality signal is output to the management computer (not shown) of the game hall, which is an external device. As a result, it is possible for the management computer to grasp that fraud has been detected in the power-off state.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S1001 or the process of step S1002 is performed, the input voltage rise process for raising the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a from the LOW state to the HI state is performed (step S1003). As a result, the voltage is supplied to the fraud detection line 406, and the electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a.

After that, an initial value setting process for setting a predetermined area of the main RAM 66 to the initial value, such as initialization of the power failure flag, is executed (step S1004), and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is executed in order to recognize the current gaming state. Is executed for the game state command transmission process (step S1005), and the power-on setting process is completed.

As described above, after the supply of the operating power is started, the main CPU 64 determines whether or not the electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a before raising the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a to the HI state. This makes it possible to grasp the state of the first terminal 422a in the power cutoff state.

If it is determined in step S1001 that no electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a, the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a is raised to the HI state after the abnormality notification process in step S1002 is executed. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped after the abnormality notification process is executed and then the supply of the operating power is restarted, even though no fraudulent activity has been performed. It is prevented that the negative determination is made again in step S1001 and the abnormality notification process in step S1002 is executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the main control board 401, electric charges are accumulated in the first terminal 422a in a state where the operating power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the conductivity is inserted into the main control device 60 after the power is cut off. A fraud detection capacitor 422 is mounted, in which the electric charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a is lost when the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are conducted by the fraud jig. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud in the power cutoff state by determining whether or not the electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. ..

When the main CPU 64 determines in step S1001 in the power-on setting process (FIG. 51) that the electric charge is not accumulated in the first terminal 422a of the fraud detection capacitor 422, the main CPU 64 executes the abnormality notification process. The manager of the game hall can grasp that the electric charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a has been lost due to the fraudulent act performed in the power-off state based on the execution of the abnormality notification process. ..

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control board is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 52 (a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 52 (b) is a plan view of the main control board 431 showing a part of the MPU 432 in an enlarged manner. 53 (a) is a plan view showing the back surface 431f of the main control board 431, and FIG. 53 (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 53 (a). Similar to the first embodiment, the main control board 431 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and as shown in FIG. 52 (a), a pair of upper and lower sides 431a and a lower side 431b and a pair of left and right left sides 431c are formed on the peripheral edges. And 431d on the right side. A large number of surface mount components such as MPU432, first to seventh connectors CN51 to CN57, and various elements are mounted on the main control board 431. These surface mount components are mounted only on the plate surface on one side of the main control board 431, and the plate surface is the element mounting surface 431e.

The MPU 432 and the first connector CN51 include terminals 441 to 443, 445 and 446 (FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b)) extending along the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. Although not shown, surface mount components other than the MPU 432 and the first connector CN51 also have terminals extending along the element mounting surface 431e. Surface mount components including the MPU 432 and the first connector CN51 have terminals 441 to 443, 445 and 446 soldered to the element mounting surface 431e by surface mounting technology such as reflow soldering to the element mounting surface 431e side. It is implemented. In the present embodiment, the terminals 441 to 443, 445, 446 of the surface mount component exist only on the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431, and do not exist on the back surface 431f side of the board. A wiring pattern (not shown) for electrically connecting terminals (not shown) of surface mount components is formed on the element mounting surface 431e.

As already described with reference to FIG. 7 in the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is mounted so that the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. In the installed state in the game hall, the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back surface of the board 431f faces the front of the pachinko machine 10. By opening the gaming machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11 to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 becomes visible. In this case, the main control device 60 constitutes the back portion of the gaming machine main body 12, and further, since the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, the gaming machine main body 12 is removed. By opening the frame 11 to the frame 11, the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 becomes visible through the transparent front case body 121.

In the configuration in which the terminals 441 to 443, 445 and 446 of the surface mount component exist only on the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431 as in the present embodiment, the illegal use of conductivity such as a minus driver is cured. There is a possibility that the jig may be inserted from the side surface side or the front surface side of the main control device 60 and brought into contact with the terminals 441 to 443, 445 and 446 existing on the element mounting surface 431e side. The configuration for detecting the fraud will be described.

As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the substrate back surface 431f of the main control board 431 is provided with a GND line 435 that goes around the peripheral edge of the substrate back surface 431f once, and the main control board is more than the GND line 435. A fraud detection line 436 that goes around the peripheral edge of the back surface 431f of the substrate is provided at a position closer to the center of the 431. The GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are formed by etching a conductive metal foil (specifically, a copper foil).

The fraud detection line 436 is an electric wiring that makes it possible to grasp that a conductive fraud jig such as a minus driver has been inserted from the side surface side of the main control device 60 or the like. A fraud detection voltage (specifically, a + 5V voltage) is supplied to the fraud detection line 436. Similar to the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 436, and the fraud detection line 436 and the GND line 435 are conducted by a conductive fraud jig to conduct the fraud detection line 436. When it is known that the voltage of the device has dropped, it is possible to identify that the fraud has occurred.

The GND line 435 includes an upper GND line 435a that extends linearly along the upper side 431a of the main control board 431 from the left end to the right end of the upper side 431a with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm). A lower GND line 435b extending linearly with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm) from the left end to the right end of the lower side 431b along the lower side 431b of the control board 431, and the left side of the main control board 431. The left GND line 435c extending linearly with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm) from the upper end to the lower end of the left side 431c along 431c, and the right side along the right side 431d of the main control board 431. It is provided with a right side GND line 435d extending linearly with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm) from the upper end to the lower end of the 431d.

The fraud detection line 436 is provided with an upper fraud detection line 436a provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm downward from the upper GND line 435a and a lower side provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm upward from the lower GND line 435b. The fraud detection line 436b, the left fraud detection line 436c provided with an interval of approximately 1 mm to the right from the left GND line 435c, and the right side provided with an interval of approximately 1 mm to the left from the right GND line 435d. It is equipped with a fraud detection line 436d. The upper fraud detection line 436a extends linearly from the upper end of the left fraud detection line 436c to the upper end of the right fraud detection line 436d with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm), and the lower fraud detection line 436a has a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm). The detection line 436b extends linearly from the lower end of the left fraud detection line 436c to the lower end of the right fraud detection line 436d with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm). The top, bottom, left, and right fraud detection lines 403a to 403d are electrically connected.

The peripheral edge of the back surface 431f of the substrate is doubly surrounded by the outer GND line 435 and the inner fraud detection line 436. The GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are covered with an insulator resist (not shown) so as not to be exposed on the surface.

A large number of GND contact portions 437 are formed on the top, bottom, left, and right GND lines 435a to 435d so as to form one row in the extending direction of the GND lines 435a to 435d. As shown in FIG. 53 (b), the GND contact portion 437 penetrates the main control substrate 431 in the plate thickness direction, and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). The through hole 437a is provided with lands 437b and 437c provided in a circle on the peripheral edge of the through hole 437a on the element mounting surface 431e and the substrate back surface 431f. The lands 437b and 437c are made of metal, specifically copper. The diameter of the through hole 437a is approximately 0.6 mm, and the diameter of the lands 437b and 437c is approximately 1.2 mm.

The GND contact portion 437 includes a solder bulging portion 437d that bulges approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 431e. The solder bulging portion 437d is formed by allowing solder to flow into the inside of the through hole 437a and the land 437b on the element mounting surface 431e side from the element mounting surface 431e side. The solder bulging portions 437d of all GND contact portions 437 are electrically connected to the GND line 435. Since the solder bulging portion 437d bulges from the element mounting surface 431e, the possibility that the conductive fraudulent jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e comes into contact with the solder bulging portion 437d is increased. In the top, bottom, left, and right GND lines 435a to 435d, the GND contact portions 437 are provided at equal intervals so that the distance between the centers of the adjacent GND contact portions 437 is approximately 3 mm. As a result, the possibility that the conductive fraudulent jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e comes into contact with the solder bulging portion 437d of any GND contact portion 437 is increased.

A large number of fraud detection contact portions 438 are formed on the top, bottom, left, and right fraud detection lines 436a to 436d so as to form one row in the extending direction of the fraud detection lines 436a to 436d. As shown in FIG. 53 (b), the fraud detection contact portion 438 penetrates the main control board 431 in the plate thickness direction, and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). The through hole 438a is provided with lands 438b and 438c provided in a circle on the peripheral edge of the through hole 438a on the element mounting surface 431e and the substrate back surface 431f. The lands 438b and 438c are made of metal, specifically copper. The diameter of the through hole 438a is approximately 0.6 mm, and the diameter of the lands 438b and 438c is approximately 1.2 mm.

The fraud detection contact portion 438 includes a solder bulging portion 438d that bulges approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 431e. The solder bulging portion 438d is formed by allowing solder to flow into the inside of the through hole 438a and the land 438b on the element mounting surface 431e side from the element mounting surface 431e side. The solder bulging portions 438d of all fraud detection contact portions 438 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 436. Since the solder bulging portion 438d bulges from the element mounting surface 431e, the possibility that the conductive fraudulent jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e comes into contact with the solder bulging portion 438d is increased. In the up, down, left, and right fraud detection lines 436a to 436d, the fraud detection contact portions 438 are provided at equal intervals so that the distance between the centers of the adjacent fraud detection contact portions 438 is approximately 3 mm. As a result, the possibility that the conductive fraudulent jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e comes into contact with the solder bulging portion 438d of any fraud detection contact portion 438 is increased.

The fraud detection line 436 is provided close to the GND line 435 on the back surface 431f of the substrate, and the fraud detection contact portion 438 and the GND contact portion 437 are close to each other on the element mounting surface 431e. As a result, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e, one or more GND contact portions 437 and one or more fraud detection contact portions 438 are in contact with each other, resulting in a fraud detection line. The possibility that the voltage of 436 will drop is increased.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), the MPU 432 is mounted near the center of the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. The MPU 432 includes a large number of terminals 441 to 443 including a GND connection terminal 441 and a fraud detection connection terminal 442, and these terminals 441 to 443 are soldered on the element mounting surface 431e. As shown in FIG. 53A, a gap larger than the above-mentioned 3 mm gap between adjacent fraud detection contact portions 438 is provided near the center of the right side 431d of the back surface 431f of the substrate, and 1 is provided through the gap. A copper wiring 444 is formed that electrically connects the GND contact portion 437 and the GND connection terminal 441 of the MPU 432. The wiring 444 is covered with an insulator resist (not shown) so as not to be exposed on the surface.

As shown in FIG. 52A, the first connector CN51 is mounted on the upper side 431a side of the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. The first connector CN51 includes a large number of terminals 445 and 446, and one of the large number of terminals 445 and 446 is a voltage supply terminal 445 (FIG. 53 (a)) that supplies voltage to the fraud detection line 436 (FIG. 53 (a)). 53 (a)). The numerous terminals 445 and 446, including the voltage supply terminal 445, are soldered on the element mounting surface 431e. As shown in FIG. 53A, one fraud detection contact portion 438 provided near the right side 431d of the main control board 431 and the fraud detection connection terminal 442 of the MPU 432 are electrically connected to the back surface 431f of the board. The copper wiring 447 is formed, and the copper wiring 447 provided in the vicinity of the upper side 431a of the main control board 431 is electrically connected to the voltage supply terminal 445 of the first connector CN51. Wiring 448 is formed. These wirings 447 and 448 are covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so as not to be exposed on the surface.

In a state where the operating power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, the fraud detection line 436 is connected to the fraud detection line 436 via the voltage supply terminal 445 of the first connector CN51 and the wiring 448 (specifically, the fraud detection voltage (specifically). + 5V voltage) is supplied, and the fraud detection voltage is supplied to the input side of the MPU 432 via the fraud detection line 436 and the fraud detection connection terminal 442. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage supplied to the input side of the MPU 432 via the fraud detection connection terminal 442, and when the voltage is the fraud detection voltage, it can grasp that it is in a normal state. it can.

As described above, the GND contact portion 437 and the fraud detection contact portion 438 are close to each other on the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. Therefore, a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is inserted from the side surface side or the front side of the main control device 60 to the element mounting surface 431e side and is in contact with the GND contact portion 437 and the fraud detection contact portion 438. When the state is reached, the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are conducted by the fraud jig. When the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 and identifies that the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are conducted and the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 drops, an abnormality occurs in the fraud detection line 436. Know what happened.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A GND line 435 and a fraud detection line 436 are provided on the back surface 431f of the main control board 431. The fraud detection line 436 is an electric wiring that makes it possible to grasp that a conductive fraud jig such as a minus driver has been inserted from the side surface side of the main control device 60 or the like. A fraud detection voltage is supplied to the fraud detection line 436. The main control board 431 is provided with a large number of GND contact portions 437 along the GND line 435, and is provided with a large number of fraud detection contact portions 438 along the fraud detection line 436. All GND contact parts 437 are electrically connected to the GND line 435, and all fraud detection contact parts 438 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 436. The GND contact portion 437 and the fraud detection contact portion 438 include solder bulging portions 437d and 438d that bulge from the element mounting surface 401e. A conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431, and the fraudulent jig is a solder bulging portion 437d and one or more fraud detection contact portions in one or more GND contact portions 437. When the solder bulging portion 438d in the 438 is in contact with both of the solder bulging portions 438d, the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are conductive. When the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 and finds that the fraud detection line 436 and the GND line 435 are conducted by a conductive fraud jig and the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 drops. To identify that fraud has been committed. As a result, it is possible to detect an illegal act of inserting a conductive illegal jig on the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431. On the element mounting surface 431e to which the terminals 441 to 443, 445, 446 of various electronic components are fixed by solder, a fraudulent act was performed in which a conductive fraudulent jig was brought into contact with the fixed portion by solder and its periphery. In this case, the signal transmitted from the various electronic components or the signal received by the various electronic components may be illegally changed. On the other hand, since the configuration is such that the fraudulent act of bringing the conductive fraudulent jig close to the element mounting surface 431e can be grasped, there is a possibility that the fraudulent act is performed without the manager of the game hall noticing. It has been reduced.

Since the solder swelling portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 bulges from the substrate back surface 431f, the conductive fraudulent jig brought closer to the substrate back surface 431f side of the main control board 431 causes the solder swelling of the GND contact portion 437. The possibility of electrical contact with the portion 437d is increased.

Since the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 bulges from the substrate back surface 431f, the conductive fraudulent jig brought closer to the substrate back surface 431f side of the main control board 431 is soldered to the fraud detection contact portion 438. The possibility of electrical contact with the bulging portion 438d is increased.

On the element mounting surface 431e, the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is arranged side by side with the solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437. As a result, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought closer to the element mounting surface 431e side, the fraudulent jig is the solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438. It is more likely that you will be in contact with both of them. Therefore, there is an increased possibility that the fraud detection line 436 and the GND line 435 are conductive and the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 drops.

The solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 are provided intermittently along the peripheral edge portion of the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. Therefore, when a fraudulent act is performed in which the conductive fraudulent jig approaches the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431 from the side surface side of the main control device 60, the fraudulent jig is soldered to the GND contact portion 437. There is an increased possibility that the bulging portion 437d and the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contacting portion 438 are in contact with each other. As a result, the possibility that the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are conducted and the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 drops is increased. Therefore, the fraudulent activity can be grasped at an early stage.

Each of the solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided over the entire circumference of the peripheral edge portion of the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which at least one of the solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided only on a part of the peripheral edge portion of the element mounting surface 431e. When a conductive fraudulent jig approaches the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431 from the side surface side of the main control device 60, the fraudulent jig causes solder swelling of the GND contact portion 437. There is an increased possibility that the solder bulging portion 438d of the portion 437d and the fraud detection contact portion 438 will be in contact with both portions.

The GND contact portion 437 is such that the distance between the centers of the adjacent GND contact portions 437 is approximately 3 mm along the upper GND line 435a, the lower GND line 435b, the left GND line 435c, and the right GND line 435d. It is provided at intervals. As a result, the possibility that the conductive fraudulent jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e comes into contact with the solder bulging portion 437d of any GND contact portion 437 is increased.

In the fraud detection contact portion 438, the distance between the centers of adjacent fraud detection contact portions 438 along the upper fraud detection line 436a, the lower fraud detection line 436b, the left fraud detection line 436c, and the right fraud detection line 436d is approximately short. It is provided at equal intervals so as to be 3 mm. As a result, the possibility that the conductive fraudulent jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e comes into contact with the solder bulging portion 438d of any fraud detection contact portion 438 is increased.

<Another form of the sixth embodiment>
-In the main control board 431, the wiring 444 that electrically connects one GND contact portion 437 and the GND connection terminal 441 of the MPU 432, one fraud detection contact portion 438, and the fraud detection connection terminal 442 of the MPU 432 are electrically connected. The plate surface on which the wiring 447 to be connected and the wiring 448 for electrically connecting one fraud detection contact portion 438 and the voltage supply terminal 445 of the first connector CN51 are formed is not limited to the element mounting surface 431e. Absent. A part or all of these wirings 444, 447, 448 may be formed on the back surface 431f of the substrate.

In the main control board 431, the GND line 435 may be provided on the element mounting surface 431e instead of the configuration in which the GND line 435 is provided on the back surface 431f of the board. In the GND line 435 provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the surface of the region other than the region where the GND contact portion 437 is provided is covered with a resist. The solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e side as in the sixth embodiment, and is a region other than the region where the GND contact portion 437 is provided in the GND line 435. It bulges about 1 mm from the resist covering the above. As a result, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431, the possibility that the fraudulent jig comes into contact with the GND contact portion 437 is increased. As described above, even if the GND line 435 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the GND contact portion 437 can be brought into contact with the conductive fraudulent jig brought closer to the element mounting surface 431e side.

In the main control board 431, the fraud detection line 436 may be provided on the element mounting surface 431e instead of the fraud detection line 436 provided on the back surface 431f of the board. In the fraud detection line 436 provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the surface of a region other than the region where the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided is covered with a resist. The solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e side as in the sixth embodiment, and is an area where the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided in the fraud detection line 436. It bulges approximately 1 mm from the resist covering a region other than the above. As a result, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431, the possibility that the fraudulent jig comes into contact with the fraud detection contact portion 438 is increased. As described above, even if the fraud detection line 436 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the fraud detection contact portion 438 can be brought into contact with the conductive fraudulent jig brought closer to the element mounting surface 431e.

Instead of the configuration in which both the solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 are provided on the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431, the element mounting surface 431e A configuration may be configured in which only one of these two types of solder bulging portions 437d and 438d is provided. In a configuration in which only the solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided with the solder contact portion on the element mounting surface 431e. The solder contact portion is formed by allowing solder to flow into the through hole 438a of the fraud detection contact portion 438 from the element mounting surface 431e side, but does not bulge from the element mounting surface 431e and the element mounting surface. It is flush with 431e. The solder contact portion is exposed, and the conductive fraudulent jig is brought closer to the element mounting surface 431e side and comes into contact with both the solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder contact portion of the fraud detection contact portion 438. In this state, the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are conducted by the fraudulent jig. Further, in the configuration in which only the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the GND contact portion 437 is provided with the solder contact portion on the element mounting surface 431e. The solder contact portion is formed by allowing solder to flow into the through hole 437a of the GND contact portion 437 from the element mounting surface 431e side, but does not bulge from the element mounting surface 431e and the element mounting surface 431e. It is flush with each other. The solder contact portion is exposed, and the conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e side and comes into contact with both the solder contact portion of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulge portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438. In this state, the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are conducted by the fraudulent jig. As described above, even if only one of the solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the solder contact portion is provided on the other. With the configuration provided with the above, it is possible to grasp that a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraudulent jig closer to the element mounting surface 431e side has been performed.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for executing the power failure monitoring process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 54 (a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 451 a of the main control board 451 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 54 (b) is a plan view of the main control board 451 enlarged near the center.

Similar to the fourth embodiment, the main control board 451 is mounted with a large number of through-hole mounting components such as the MPU 452, the first to seventh connectors CN61 to CN67, and various elements. These through-hole mounting components are mounted only on the plate surface on one side of the main control board 451, and the plate surface is the element mounting surface 451a.

The through-hole mounting component includes a pin (not shown) that extends linearly in the plate thickness direction of the main control board 451. The insert-mounting component is mounted by being soldered by an insertion-mounting technique such as flow soldering with the pin inserted through a through-hole (not shown) provided by penetrating the main control board 451 in the plate thickness direction. Has been done. The plate surface of the main control board 451 opposite to the element mounting surface 451a is a solder surface to which the pins of the through-hole mounting components are soldered.

On the element mounting surface 451a, a connector group mounting area 453 on which the first to fourth connectors CN61 to CN64 are mounted and a fifth to seventh connector mounting area on which the fifth to seventh connectors CN65 to CN67 are mounted. 454 to 456 and an element mounting area 457 on which a large number of elements are mounted are provided.

An MPU 452 is mounted near the center of the element mounting area 457, and a power failure monitoring device 461 is mounted between the MPU 452 and the connector group mounting area 453 in the element mounting area 457. The power failure monitoring device 461 has a power supply voltage terminal 461a in which a power supply voltage of + 36V (DC36V) is input from the power supply / emission control device 78 via the first connector CN61, and a power supply / emission control device 78 via the first connector CN61. It is provided with a drive voltage terminal 461b to which an element drive voltage of DC5V is input, a reset signal terminal 461c for transmitting a reset signal to the MPU 452, and a power failure signal terminal 461d for transmitting a power failure signal to the MPU 452. Note that in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the wiring connecting the first connector CN61 and the power failure monitoring device 461 is not shown.

The MPU 452 includes a reset signal receiving terminal 462 that receives a reset signal and a power failure signal receiving terminal 463 that receives a power failure signal. On the solder surface of the main control board 451 opposite to the element mounting surface 451a, a reset signal wiring 464 for electrically connecting the reset signal terminal 461c and the reset signal receiving terminal 462, and a power failure signal terminal 461d A power failure signal wiring 465 that electrically connects the power failure signal receiving terminal 463 and the power failure signal receiving terminal 463 is formed. The reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 are copper wiring patterns, and are covered with an insulator resist so as not to be exposed on the surface.

The power failure monitoring device 461 monitors the power supply voltage input from the power supply / emission control device 78, and when the power supply voltage drops below the power failure reference voltage of + 24V (DC24V), the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is increased. Identify that the supply will be stopped. When the power failure monitoring device 461 determines that the supply of operating power is stopped, the power failure monitoring device 461 lowers the power failure signal output to the MPU 452 from the HI state to the LOW state. The main CPU 64 grasps that the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by detecting the fall of the power failure signal from the HI state to the LOW state, and similarly to the first embodiment described above. The power failure information storage process (step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) executes the power failure processing.

The power failure monitoring device 461 lowers the reset signal from the HI state to the LOW state after a predetermined time (specifically, 9 milliseconds later) after the power failure signal is turned off. The operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped when the reset signal falls. In order to execute the power failure processing, the element drive voltage supplied to the MPU 452 needs to be maintained at + 5V (DC5V) until the power failure processing is completed. In the present embodiment, the power failure reference voltage is set to 24V so that sufficient time for executing the power failure processing can be secured. The power failure reference voltage is not limited to + 24V and is arbitrary as long as sufficient time can be secured to execute the power failure processing.

<Power failure information storage processing>
Next, the power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the power failure information storage process, first, it is determined whether or not a fall of the power failure signal received from the power failure monitoring device 461 from the HI state to the LOW state is detected (step S1101), and the fall of the power failure signal is detected. If not (step S1101: NO), the power failure information storage process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the fall of the power failure signal is detected (step S1101: YES), the power failure processing (process of steps S1102 to S1104) is executed. Specifically, first, the checksum of the main RAM 66 is calculated (step S1102), and the calculated checksum is saved (step S1103). After that, "1" is set in the power failure flag provided in the main RAM 66 (step S1104), and the power failure information storage process is completed. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 64 to grasp that the power failure processing (processes in steps S1102 to S1104) has been normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 64 is stopped. is there.

Next, a state in which the power failure processing is executed will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (g). FIG. 56A shows a period during which power failure processing is executed by the main CPU 64, and FIG. 56B shows a power supply voltage input from the power supply / emission control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461. FIG. 56B. (C) shows the element drive voltage input from the power supply / emission control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461, FIG. 56 (d) shows the state of the power failure signal, and FIG. 56 (e) shows the state of the reset signal. 56 (f) shows the timing when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and FIG. 56 (g) shows the timing when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 56 (f), when the supply of the operating power is started at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 56 (b) and 56 (c), the power supply / emission control device is at the timing of t1. The power supply voltage and the element drive voltage input to the power failure monitoring device 461 from 78 start to rise. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), when the element drive voltage input from the power supply / emission control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461 at the timing of t2 reaches the voltage (+ 5 V) in the normal operating range, FIG. 56 ( As shown in d), the power failure monitoring device 461 raises the power failure signal from the LOW state to the HI state at the timing of t2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56B, the power supply voltage input from the power supply / emission control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461 reaches + 36V (DC36V) at the timing of t3. After that, at the timing of t4 when a predetermined time (specifically, 9 milliseconds) has elapsed from the timing of t2, the power failure monitoring device 461 raises the reset signal from the LOW state to the HI state as shown in FIG. 56 (e). .. The main CPU 64 starts operation when the reset signal is activated.

The time from the timing of t2 when the power failure monitoring device 461 raises the power failure signal to the timing of t4 when the power failure signal is raised is a predetermined time sufficient to stabilize the element drive voltage supplied to the MPU 452 at + 5V (DC5V). Specifically, it is set to 9 milliseconds). As a result, the operation of the main CPU 64 can be started after the MPU 452 is in a state where the element drive voltage of + 5V (DC5V) can be stably supplied.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), when the supply of the operating power is stopped at the timing of t5, it is input from the power supply / emission control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461 as shown in FIG. 56 (b). The power supply voltage starts to drop from + 36V (DC36V) and becomes below the power failure reference voltage (specifically, + 24V) at the timing of t6. As shown in FIG. 56 (d), the power failure monitoring device 461 lowers the power failure signal from the HI state to the LOW state at the timing of t6.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56A, the main CPU 64 detects the fall of the power failure signal in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 55) performed at the timing of t7, and also performs the power failure processing (power failure information). The processing of steps S1102 to S1104 in the storage process (FIG. 55) is started. The power failure processing ends at the timing of t8.

During the period from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8 when the power failure processing is executed, the HI state of the reset signal is maintained as shown in FIG. 56 (e), and the power supply is maintained as shown in FIG. 56 (c). The element drive voltage input from the launch control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461 is maintained at a normal voltage (specifically, + 5V). As a result, the processing at the time of power failure can be completed before the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped, and when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the game starts from the state before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Can be restarted normally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (e), a power failure occurs at the timing of t9, which is later than the timing of t8 and the timing at which a predetermined time (specifically, 9 milliseconds) has elapsed from the timing of t6. The monitoring device 461 lowers the reset signal from the HI state to the LOW state. As a result, the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the element drive voltage input from the power supply / emission control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461 starts to drop at the timing of t10.

As described above, the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped because a sufficient period is secured for executing the power failure processing as the period from the power failure signal being shut down to the reset signal being shut down. It is possible to complete the power failure processing at a timing earlier than that.

Next, a configuration for reducing the influence of radiation noise on the reset signal wiring 464 connecting the power failure monitoring device 461 and the MPU 452 will be described.

As described above, the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped when the reset signal drops from the HI state to the LOW state. Therefore, when only the reset signal falls due to the influence of noise without the power failure signal falling in advance, the power failure processing (the processing of steps S1102 to S1104 in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 55)) is executed. The operation of the main CPU 64 stops without being performed. In this case, since "1" is not set in the power failure flag in the main RAM 66, a negative determination is made in step S105 of the main process (FIG. 26), and the main RAM 66 is cleared (step S108). Further, when the power failure signal drops from the HI state to the LOW state, the power failure processing is executed. Therefore, when the power failure signal drops due to the influence of noise, the power failure processing is unnecessarily executed.

As described above, the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 are formed on the solder surface which is the plate surface on the main control board 451 opposite to the element mounting surface 451a. Further, as already described with reference to FIG. 7 in the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is mounted so that the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. In the state where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the island equipment, the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The game ball replenishment route for sequentially replenishing the game balls from the island equipment to the tank 75 (FIG. 2) in the payout mechanism unit 73 exists behind the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the main control board 451. In the game ball replenishment route, static electricity is generated due to the game balls rubbing against each other or the friction between the game balls and the ball passage. Then, radiation noise is generated when this static electricity is suddenly discharged. As described above, the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 are provided on the side opposite to the game ball replenishment path with the main control board 451 interposed therebetween. As a result, the possibility that the reset signal and the power failure signal are affected by the radiation noise generated by the game ball replenishment path is reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 is provided with a noise countermeasure solid 466 for reducing the influence of radiation noise on the reset signal and the power failure signal. ing. The noise suppression solid 466 is a metal (specifically, copper) solid pattern coated with an insulator resist, and is electrically connected to a ground plane (not shown) of the main control board 451. The noise countermeasure solid 466 is formed by etching a metal foil (specifically, a copper foil). The noise countermeasure solid 466 is located on the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 at a position corresponding to the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 formed on the solder surface of the main control board 451. , 465 is provided so as to be wider than these signal wirings 464 and 465 along these signal wirings 464 and 465 in such a manner that a noise countermeasure solid 466 exists between substantially the entire area and the game ball replenishment path. Has been done.

The noise countermeasure solid 466 exists between the game ball replenishment path for sequentially replenishing the game ball to the tank 75 (FIG. 2) in the payout mechanism unit 73 from the island equipment, and the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465. doing. The electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path is applied to the noise countermeasure solid 466 existing in front of the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 when viewed from the noise source (game ball replenishment path). It is absorbed and escapes to the ground plane (not shown) of the main control board 451. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence of the electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path affects the reset signal and the power failure signal.

In a configuration in which the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 are provided on the opposite sides of the main control board 451 from the game ball replenishment path, the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 and the game ball replenishment path By further providing a metal noise countermeasure solid 466 in between, the ability to shield the radiant noise generated in the game ball replenishment path is enhanced, and the influence of the radiant noise on the reset signal and the power failure signal is affected. It can be further reduced.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A metal noise countermeasure solid 466 is provided between the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 and the game ball replenishment path for replenishing the game ball to the tank 75. The electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path is caused by the noise countermeasure solid 466 existing in front of the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 when viewed from the noise source (game ball replenishment path). Be absorbed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence of the electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path affects the reset signal and the power failure signal.

By reducing the possibility that the reset signal will fall due to the influence of radiation noise, the power failure signal will not fall in advance and only the reset signal will fall due to the influence of radiation noise, resulting in power failure processing (power failure processing ( It is prevented that the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped without executing the process of step S1102 to step S1104 in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 55). Further, since the possibility that the power failure signal falls due to the influence of radiation noise is reduced, it is prevented that the power failure processing is unnecessarily executed.

The noise suppression solid 466 is a solid pattern made of metal (specifically, copper), and is electrically connected to the ground plane of the main control board 451. Noise Countermeasures The electrical noise absorbed by the solid 466 escapes to the ground plane. As a result, the possibility that the electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path is absorbed by the noise countermeasure solid 466 can be increased, and the possibility that the influence of the noise affects the reset signal and the power failure signal is reduced. can do.

The noise countermeasure solid 466 is such that the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 face the game ball replenishment path with the noise countermeasure solid 466 in between, and these signal wirings are arranged along these signal wirings 464 and 465. It is provided so as to be wider than 464 and 465. As a result, the possibility that the electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path reaches the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 without being absorbed by the noise countermeasure solid 466 is reduced. Therefore, the influence of radiation noise on the reset signal and the power failure signal can be reduced.

The MPU 452 and the power failure monitoring device 461 are through-hole mounting components, and the MPU 452 and the power failure monitoring device 461 are mounted on the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451. The terminals 462 and 463 of the MPU 452 and the terminals 461a to 461d of the power failure monitoring device 461 are soldered on the main control board 451 on the solder surface which is the plate surface opposite to the element mounting surface 451a. Therefore, in the main control board 451, the entire reset signal wiring 464 for the power failure monitoring device 461 to transmit the reset signal to the main control board 451 and the power failure signal wiring 465 for transmitting the power failure signal are provided on the solder surface. In addition, noise countermeasure solid 466 may be provided on the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 in a region opposite to the entire reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 with the main control board 451 sandwiched between them. it can. As a result, before the electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 with the noise countermeasure solid 466 sandwiched between them reaches the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465, the noise is generated. The noise can be blocked by the noise countermeasure solid 466 existing in front of the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 when viewed from the source (game ball replenishment path).

The reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 are provided on the side opposite to the game ball replenishment path with the main control board 451 interposed therebetween. As a result, the possibility that the reset signal and the power failure signal are affected by the radiation noise generated in the game ball replenishment path is reduced.

The power failure monitoring device 461 is mounted on the main control board 451 on which the MPU 452 is mounted. Therefore, the total length of the reset signal wiring 464 can be shortened and the total length of the power failure signal wiring 465 can be shortened as compared with the configuration in which the power failure monitoring device 461 is mounted on a board different from the MPU 452. .. As a result, the influence of radiation noise on the reset signal and the power failure signal is reduced.

If the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped without executing the power failure processing, the main RAM 66 is cleared after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. As a result, when the operation of the main CPU 64 is not normally stopped, it is possible to prevent the game from being performed while the information stored in the main RAM 66 is maintained.

<8th Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment in that the surface mount component is mounted on the main control board. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the seventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the seventh embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 57 (a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 471 a of the main control board 471 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 57 (b) is a plan view of the main control board 471 in which the vicinity of the center is enlarged.

Similar to the first embodiment, the main control board 471 is mounted with a large number of surface mount components such as the MPU 472, the first to seventh connectors CN71 to CN77, and various elements. These surface mount components are mounted only on the plate surface on one side of the main control board 471, and the plate surface is the element mounting surface 471a. The terminals of these surface mount components are soldered to the element mounting surface 471a by a surface mount technique such as reflow soldering.

As shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, the MPU 472 is mounted near the center of the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471, and the MPU 472 and the first to fourth elements are mounted on the element mounting surface 471a. A power failure monitoring device 473 is mounted between the connectors CN71 to CN74.

Similar to the seventh embodiment, the power failure monitoring device 473 has a power supply voltage terminal 473a to which a power supply voltage of + 36V (DC36V) is input from the power supply / emission control device 78 via the first connector CN71, and the first connector. A drive voltage terminal 473b in which an element drive voltage of DC5V is input from the power supply / emission control device 78 via CN71, a reset signal terminal 473c for transmitting a reset signal to the MPU 472, and a power failure signal for transmitting a power failure signal to the MPU 472. It is provided with a power failure signal terminal 473d. Note that in FIGS. 57A and 57B, the wiring connecting the first connector CN71 and the power failure monitoring device 473 is not shown.

Similar to the seventh embodiment, the MPU 472 includes a reset signal receiving terminal 474 for receiving a reset signal and a power failure signal receiving terminal 475 for receiving a power failure signal. The main control board 471 has a reset signal wiring 476 that electrically connects the reset signal terminal 473c and the reset signal receiving terminal 474, and a power failure signal wiring that electrically connects the power failure signal terminal 473d and the power failure signal receiving terminal 475. 477 is formed.

In the main control board 471, in the vicinity of the reset signal terminal 473c in the power failure monitoring device 473 and in the vicinity of the reset signal receiving terminal 474 in the MPU 472, a part of the reset signal wiring 476 is opposite to the element mounting surface 471a in the main control board 471. A reset-side first through hole 481 and a reset-side second through hole 482 for turning on the back surface of the substrate, which is the plate surface on the side, are formed. Further, in the main control board 471, in the vicinity of the power failure signal terminal 473d in the power failure monitoring device 473 and in the vicinity of the power failure signal receiving terminal 475 in the MPU 472, a part of the power failure signal wiring 477 is turned to the back surface of the board of the main control board 471. The first through hole 483 on the power failure side and the second through hole 484 on the power failure side are formed. These through holes 481 to 484 are through holes formed by penetrating the main control board 471 in the plate thickness direction, and the inner peripheral surface thereof is plated with a conductive metal such as copper.

The reset signal wiring 476 is provided on the element mounting surface 471a and extends from the reset signal terminal 473c to the reset side first through hole 481. The reset side first wiring 476a and the reset side first through hole provided on the back surface of the substrate are provided. The reset side second wiring 476b extending from 481 to the reset side second through hole 482, and the reset side third wiring 476c provided on the element mounting surface 471a and extending from the reset side second through hole 482 to the reset signal receiving terminal 474. It has. The length of the reset side second wiring 476b is set to be longer than the total length of the reset side first wiring 476a and the reset side third wiring 476c, and most of the reset signal wiring 476 is provided on the back surface of the substrate. There is.

The power failure signal wiring 477 is provided on the element mounting surface 471a and extends from the power failure signal terminal 473d to the power failure side first through hole 483, and the power failure side first wiring 477a and the power failure side first through hole provided on the back surface of the substrate. A power failure side second wiring 477b extending from 483 to the power failure side second through hole 484, and a power failure side third wiring 477c provided on the element mounting surface 471a and extending from the power failure side second through hole 484 to the power failure signal receiving terminal 475. It has. The length of the power failure side second wiring 477b provided on the back surface of the substrate is set longer than the total length of the power failure side first wiring 477a and the power failure side third wiring 477c provided on the element mounting surface 471a. Most of the power failure signal wiring 477 exists on the back surface of the substrate.

As already described in the seventh embodiment, the main control device 60 is mounted so that the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Most of the reset signal wiring 476 and the power failure signal wiring 477 are provided on the back surface of the board, which is opposite to the game ball replenishment route for replenishing the game ball to the tank 75 (FIG. 2) with the main control board 471 in between. It is provided on the side. As a result, the possibility that the reset signal and the power failure signal are affected by the radiation noise generated by the flow of the game ball is reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, in order to reduce the influence of radiation noise on the reset side second wiring 476b and the power failure side second wiring 477b on the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471. The noise countermeasure solid 485 is provided. The noise suppression solid 485 is a solid pattern made of metal (specifically, copper) coated with an insulator resist, and is electrically connected to the ground plane (not shown) of the main control board 471. It is GND solid (ground solid). The noise countermeasure solid 485 is formed by etching a metal foil (specifically, a copper foil). The noise countermeasure solid 485 is located on the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471 at a position corresponding to the reset side second wiring 476b and the power failure side second wiring 477b formed on the back surface of the main control board 471. In an embodiment in which a noise countermeasure solid 485 exists between substantially the entire second wiring 476b, 477b and the game ball replenishment path, along these second wirings 476b, 477b, from these second wirings 476b, 477b. Is also provided to be wide.

The noise countermeasure solid 485 occupies most of the game ball replenishment route for sequentially replenishing the game ball to the tank 75 (FIG. 2) in the payout mechanism unit 73 from the island equipment, the reset signal wiring 476, and the power failure signal wiring 477. It exists between the second wirings 476b and 477b. The electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path is absorbed by the noise countermeasure solid 485 existing on the front side of the second wirings 476b and 477b when viewed from the noise source (game ball replenishment path). , Escape to the ground plane (not shown) of the main control board 471. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence of the electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path affects the reset signal and the power failure signal.

In a configuration in which the second wirings 476b and 477b are provided on the opposite side of the main control board 471 from the game ball replenishment path, the second wirings 476b and 477b are further made of metal between the game ball replenishment path. Since the noise countermeasure solid 485 is provided, the ability to shield the radiation noise generated in the game ball replenishment path can be enhanced, and the influence of the radiation noise on the reset signal and the power failure signal can be further reduced. ..

As described above, the MPU 452 and the power failure monitoring device 461 are surface mount components, and the reset signal terminal 473c and the power failure signal terminal 473d of the MPU 452, and the reset signal receiving terminal 474 and the power failure signal receiving terminal 475 of the power failure monitoring device 461 are mainly used. It is soldered to the element mounting surface 471a of the control board 471. The reset side first wiring 476a that electrically connects the reset signal terminal 473c and the reset side first through hole 481, and the reset side third wiring that electrically connects the reset side second through hole 482 and the reset signal receiving terminal 474. By providing the 476c on the element mounting surface 471a side, it is possible to provide the reset side second wiring 476b, which occupies most of the reset signal wiring 476, on the back surface of the substrate. As a result, the noise countermeasure solid 485 can exist between the reset side second wiring 476b and the game ball replenishment path. Further, the power failure side first wiring 477a that electrically connects the power failure signal terminal 473d and the power failure side first through hole 483, and the power failure side first wiring 477a that electrically connects the power failure side second through hole 484 and the power failure signal receiving terminal 475. By providing the three wirings 477c on the element mounting surface 471a side, it is possible to provide the power failure side second wiring 477b, which occupies most of the power failure signal wiring 477, on the back surface of the substrate. As a result, the noise countermeasure solid 485 can exist between the power failure side second wiring 477b and the game ball supply path.

By preventing the reset signal from falling due to the influence of radiation noise, it is possible to prevent the operation of the main CPU 64 from stopping without executing the power failure processing. Further, since the power failure signal is prevented from falling due to the influence of radiation noise, it is possible to prevent unnecessary power failure processing from being executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A metal noise countermeasure solid 485 is provided between the reset side second wiring 476b, which occupies most of the reset signal wiring 476, and the game ball replenishment path for replenishing the game ball to the tank 75. This reduces the possibility that the reset signal will drop due to the influence of radiation noise. Therefore, it is prevented that the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped without executing the power failure processing.

The reset side second wiring 476b, which occupies most of the reset signal wiring 476, is provided on the back surface of the substrate, and is provided on the side opposite to the game ball replenishment path with the main control board 471 interposed therebetween. As a result, in the main control board 471 on which the surface mount component is mounted, the possibility that the reset signal is affected by the radiation noise generated in the game ball replenishment path is reduced.

A metal noise countermeasure solid 485 is provided between the power failure side second wiring 477b, which occupies most of the power failure signal wiring 477, and the game ball replenishment path. This reduces the possibility that the power failure signal will drop due to the influence of radiation noise. Therefore, it is prevented that unnecessary power failure processing is executed.

The power failure side second wiring 477b, which occupies most of the power failure signal wiring 477, is provided on the back surface of the board, and the power failure side second wiring 477b is provided on the side opposite to the game ball supply path with the main control board 471 in between. Has been done. This reduces the possibility that the power failure signal will be affected by the radiation noise generated in the game ball replenishment path.

The MPU 472 and the power failure monitoring device 473 are surface mount components, and the reset signal terminal 473c of the power failure monitoring device 473 and the reset signal receiving terminal 474 of the MPU 472 are soldered to the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471. The reset side first wiring 476a that electrically connects the reset signal terminal 473c and the reset side first through hole 481, and the reset side third wiring that electrically connects the reset side second through hole 482 and the reset signal receiving terminal 474. By providing the 476c on the element mounting surface 471a side, it is possible to provide the reset side second wiring 476b, which occupies most of the reset signal wiring 476, on the back surface of the substrate. As a result, the noise countermeasure solid 485 can exist between the reset side second wiring 476b and the game ball replenishment path.

The MPU 472 and the power failure monitoring device 473 are surface mount components, and the power failure signal terminal 473d of the power failure monitoring device 473 and the power failure signal receiving terminal 475 of the MPU 472 are soldered to the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471. The first wiring 477a on the power failure side that electrically connects the power failure signal terminal 473d and the first through hole 483 on the power failure side, and the third wiring on the power failure side that electrically connects the second through hole 484 on the power failure side and the power failure signal receiving terminal 475. By providing the 477c on the element mounting surface 471a side, it is possible to provide the power failure side second wiring 477b, which occupies most of the power failure signal wiring 477, on the back surface of the substrate. As a result, the noise countermeasure solid 485 can exist between the power failure side second wiring 477b and the game ball supply path.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) In the first embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the main control board 61 is fixed to the back case body 122, the main control board 61 may be fixed to the front case body 121. The front side facing plate portion 141 of the front case body 121 is used for position adjustment when the main control board 61 is combined with the front case body 121 at the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side and upper right side) of the element facing surface 141a. The substrate position adjustment boss used is integrally formed. The substrate position adjusting boss is formed in a cylindrical shape so as to project from the element facing surface 141a toward the back side facing plate portion 123. At the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side) of the main control board 61, board fixing boss insertion holes are formed so that the board position adjusting boss can be inserted. The horizontal dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is the diameter of the board position adjusting boss so that the lateral movement of the front case body 121 is restricted when the board position adjusting boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole. It is set slightly larger than. The board fixing boss insertion hole is a long hole extending vertically along the short sides 61c and 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is such that the front case body 121 is allowed to move approximately 1 mm in the vertical direction when the board position adjusting boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole. It is set approximately 1 mm larger than the diameter of the position adjustment boss.

In the step of combining the main control board 61 with the front case body 121, the main control board 61 slides toward the front facing plate portion 141 after the board position adjusting boss is inserted into the board fixing boss. Will be done. The lower upright wall 143 of the front case body 121 is in contact with the long side 61b on the lower side of the main control board 61 on the back side facing plate portion 123 side of the lower upright wall 143 with respect to the front case body 121. A first board guide portion for guiding the main control board 61 upward is provided. In a state where the main control board 61 is guided upward with respect to the front case body 121 by the first board guide portion, the free end side of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 is the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159. , 164 to 166. In this state, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 are present at the center of the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166 in the vertical direction.

The upper upright wall 142 of the front case body 121 comes into contact with the upper long side 61a portion of the main control board 61 after being guided upward by the first board guide portion, and the main control board with respect to the front case body 121. A second substrate guide portion for guiding the 61 downward is provided. By guiding the main control board 61 downward with respect to the front case body 121 by the second board guide portion, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 have the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159,164 to Moving downward from the center in the vertical direction of 166, the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are the lower standing wall portions 101c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. It will be in a state of approaching ~ 104c.

On the front side facing plate portion 141, a columnar front side board fixing boss used for fixing the main control board 61 to the front case body 121 is provided on the left upper part, the left lower part, the right side lower part, and the right side upper part of the element facing surface 141a. It is integrally formed. The front board fixing boss projects from the element facing surface 141a toward the main control board 61, and a screw hole for screw fixing the main control board 61 is formed at the free end of the front board fixing boss. Substrate fixing through holes are formed in the upper left side, the lower left side, the lower right side, and the upper right side of the main control board 61 so that the main control board 61 can be screwed to the front board fixing boss. These four substrate fixing through holes are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the four front substrate fixing bosses described above. The main control board 61 is screwed from the back surface 61f side of the board to the front board fixing boss in a state of being guided downward with respect to the front case body 121 by the second board guide portion, so that the back side of the front case body 121 is fixed. Is fixed to.

The screw holes formed in the front board fixing boss and the board fixing through holes formed in the main control board 61 guide the main control board 61 downward with respect to the front case body 121 by the second board guide portion. In the front, the screws cannot be fixed by shifting in the vertical direction, and after the main control board 61 is guided downward by the second guide portion, the main control board 61 is communicated and the screws can be fixed. Therefore, the front case is in a state where the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are close to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The main control board 61 can be fixed to the body 121.

In this way, even in the configuration in which the main control board 61 is fixed to the front case body 121, the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b is reduced. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire into the play.

(2) The position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 (position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 in the second embodiment, position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 in the third embodiment) are inserted in the first to third embodiments. Instead of the boss insertion holes 175-178 (boss insertion holes 301-304 in the second embodiment, boss insertion holes 385-388 in the third embodiment), the four corners of the main control board 61 (upper left side in front view, The lower left side, the upper right side, and the lower right side) may be provided with notches through which the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 are inserted. The notches on the upper left side and the upper right side are provided from the upper end of the main control board 61 to the lower half position, and the notches on the lower left side and the lower right side are provided in the middle position above the lower end of the main control board 61. It is provided over. These four notches have a horizontal dimension that restricts the movement of the front case body 121 in the left-right direction with the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 inserted through the notches, and the front case body 121. Has a vertical dimension that allows the movement of the boss in the vertical direction. With the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 inserted through the notch, the lateral movement of the front case body 121 is restricted, while the vertical movement of the front case body 121 is permitted. Therefore, the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the lower peripheral edges 275b to 275 to 278 of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278). 278b, in the third embodiment, the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365) approach the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The front case body 121 can be moved until this happens.

(3) In the first to third embodiments, the first to fourth connectors, which are through-hole mount components, are mounted on the main control board 61 instead of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, which are surface mount components. It may be a configuration that has been set. The first to fourth connectors in this configuration linearly penetrate the main control board 61 in the plate thickness direction instead of the terminals 111 to 116 having the fixing portions 111b to 116b extending along the element mounting surface 61e. It has a rod-shaped pin that extends.

The first connector is 17 pieces arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, the distance between the axes of adjacent pins is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction of the first connector as the arrangement direction. The other end side of 17 pins arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, the distance between the axes of adjacent pins is 2.54 mm) with the one end side pin and the longitudinal direction as the arrangement direction. It has a pin. The row of pins on the one end side and the row of pins on the other end side are arranged at a predetermined distance (specifically, a distance such that the distance between the pin shafts is 2.54 mm) in the lateral direction of the first connector. The row of pins on one end side is arranged on one end side (lower standing wall portion 101c side) in the lateral direction, and the row of pins on the other end side is arranged on the other end side (upper side) in the lateral direction. It is arranged on the upright wall portion 101b side). The second connector includes two pins arranged in the center in the lateral direction of the second connector. These two pins are arranged at a predetermined distance (specifically, a distance such that the distance between the axes of the pins is 2.54 mm) in the longitudinal direction of the second connector. The third connector includes two pins arranged in the center in the lateral direction of the third connector. These two pins are arranged at a predetermined distance (specifically, a distance such that the distance between the axes of the pins is 2.54 mm) in the longitudinal direction of the third connector. Ten fourth connectors are arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, the distance between the axes of adjacent pins is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction of the fourth connector as the arrangement direction. One end side of the pin and the other end side of 10 pieces arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, the distance between the axes of adjacent pins is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction as the arrangement direction. It has a pin. The row of pins on one end and the row of pins on the other end are arranged at a predetermined distance (specifically, a distance such that the distance between the pin shafts is 2.54 mm) in the lateral direction of the fourth connector. The row of pins on one end side is arranged on one end side (lower standing wall portion 104c side) in the lateral direction, and the row of pins on the other end side is arranged on the other end side (upper side) in the lateral direction. It is arranged on the upright wall portion 104b side).

The pins of the first to fourth connectors are soldered on the back surface 61f of the board in a state of being inserted into a through hole formed by penetrating the main control board 61 in the plate thickness direction, and are soldered to the element mounting surface 61e side. Is not exposed. As described above, even if the pins of the first to fourth connectors are not exposed on the element mounting surface 61e side, the first to fourth connectors and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (the first). In the second embodiment, the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 279, and in the third embodiment, the play with the peripheral portion of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365) is a minus driver. When a conductive misuse jig such as the above is inserted, the fraudulent jig is used to scrape the resist covering the wiring provided on the element mounting surface 61e to expose the wiring to the surface. At the same time, there is a risk of fraudulent acts such as bringing the fraudulent jig into contact with the exposed wiring.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, as described above, under the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the insertion holes 156 to 159 of the first to fourth connectors. The lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b are close to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play existing between the side peripheral edges 156b to 159b is reduced. In the second embodiment, as described above, the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portions 275b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 The lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play existing between the 278b and the 278b is reduced. In the third embodiment, as described above, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 The lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play existing between the and 365b is reduced. Therefore, by applying this configuration to the first to third embodiments, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b (second) of the first to fourth connectors are applied. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a fraudulent jig into the play existing between the lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b in the embodiment and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b in the third embodiment). .. Therefore, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts may be performed on the wiring electrically connected to the pin on one end side of the first connector, the pin on the second connector, the pin on the third connector, and the pin on one end side of the fourth connector. The sex can be reduced.

(4) In the first to third embodiments, the fixing portions 113b and 114b of the terminals 113 and 114 of the second connector CN2 and the third connector CN3 are higher than the center in the vertical direction of the housings 102 and 103 (upper side). It may be configured so as to extend from the position of the upright wall portions 102b, 103b) to the lower upright wall portions 102c, 103c and the lower peripheral edges 157b, 158b so as to straddle along the element mounting surface 61e. .. Also in this configuration, the lower upright wall portions 102c, 103c and the lower peripheral edges 157b, 158b (lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b in the second embodiment, lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b in the third embodiment). When a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire is inserted between the and, the fraudulent jig may come into contact with the fixing portions 113b and 114b. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, as described above, under the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the insertion holes 156 to 159 of the first to fourth connectors. The lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b are close to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play existing between the side peripheral edges 156b to 159b is reduced. In the second embodiment, as described above, the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portions 275b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 The lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play existing between the 278b and the 278b is reduced. In the third embodiment, as described above, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 The lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play existing between the and 365b is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which the fraudulent jig is brought into contact with the fixing portions 113b and 114b.

(5) In the first to third embodiments, one of the left side play and the right side play of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 may be smaller than the other. .. Specifically, the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 and the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 (position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 and boss insertion holes 301 to 304 in the second embodiment, and position adjustment bosses 381 to 381 in the third embodiment). 384 and boss insertion holes 385-388), the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 4). 278 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274, and in the third embodiment, the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 and the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365) were inserted. In the state, the front case body 121 (in the second embodiment, the table) so that the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. The case body 232 and the front case body 312) in the third embodiment are guided.

First to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 279 in the second embodiment, first to first in the third embodiment). When a conductive fraudulent jig such as a flat-blade screwdriver is inserted in the play existing between the peripheral portion of the fourth front side connector insertion hole 362 to 365), the element is mounted using the fraudulent jig. There is a risk of fraudulent acts such as scraping the resist covering the wiring provided on the surface 61e to expose the wiring to the surface and bringing the fraudulent jig into contact with the exposed wiring. On the other hand, a configuration that reduces the play existing between the left standing wall portions 101d to 104d of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the left peripheral portion of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 is configured. By providing the configuration, the wiring patterns arranged around the left side of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 among the wiring patterns provided on the element mounting surface 61e are prioritized from the above fraudulent acts. Can be protected.

(6) In the first to third embodiments, the main control board 61 has boss insertion holes 175 to 178 as elongated holes extending in the vertical direction (boss insertion holes 301 to 304, third in the second embodiment). In the embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the boss insertion holes 385-388) are formed, the configuration in which the boss insertion holes are formed as elongated holes extending in the oblique direction may be used. Specifically, the main control board 61 is passed through the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side and upper right side) of the main control board 61 in the plate thickness direction, and the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 (second). In the third embodiment, boss insertion holes are formed through which the position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 and the position adjustment bosses 381 to 384) are inserted. These four boss insertion holes are elongated holes extending in a direction in which the boss insertion holes are inclined downward toward the right. It should be noted that these four boss insertion holes may be formed as elongated holes extending in a direction in which they are inclined downward toward the left.

With the position adjusting bosses 171 to 174 being inserted into the boss insertion holes, the front case body 121 (front case body 232 in the second embodiment, front case body 312 in the third embodiment) is the back case body 122. (The back case body 234 in the second embodiment and the back case body 313 in the third embodiment) can be moved diagonally upward to the left and diagonally downward to the right. The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271. ~ 274, in the third embodiment, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are present in the center in the vertical direction of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365). After being inserted into the fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, the front case body 121 is moved diagonally upward to the left with respect to the back case body 122 to move the lower side of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Peripheral portions 156b to 159b (in the second embodiment, the lower peripheral portions 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278, and in the third embodiment, the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to The lower peripheral edge portion 362b to 365b) of 365 can be brought close to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. As a result, the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 is reduced. can do.

As described above, even if the boss insertion hole is formed as an elongated hole extending in an oblique direction, the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the first to fourth connector insertion holes of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are formed. The play existing between the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of 156 to 159 can be reduced to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts of inserting a fraudulent jig such as a wire into the play.

(7) In the first to third embodiments, the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are provided on the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b, and the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are first. 1st to 4th connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274, in the third embodiment The 1st to 4th connectors CN1 to CN4 are located below the center in the vertical direction of the 1st to 4th front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365). It may be configured to be inserted through 156 to 159. In this configuration, since the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are provided on the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are in the vertical direction of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. After inserting the 1st to 4th connectors CN1 to CN4 into the 1st to 4th connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in a state of being located below the center of the above, the positional relationship is maintained. The front case body 121 (front case body 232 in the second embodiment, front case body 312 in the third embodiment) is mounted on the back side facing plate portion 123 (back side facing plate portion 235, third embodiment in the second embodiment). In the embodiment, the front case body 121 can be screwed and fixed to the back case body 122 by sliding it toward the back side facing plate portion 315).

Therefore, the step of moving the front case body 121 upward with respect to the back case body 122 after inserting the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 is omitted. The lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (the first to 159b in the second embodiment). It is close to the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, and the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment. Can be in a state.

(8) In the first to third embodiments, when a fraudulent act of illegally manipulating a signal is performed, a signal having a relatively large number of game balls to be paid out is preferentially protected from the fraudulent act. While assigned to the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4, the signal on which the number of game balls to be paid out when the fraudulent act is performed is relatively small is the terminal on the other end side of the fourth connector CN4. It may be the configuration assigned to 116. As already described in the first to third embodiments, the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4 is brought into contact with a conductive fraudulent jig as compared with the terminal 116 on the other end side to illegally signal. Priority is given to protection from fraudulent operations. Since the number of the terminal 115 on the one end side of the fourth connector CN4 is limited, the number of signals assigned to the terminal 115 on the one end side is also limited.

In this configuration, the detection signals of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a and the detection signals of the special electric detection sensor 45a are assigned to the terminal 115 on one end side, while the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a is on the other end side. It is assigned to terminal 116. As already described in the first embodiment, even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. Is paid out. For this reason, when a fraudulent act of illegally manipulating the detection signals of the first to third prize opening detection sensors 42a to 44a is performed continuously as if a ball was entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 pieces are used. The prize balls are paid out continuously. Further, when a fraudulent act of illegally manipulating the detection signal of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is performed continuously as if a ball has entered the special electric power winning device 32, 15 prize balls are continuously paid out. Will be done. In these cases, the economic loss that the game hall suffers in a short time becomes large.

By assigning a detection signal to which a relatively large number of game balls (for example, 10 or more game balls) are paid out when the signal is illegally operated to the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4, the game hole is shortened. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities that cost a lot of time.

(9) In the first to third embodiments described above, among the signals relating to the presence or absence of the game ball entering the ball entry portion, the transition to a state advantageous for the player due to the occurrence of the game ball entry. Terminals 113 to 115 are preferentially protected from fraudulent acts of illegally manipulating the signal in the 2nd to 4th connectors CN2 to CN4 only for the signal regarding the presence or absence of the game ball entering the ball entry portion where It may be the configuration assigned to. As signals regarding the presence or absence of a game ball entering the ball entry portion, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, the first operation port detection sensor 46a, the second operation port detection sensor 47a, The detection signals of the out port detection sensor 48a and the gate detection sensor 49a are present.

In this configuration, among these detection signals, the detection signals of the first operation port detection sensor 46a, the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and the gate detection sensor 49a, which are related to the transition to a state advantageous for the player, are fraudulent acts. It is assigned to terminals 113 to 115 that are preferentially protected from. On the other hand, the detection signals of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the out opening detection sensor 48a, which are not related to the transition to the advantageous state for the player, are the terminals on the other end side of the fourth connector CN4. It is assigned to 116. The other end terminal 116 is not a target to be preferentially protected from fraudulent activity.

As already described in the first embodiment, the winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. If a big hit or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. In addition, even if a big hit or a small hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a game mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won, which is advantageous for the player. As already described in the first embodiment, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric service opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general drawing display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. The general electric power open state is a state in which the general electric power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined mode and the second operating port 34 can be won a prize, which is advantageous for the player.

Among the signals regarding the presence or absence of the game ball entering the ball entry section, the transition to a state advantageous for the player occurs due to the entry of the game ball. By configuring the configuration in which only the presence / absence signal is assigned to the terminals 113 to 115 which are preferentially protected from fraudulent acts of illegally manipulating the signal in the second to fourth connectors CN2 to CN4, the signal is illegal. It is possible to prevent the player from being illegally created in a favorable state by the fraudulent act of manipulating the player.

(10) In the first to third embodiments, the special electric drive signal transmitted from the main control device 60 to the special electric drive unit 32c and the special electric drive signal transmitted from the main control device 60 to the general electric drive unit 34c. The normal electric drive signal may be assigned to the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4, and the special electric open detection sensor 32b and the general electric open detection sensor 34b may not be provided.

If the special electric drive signal is illegally transmitted to the special electric drive unit 32c, the special electric winning device 32 is illegally opened, so that the special electric winning device 32 is illegally won. I will be forced to. In the configuration in which the special electric opening detection sensor 32b is not provided, the main CPU 64 cannot grasp the situation in which the special electric winning device 32 is illegally won. If a fraudulent act of illegally transmitting a special electric drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34c is performed, the general electric accessory 34a is illegally opened, so a prize is given to the second operating port 34. It will be generated illegally. In the configuration in which the normal power opening detection sensor 34b is not provided, the main CPU 64 cannot grasp the situation in which the winning of the second operating port 34 is illegally generated.

On the other hand, by configuring the special electric drive signal and the general electric drive signal to be assigned to the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4, a fraudulent act of illegally manipulating the special electric drive signal and the general electric drive signal can be performed. Can be prevented. In this configuration, only one of the special electric drive signal and the general electric drive signal is assigned to the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4, and the other is assigned to the terminal 116 on the other end side. May be.

(11) In the first to third embodiments, all wiring for transmitting an external signal to the management computer of the game hall via the external terminal plate 79 is prioritized from fraudulent activity in the first connector CN1. It may be configured to be assigned to the terminal on one end side which is protected by. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission of the external signal to the management computer of the game hall from being illegally hindered and the management computer from being unable to accurately grasp the payout status of the game ball in the pachinko machine 10.

(12) In the first to third embodiments, the terminal 111 on one end side of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 on the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 on the third connector CN3, and the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4. The wiring pattern formed on the element mounting surface 61e for electrically connecting the fixing portions 111b, 113b to 115b and the electronic components mounted on the main control board 61 is the first to fourth connectors CN1 to. Lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of CN4 and lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. The lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b, and in the third embodiment, the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b) of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365) may be extended so as to extend. Good.

The surface of the wiring pattern is covered with a resist, but when the resist is scraped, it is inserted into the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b. There is a risk that a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire may come into electrical contact with the wiring pattern. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, as described above, under the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the insertion holes 156 to 159 of the first to fourth connectors. The lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b are close to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play existing between the side peripheral edges 156b to 159b is reduced. In the second embodiment, as described above, the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portions 275b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 The lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play existing between the 278b and the 278b is reduced. In the third embodiment, as described above, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 The lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play existing between the and 365b is reduced.

Therefore, the main controls are fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b at one end side terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end side terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4. The wiring patterns that electrically connect the electronic components mounted on the board 61 are the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the insertion holes 156 to 159 of the first to fourth connectors. Even in the configuration extending so as to straddle between the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b, the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b (in the second embodiment, the lower peripheral edges). Preventing the illegal jig inserted in the play existing between the portions 275b to 278b and the lower peripheral portion 362b to 365b) in the third embodiment from electrically contacting the wiring pattern. Can be done.

(13) In the first to third embodiments, the V-winning passage area is defined as the V-winning is specified based on the detection of the game ball passing through the V-winning passage area. The signal line of the detection signal for detecting the passing game ball is any of the terminal 111 on one end side of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4. It may be a configuration assigned to a connector. Specifically, the variable display unit is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral edge of the variable display unit projecting forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the areas where the game ball can flow down in the game area PA are the upper area and the upper area. On the other hand, it is divided into a left side region and a right side region which are continuous below the left side region, and a lower region which is continuous below the left side region and the right side region, respectively. The game ball flows down in the order of the upper region → the left side region → the lower region when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the rotation amount in the first range, and the upper side when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the rotation amount in the second range. It flows down in the order of area → right area → lower area.

In the lower region, a first operating portion is provided so that a prize can be won only when the game ball flows down the left region of the left region and the right region. A second actuating portion having a guidance unit is provided in the right region. The game ball flowing down the right region does not enter the second operating portion when the guiding unit is in the non-inducing state, while it enters the second operating portion when the guiding unit is in the guided state. Will be done. In the right region, a through winning portion is provided vertically above the second operating portion, a special electric winning device is provided downstream of the second operating portion, and distribution is provided below the special electric winning device. A winning device is provided. The game ball that has won the through winning section can win the second operating section, the special electric winning device, or the distribution winning device. The through winning unit, the special electric winning device, and the distribution winning device can win a prize only when the game ball flows down the right side region of the left side region and the right side region. When a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the first operating unit, the second operating unit, the distribution winning device, and the special electric winning device are hit, it is assumed that the through winning section is hit. However, the payout of the game ball is not executed. When a lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through winning unit and the result of the lottery is a winning in the guidance execution state, the guidance unit of the second operating unit enters the guidance execution state in a predetermined mode. Transition.

A winning lottery is held based on the winning of the first operating unit or the second operating unit. When either the 6R jackpot result or the 15R jackpot result is selected in the winning lottery, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device can be won after the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are completed. .. If any of the first small hit result to the third small hit result is selected in the winning lottery executed based on the winning of the second operating unit, after the game round corresponding to the small hit result is completed, The mode shifts to the distribution execution mode in which the distribution prize device can be won. The distribution winning device is provided with a distribution entrance having a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through the distribution entrance and an open state in which the game ball can pass through. It is equipped with a distribution side opening / closing member for switching. The game ball that has won a prize at the distribution entrance is led out to a branch passage formed in the base body of the distribution winning device. The branch passage includes an upstream passage region, a discharge passage region set to be continuous with the downstream end of the upstream passage region, and a discharge passage region branched from an intermediate position of the discharge passage region. Has a V-winning aisle area for guiding the game ball to different sides. At the branching point to the V winning passage area in the discharge passage area, a switching piece is provided which is arranged at the retracted position in the first state and is arranged at the V induction position in the second state. The game ball that has flowed into the branch passage in the first state flows down the discharge passage region without being guided to the V winning passage region, and is detected by a count detection sensor provided downstream from the branch position by the switching piece. In the second state, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage is guided by the switching piece and flows into the V winning passage area, and is detected by the V winning detection sensor provided in the V winning passage area. In the distribution execution mode, the game ball is basically detected by the V winning detection sensor.

Regardless of whether the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor or the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor, the same number of prize balls corresponding to the distribution winning device are paid out. Further, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor in the distribution execution mode, the open / close execution mode is generated after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, if the distribution execution mode ends without the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur. As already described in the first to third embodiments, the terminal 115 on one end side of the fourth connector CN4 is a signal set to the terminal 115 on one end side by using a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire. Priority is given to protection from fraudulent activities. In this configuration, the detection signal of the V winning detection sensor is input to the main CPU 64 via the one end side terminal 115. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent operation of the detection signal of the V winning detection sensor to illegally generate the open / close execution mode after the distribution execution mode. The signal line of the detection signal of the V winning detection sensor is preferentially protected from fraudulent acts using a conductive fraudulent jig, the terminal 111 on one end side of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, and the terminal 113. It may be configured to be assigned to any of the terminals 114 of the third connector CN3.

(14) In the second embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the main control board 61 is fixed to the back case body 234, the main control board 61 may be fixed to the front case body 232. The front side facing plate portion 261 of the front case body 232 is used for position adjustment when the main control board 61 is combined with the front case body 232 at the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side and upper right side) of the element facing surface 261a. The substrate position adjustment boss used is integrally formed. The substrate position adjusting boss is formed in a cylindrical shape so as to project from the element facing surface 261a toward the back side facing plate portion 235. At the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side) of the main control board 61, board fixing boss insertion holes are formed so that the board position adjusting boss can be inserted. The horizontal dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is the diameter of the board position adjusting boss so that the lateral movement of the front case body 232 is restricted when the board position adjusting boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole. It is set slightly larger than. The board fixing boss insertion hole is a long hole extending vertically along the short sides 61c and 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is such that the front case body 232 can move approximately 1 mm in the vertical direction when the board position adjusting boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole. It is set approximately 1 mm larger than the diameter of the position adjustment boss.

As already described in the second embodiment, the connector cover 233 is fixed to the front case body 232. In the process of combining the main control board 61 with the front case body 232 to which the connector cover 233 is fixed, the board position adjusting boss is inserted into the board fixing boss, and then the main control board 61 faces the front side. It is slid toward the plate portion 261. The lower upright wall 263 of the front case body 232 is in contact with the long side 61b on the lower side of the main control board 61 on the back side facing plate portion 235 side of the lower upright wall 263 with respect to the front case body 232. A first board guide portion for guiding the main control board 61 upward is provided. In a state where the main control board 61 is guided upward with respect to the front case body 232 by the first board guide portion, the free end side of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN7 is the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274. The free end side of the 5th to 7th connectors CN5 to CN7 is inserted into the 5th to 7th connector insertion holes 291 to 293 while being inserted into the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. In this state, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are present at the center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 270 to 274 and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 in the vertical direction. The fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are located at the center of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 291 to 293 in the vertical direction.

The upper upright wall 262 of the front case body 232 comes into contact with the upper long side 61a portion of the main control board 61 after being guided upward by the first board guide portion, with respect to the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233. A second board guide portion for guiding the main control board 61 downward is provided. The main control board 61 is guided downward with respect to the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 by the second board guide portion, so that the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 have the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-. The 274 and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 move downward from the center in the vertical direction, and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are located in the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 291 to 293. It moves below the center in the vertical direction. As a result, the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are in a state of approaching the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. ..

The front side facing plate portion 261 has a columnar front side board fixing boss used for fixing the main control board 61 to the front case body 232 on the left upper part, the left lower part, the right side lower part, and the right side upper part of the element facing surface 261a. It is integrally formed. The front board fixing boss projects from the element facing surface 261a toward the main control board 61, and a screw hole for screw fixing the main control board 61 is formed at the free end of the front board fixing boss. Substrate fixing through holes are formed in the upper left side, the lower left side, the lower right side, and the upper right side of the main control board 61 so that the main control board 61 can be screwed to the front board fixing boss. These four substrate fixing through holes are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the four front substrate fixing bosses described above. The main control board 61 is screwed from the back surface 61f side of the board to the front board fixing boss in a state where the main control board 61 is guided downward with respect to the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 by the second board guide portion. It is fixed to the back side of 232.

The screw holes formed in the front board fixing boss and the board fixing through holes formed in the main control board 61 are such that the main control board 61 is lowered by the second board guide portion with respect to the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233. Before being guided by the second guide portion, the main control board 61 is displaced in the vertical direction so that the screw cannot be fixed, and after the main control board 61 is guided downward by the second guide portion, the main control board 61 is communicated and the screw can be fixed. Therefore, the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are shown in a state of being close to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The main control board 61 can be fixed to the case body 232.

In this way, even in the configuration in which the main control board 61 is fixed to the front case body 232, the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b is reduced. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire into the play.

(15) In the third embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the main control board 61 is fixed to the back case body 313, the main control board 61 may be fixed to the front case body 312. The front side facing plate portion 351 of the front case body 312 is used for position adjustment when the main control board 61 is combined with the front case body 312 at the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side and upper right side) of the element facing surface 351a. The substrate position adjustment boss used is integrally formed. The substrate position adjusting boss is formed in a cylindrical shape so as to project from the element facing surface 351a in the direction toward the back side facing plate portion 315. At the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side) of the main control board 61, board fixing boss insertion holes are formed so that the board position adjusting boss can be inserted. The horizontal dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is the diameter of the board position adjusting boss so that the lateral movement of the front case body 312 is restricted when the board position adjusting boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole. It is set slightly larger than. The board fixing boss insertion hole is a long hole extending vertically along the short sides 61c and 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is such that the front case body 312 is allowed to move approximately 2 mm in the vertical direction when the board position adjusting boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole. It is set approximately 2 mm larger than the diameter of the position adjustment boss.

As already described in the third embodiment, the connector-compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61. In the process of combining the main control board 61 in which the connector-compatible plate 314 is fixed to the front case body 312, the main control board 61 is placed on the front side after the board position adjusting boss is inserted into the board fixing boss. It is slid toward the facing plate portion 351. The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 and the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 by the slide, and the fifth to seventh plates are inserted. The connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted into the 5th to 7th connector insertion holes 374 to 376. After that, the main control board 61 is manually slid upward with respect to the front case body 312 and the connector-compatible plate 314 until the board position adjusting boss abuts on the upper end of the board fixing boss. As a result, the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are in a state of approaching the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. ..

The front side facing plate portion 351 has a columnar front side board fixing boss used for fixing the main control board 61 to the front case body 312 on the left upper part, the left lower part, the right side lower part, and the right side upper part of the element facing surface 351a. It is integrally formed. The front board fixing boss projects from the element facing surface 351a toward the main control board 61, and a screw hole for screw fixing the main control board 61 is formed at the free end of the front board fixing boss. Substrate fixing through holes are formed in the upper left side, the lower left side, the lower right side, and the upper right side of the main control board 61 so that the main control board 61 can be screwed to the front board fixing boss. These four substrate fixing through holes are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the four front substrate fixing bosses described above. The main control board 61 is screwed from the back surface 61f side of the board to the front board fixing boss in a state of being guided downward with respect to the front case body 312 by the second board guide portion, so that the back side of the front case body 312 is fixed. Is fixed to.

The screw holes formed in the front board fixing boss and the board fixing through holes formed in the main control board 61 are such that the main control board 61 is upward until the board position adjusting boss abuts on the upper end of the board fixing boss insertion hole. Before being slid to, the main control board 61 is displaced in the vertical direction so that the screws cannot be fixed, and after the main control board 61 is slid upward, the main control board 61 is communicated and can be fixed with screws. Therefore, the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are close to the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c of the first to fourth front side connectors CN1 to CN4. The main control board 61 can be fixed to the case body 312.

In this way, even in the configuration in which the main control board 61 is fixed to the front case body 312, the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b is reduced. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire into the play.

(16) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, a power supply line for supplying operating power to the main CPU 64 may be provided instead of the fraud detection line 406. The GND line 405 and the power supply line are provided close to the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. Therefore, in a state where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 64 through the power supply line, a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is inserted into the element mounting surface 401e side of the main control board 401, and the fraudulent activity When the GND line 405 and the power supply line are conducted by the jig, a state in which the operating power is not supplied to the main CPU 64 is created. As a result, the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped.

The solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 is provided with a large number of power supply contact parts instead of the large number of fraud detection contact parts 408. The power supply contact portion includes a solder bulging portion that bulges approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f. All power supply contacts are electrically connected to the power supply line. Since the solder bulging portion of the power supply contact portion bulges from the solder surface 401f, the possibility of contact with the fraudulent jig when the fraudulent jig is brought closer to the solder surface 401f side is increased. There is. While operating power is being supplied to the main CPU 64 through the power supply line, a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is inserted into the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401 to make one or more GND contacts. When the 407 and one or more power supply contact portions are in contact with each other, a state is created in which the GND line 405 and the power supply line are conducted so that the main CPU 64 is not supplied with operating power. As a result, the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped.

As described above, the main control is provided by providing the power supply line on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 and providing the solder bulging portion of the power supply contact portion on the solder surface 401f. The operation of the main CPU 64 can be stopped when the fraudulent jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e side or the soldering surface 401f side of the substrate 401. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in a state where fraud using a fraud jig is performed.

(17) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the combination of the GND line 405 and the GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection line 406 and the fraud detection contact portion 408 is different from the peripheral portion of the main control board 401. It may be the configuration provided in. For example, a combination of the GND line 405 and the GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection line 406 and the fraud detection contact portion 408 may be provided around the MPU 402. Specifically, on the element mounting surface 401e, a GND line having a width of about 1.5 mm is provided around the MPU 402 at a predetermined distance (for example, a distance of about 2 mm) from the pins 411 to 413 of the MPU 402. At the same time, fraud detection lines having a width of about 1.5 mm are arranged side by side on the GND line at a predetermined distance (specifically, a distance of about 1 mm) from the GND line on the opposite side of the MPU 402. The GND line and the fraud detection line are provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the MPU 402. The GND line and the fraud detection line may be provided only in a part around the MPU 402.

The surfaces of the GND line and the fraud detection line are not covered with the resist and are exposed. Therefore, if a conductive fraudulent jig such as a flat-blade driver is inserted into the element mounting surface 401e side of the main control board 401 to bring it into contact with the MPU 402, the fraudulent jig causes the GND line. And the fraud detection line are in a conductive state, and the voltage of the fraud detection line drops. Similar to the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line, and when it is found that a voltage drop has occurred, the main control board 401 is provided with a conductive fraudulent jig. Identify that a fraudulent activity has been committed.

The solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 has a predetermined distance (for example, between the centers of adjacent GND contact portions) along the GND line provided on the element mounting surface 401e, which is the plate surface opposite to the solder surface 401f. A plurality of GND contact portions are provided at intervals (distances such that the distance is approximately 3 mm). Similar to the fourth embodiment, the GND contact portion penetrates the main control board 401 in the plate thickness direction and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). It includes a through hole, a land circularly provided on the peripheral edge of the through hole on the element mounting surface 401e and the solder surface 401f, and a solder bulging portion bulging from the solder surface 401f. All GND contacts are electrically connected to the GND line by through holes. The solder bulging portion bulges approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f, and when a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is brought close to the solder surface 401f, the fraudulent jig comes into contact with the solder bulging portion. The possibility is increasing.

The solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 has a predetermined interval (for example, the center of an adjacent fraud detection contact portion) along the fraud detection line provided on the element mounting surface 401e which is the plate surface opposite to the solder surface 401f. A plurality of fraud detection contact portions are provided at intervals (intervals such that the distance between them is approximately 3 mm). Similar to the fourth embodiment, the fraud detection contact portion penetrates the main control board 401 in the plate thickness direction and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). It is provided with a through hole, a land provided in a circle on the peripheral edge of the through hole on the element mounting surface 401e and the solder surface 401f, and a solder bulging portion bulging from the solder surface 401f. All fraud detection contacts are electrically connected to the fraud detection line by through holes. The solder bulging portion bulges approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f, and when a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is brought close to the solder surface 401f, the fraudulent jig comes into contact with the solder bulging portion. The possibility is increasing.

The wiring pattern for electrically connecting the MPU 402 and other through-hole mounting components mounted on the main control board 401 is formed on the solder surface 401f through the gap between the GND contact portion and the fraud detection contact portion. If a fraudulent act is performed in which a conductive fraudulent jig is inserted into the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401 to bring it into contact with the pins 411 to 413 of the MPU 402, the fraudulent jig is used for the GND contact part and fraud. By being in contact with both of the detection contact portions, the GND line and the fraud detection line are in a conductive state, and the voltage of the fraud detection line drops. As a result, it is possible to identify that the main CPU 64 has performed a fraudulent act of bringing the conductive fraudulent jig close to the main control board 401.

In this way, the main control board 401 is mounted on the main control board 401 by forming a combination of the GND line and the GND contact portion and the fraud detection line and the fraud detection contact portion around the MPU 402. Among the through-hole mounting parts, it is possible to grasp the fraudulent act of bringing the conductive fraudulent jig closer to the MPU 402. In addition to the configuration of the fourth embodiment in which the combination of the GND line 405 and the GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection line 406 and the fraud detection contact portion 408 is provided around the main control board 401, the present invention As in the configuration, a combination of the GND line and the GND contact portion and the fraud detection line and the fraud detection contact portion may be provided around the MPU 402.

(18) In the fourth to sixth embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 (the fraud detection line 436 in the sixth embodiment), the main CPU 64 detects fraud. It may be configured to monitor the current flowing through the line 406. In this configuration, in a state where the operating power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, a current of, for example, 5 mA flows through the fraud detection line 406 as a fraud detection current. When the GND line 405 (GND line 435 in the sixth embodiment) and the fraud detection line 406 are conducted by a conductive fraudulent jig such as a flat-blade driver, the amount of current flowing through the fraud detection line 406 is used as a reference. A state in which the amount of current is reduced to less than 2.5 mA (for example, 2.5 mA) or a state in which no current is flowing through the fraud detection line 406 occurs. The main CPU 64 monitors the current flowing through the fraud detection line 406, and the amount of current flowing through the fraud detection line 406 is less than the reference current amount, or no current is flowing through the fraud detection line 406. When the occurrence of the state is grasped, it is identified that the fraudulent act using the conductive fraudulent jig has been performed. In this way, even if the main CPU 64 monitors the current flowing through the fraud detection line 406, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts in which the conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the main control board 61.

(19) In the fourth to sixth embodiments, the GND line 405 is replaced with the configuration provided on the entire circumference of the main control board 401 (the main control board 431 in the sixth embodiment). May be configured to be provided only on a part of the peripheral edge of the main control board 401. For example, the GND line and the right GND line are provided on the left and right peripheral edges of the main control board 401 formed in a horizontally long rectangle, while the GND lines are provided on the upper and lower peripheral edges of the main control board 401. It may be configured without. The left GND line is linear with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm) from the upper end to the lower end of the left side 401c along the left side 401c (left side 431c in the sixth embodiment) of the main control board 401. The right GND line extends along the right side 401d (right side 431d in the sixth embodiment) of the main control board 401 from the upper end to the lower end of the right side 401d (specifically, substantially 1). It extends linearly with a width of .5 mm).

In this configuration, the fraud detection line 406 (fraud detection line 436 in the sixth embodiment) includes an upper fraud detection line, a lower fraud detection line, a left fraud detection line, and a right fraud detection line. The left fraud detection line is provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm to the right from the left GND line, and the right fraud detection line is provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm to the left from the right GND line. The left fraud detection line and the right fraud detection line have a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm) and extend linearly in the vertical direction from the upper end to the lower end of the main control board 401.

As described above, GND lines are not provided on the upper and lower peripheral edges of the main control board 401. Therefore, fraud detection lines can be provided near the upper side 401a and the lower side 401b of the main control board 401. The upper fraud detection line has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm width) along the upper side 401a (upper side 431a in the sixth embodiment) of the main control board 401, and is from the upper end of the left fraud detection line to the right fraud detection line. It extends linearly to the upper end in the left-right direction. Further, the lower fraud detection line has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm width) along the lower side 401b (lower side 431b in the sixth embodiment) of the main control board 401, and is fraudulent from the lower end of the left fraud detection line to the right side. It extends linearly to the lower end of the detection line in the left-right direction. These fraud detection lines on the top, bottom, left, and right are electrically connected.

In a configuration in which the vertical dimension of the main control board 401 is smaller than the horizontal dimension, a GND line and a fraud detection line are provided on the left and right peripheral edges of the main control board 401, while the upper and lower sides of the main control board 401 are provided. Only a fraud detection line is provided on the periphery of the. As a result, when a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is inserted from the side surface of the main control device 60 to bring it closer to the left side or the right side of the main control board 61, the fraudulent treatment is performed. While the configuration is such that the fraudulent activity can be detected when the GND line and the fraud detection line are conducted by the jig, a wide area in which the insert mounting component or the surface mounting component can be placed on the main control board 401 is secured in the vertical direction. can do. Note that this configuration is not limited to a configuration in which GND lines are provided only on the left and right peripheral edges of the main control board 401, and one or more of the four peripheral edges of the main control board 401 on the upper, lower, left, and right sides 3 The GND line is provided on one or less peripheral edges and the GND line is not provided on the remaining peripheral edge, so that the GND line and the fraud detection line are provided on all the peripheral edges on the upper, lower, left, and right sides. Compared with the configuration, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the insert mounting component or the surface mounting component can be mounted on the main control board.

(20) In the fourth to sixth embodiments, among the upper, lower, left, and right peripheral edges of the main control board 61, the peripheral edge existing on the rotation base end side of the inner frame 13 is not provided with a GND line. May be. As described with reference to FIG. 2 in the first embodiment, the inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Has been done. Further, as already described in the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). In a state where the main control device 60 is mounted on the inner frame 13, the right sides 401d and 431d of the main control boards 401 and 431 are present on the rotation base end side of the inner frame 13, and the left sides 401c and 431c are the inner frames. It exists on the rotation tip side of 13. When a fraudulent act such as inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver from the side surface of the main control device 60 to bring it closer to the main control boards 401 and 431 without removing the main control device 60 from the inner frame 13 is performed. If an unauthorized jig is inserted from the rotation base end side of the frame 13 (right side 401d, 431d side of the main control boards 401, 431), the other directions (upper sides 401a, 431a side of the main control boards 401, 431) are to be inserted. , The lower side 401b, 431b side, or the left side 401c, 431c side), as compared with the case where the fraudulent jig is inserted, it becomes necessary to open the inner frame 13 greatly with respect to the outer frame 11. Therefore, the fraudulent act of inserting the fraudulent jig from the side surface of the main control boards 401 and 431 to bring it closer to the main control boards 401 and 431 is the upper side 401a and 431a side and the lower side 401b and 431b side of the main control boards 401 and 431. , Or there is a high possibility that it will be performed from the left side 401c, 431c side.

In this configuration, GND lines and fraud detection lines are provided on the upper peripheral edge, lower peripheral edge, and right peripheral edge of the main control boards 401 and 431, while the right peripheral edge of the main control boards 401 and 431 is provided. Only the fraud detection line is provided, and the GND line is not provided. The main control boards 401 and 431 are provided with an upper GND line, a lower GND line, and a left GND line. The upper GND line extends linearly along the upper sides 401a and 431a of the main control boards 401 and 431 from the left end to the right end of the upper sides 401a and 431a with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm). The lower GND line is linearly aligned with the lower sides 401b and 431b of the main control board 401 from the left end to the right end of the lower sides 401b and 431b with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm). It is postponed. Further, the left GND line extends linearly along the left sides 401c and 431c of the main control boards 401 and 431 from the upper end to the lower end of the left sides 401c and 431c with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm). Exists.

The main control boards 401 and 431 are provided with an upper fraud detection line, a lower fraud detection line, a left fraud detection line, and a right fraud detection line. The upper fraud detection line is provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm below the upper GND line, and the lower fraud detection line is provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm above the lower GND line. Further, the left fraud detection line is provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm to the right from the left GND line. As described above, the GND line is not provided on the right peripheral edge of the main control board 61. Therefore, the fraud detection line can be provided in the vicinity of the right sides 401d and 431d of the main control boards 401 and 431. The right fraud detection line has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm width) along the right sides 401d and 431d of the main control board 401, and is linear in the vertical direction from the right end of the upper fraud detection line to the right end of the lower fraud detection line. It extends to. The upper fraud detection line has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm width) and extends linearly from the upper end of the left fraud detection line to the upper end of the right fraud detection line, and the lower fraud detection line has a predetermined width. With a width (approximately 1.5 mm width), it extends linearly from the lower end of the left fraud detection line to the lower end of the right fraud detection line. Further, the left fraud detection line has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm width) and extends linearly from the left end of the upper fraud detection line to the left end of the lower fraud detection line. These fraud detection lines on the top, bottom, left, and right are electrically connected.

Only the fraud detection line is provided on the right peripheral edge of the main control boards 401 and 431, and the GND line is not provided. Therefore, the GND line and the fraud detection line are provided on the right peripheral edge of the main control boards 401 and 431. Compared with the above configuration, the area on which the through-hole mount components or the surface mount components can be mounted on the main control boards 401 and 431 is expanded in the left-right direction of the main control boards 401 and 431.

As described above, in the configuration in which the right sides 401d and 431d of the main control boards 401 and 431 are the rotation base ends of the inner frame 13 and the left sides 401c and 431c are the rotation tip sides of the inner frame 13. The GND line and fraud detection line are provided on the upper peripheral edge, lower peripheral edge, and left peripheral edge of the main control boards 401 and 431, while only the fraud detection line is provided on the right peripheral edge of the main control boards 401 and 431. By providing a configuration in which the GND line is not provided and the GND line is not provided, the insertion mounting component or the surface of the main control boards 401 and 431 is suppressed while suppressing the possibility of detecting fraudulent activity. A wide area on which mounting components can be mounted can be secured.

(21) In the fourth to sixth embodiments, the GND lines 405 and 435 and the GND contact portions 407 and 437 of the main control boards 401 and 431 are more than the fraud detection lines 406 and 436 and the fraud detection contact portions 408 and 438. Instead of the configuration provided on the outer peripheral side, the fraud detection lines 406, 436 and the fraud detection contact parts 408, 438 are on the outer peripheral side of the main control boards 401, 431 rather than the GND lines 405, 435 and the GND contact parts 407, 437. It may be the configuration provided in. The GND lines 405 and 435 and the GND contact parts 407 and 437, and the fraud detection lines 406 and 436 and the fraud detection contact parts 408 and 438 are arranged side by side, and a conductive fraudulent jig is mounted on the main control boards 401 and 431. In the event of an approaching fraudulent activity, the fraudulent jig will reach both the GND lines 405, 435 and GND contacts 407, 437 and the fraud detection lines 406, 436 and fraud detection contacts 408, 438. Since the configuration is such that the contact state can be obtained, the fraudulent activity can be grasped by the main CPU 64.

(22) In the sixth embodiment, a power supply line for supplying operating power to the main CPU 64 may be provided instead of the fraud detection line 406. The peripheral edge of the back surface 431f of the main control board 431 is doubly surrounded by the outer GND line 435 and the inner power supply line. The GND line 435 and the power supply line are provided close to each other, and are covered with an insulator resist (not shown) so as not to be exposed on the surface.

The element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 is provided with a large number of power supply contact parts instead of a large number of fraud detection contact parts 438. All power supply contacts are electrically connected to the power supply line. The power supply contact portion includes a solder bulging portion that bulges approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f. All power supply contacts are electrically connected to the power supply line. Since the solder bulging portion of the power supply contact portion bulges from the solder surface 401f, the possibility of contact with the fraudulent jig when the fraudulent jig is brought closer to the element mounting surface 431e is increased. ing. While operating power is being supplied to the main CPU 64 through the power supply line, a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is inserted into the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431 to make one or more GND contacts. When the unit 437 and one or more power supply contact portions are in contact with each other, a state is created in which the GND line 435 and the power supply line are conducted so that the main CPU 64 is not supplied with operating power. As a result, the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped.

In this way, the power supply line is provided on the back surface 431f of the main control board 431, and the power supply contact portion is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, so that the element of the main control board 431 is mounted. The operation of the main CPU 64 can be stopped when the fraudulent jig is brought closer to the surface 431e side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in a state where fraud using a fraud jig is performed.

(23) In the sixth embodiment, the combination of the GND line 435 and the GND contact portion 437 and the fraud detection line 436 and the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided at a position different from the peripheral portion of the main control board 431. It may be configured as such. For example, a combination of the GND line and the GND contact portion and the fraud detection line and the fraud detection contact portion may be provided around the MPU 432. Specifically, on the back surface 431f of the main control board 431, a predetermined interval (for example, for example) from the MPU mounting compatible area around the MPU mounting compatible area corresponding to the area on which the MPU 432 is mounted on the element mounting surface 431e. A GND line having a width of about 1.5 mm is provided with an interval of about 2 mm), and a predetermined interval (specifically, about 1 mm) is provided on the side opposite to the MPU mounting compatible area from the GND line. Fraud detection lines having a width of about 1.5 mm are arranged side by side with the GND line at intervals). The GND line and the fraud detection line are provided so as to surround everything around the MPU 432. The GND line and the fraud detection line may be provided only in a part around the MPU mounting compatible area.

The element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 has a predetermined distance (for example, between the centers of adjacent GND contact portions) along the GND line provided on the substrate back surface 431f, which is the plate surface opposite to the element mounting surface 431e. A plurality of GND contact portions are provided at intervals (with a distance of about 3 mm). Similar to the sixth embodiment, the GND contact portion penetrates the main control substrate 431 in the plate thickness direction and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). It is provided with a through hole, a land provided in a circle on the peripheral edge of the through hole on the element mounting surface 431e and the substrate back surface 431f, and a solder bulging portion bulging from the element mounting surface 431e. All GND contacts are electrically connected to the GND line by through holes. The solder bulging portion bulges approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 431e, and when a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e, the fraudulent jig is brought to the solder bulging portion. The possibility of contact is increased.

The element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 has a predetermined interval (for example, an adjacent fraud detection contact portion) along a fraud detection line provided on the substrate back surface 431f which is a plate surface opposite to the element mounting surface 431e. A plurality of fraud detection contact portions are provided at intervals (distances such that the distance between the centers is approximately 3 mm). Similar to the sixth embodiment, the fraud detection contact portion penetrates the main control board 431 in the plate thickness direction and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). It is provided with a through hole, a land provided circularly on the peripheral edge of the through hole on the element mounting surface 431e and the substrate back surface 431f, and a solder bulging portion bulging from the element mounting surface 431e. All fraud detection contacts are electrically connected to the fraud detection line by through holes. The solder bulging portion bulges approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 431e, and when a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e, the fraudulent jig is brought to the solder bulging portion. The possibility of contact is increased.

The wiring pattern for electrically connecting the MPU 432 and other through-hole mounting components mounted on the main control board 431 is formed on the element mounting surface 431e through the gap between the GND contact portion and the fraud detection contact portion. .. When a fraudulent act is performed in which a conductive fraudulent jig is inserted into the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431 to bring it into contact with the terminals 441 to 443 of the MPU 432, the fraudulent jig is used for the GND contact portion and the GND contact portion. By being in contact with both of the fraud detection contact portions, the GND line and the fraud detection line are in a conductive state, and the voltage of the fraud detection line drops. Similar to the sixth embodiment, the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line, and when it is found that a voltage drop has occurred, the main control board 431 is provided with a conductive fraudulent jig. Identify that a fraudulent activity has been committed. As a result, it is possible to identify that the main CPU 64 has performed a fraudulent act of bringing the conductive fraudulent jig close to the main control board 431.

In this way, the combination of the GND line and the GND contact portion and the fraud detection line and the fraud detection contact portion in the main control board 431 is provided around the MPU 432, so that the main control board 431 is mounted on the main control board 431. Among the surface mount components, it is possible to grasp the fraudulent act of bringing the conductive fraudulent jig closer to the MPU432. In addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment in which the combination of the GND line 435 and the GND contact portion 437 and the fraud detection line 436 and the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided around the main control board 431, the present invention As in the configuration, a combination of the GND line and the GND contact portion and the fraud detection line and the fraud detection contact portion may be provided around the MPU 402.

(24) In the seventh to eighth embodiments, instead of the noise countermeasure solids 466 and 485, the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a of the main control boards 451 and 471 are placed on the solder surfaces of the main control boards 451 and 471. It is electrically connected to the ground in a part of the area corresponding to the formed reset signal wiring 464 and power failure signal wiring 465 (in the eighth embodiment, the reset side second wiring 476b and the power failure side second wiring 477b). A configuration may be configured in which a plurality of noise suppression wirings are provided. Specifically, these noise suppression wirings are wirings having a width of about 1.5 mm formed by etching a metal foil (specifically, copper foil). A plurality of the noise countermeasure wirings are formed between the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 and the game ball supply path. At least a part of the electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path is the noise existing in front of the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 when viewed from the noise source (game ball replenishment path). It is absorbed by the countermeasure wiring and escapes to the ground that is electrically connected to the noise countermeasure wiring. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence of the electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path affects the reset signal and the power failure signal.

The reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 formed on the solder surface on the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a are configured to absorb the electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path by a plurality of noise countermeasure wirings. It is possible to form a wiring pattern other than the noise countermeasure wiring in the region corresponding to. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in wiring design on the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a while taking measures against noise against the reset signal and the power failure signal.

(25) In the seventh to eighth embodiments, the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 (in the eighth embodiment, the second wiring on the reset side) on the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a of the main control boards 451 and 471. The 476b and the power failure side second wiring 477b) may be provided at distant positions, and noise countermeasure solids may be provided for each of the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465. Specifically, on the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a, the reset side noise countermeasure solid is provided in the region corresponding to the reset signal wiring 464 provided on the solder surface. Further, on the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a, a noise countermeasure solid on the power failure side is provided in a region corresponding to the power failure signal wiring 465 provided on the solder surface. These noise countermeasure solids are formed by etching a metal foil (specifically, a copper foil), and are electrically connected to the ground provided on the main control boards 451 and 471.

The reset-side noise countermeasure solid exists between substantially the entire reset signal wiring 464 and the game ball replenishment path. The electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path is absorbed by the reset side noise countermeasure solid existing on the front side of the reset signal wiring 464 when viewed from the noise source (game ball replenishment path). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence of the electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path affects the reset signal.

The noise countermeasure solid on the power failure side exists between substantially the entire power failure signal wiring 465 and the game ball supply path. The electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path is absorbed by the power failure side noise countermeasure solid existing on the front side of the power failure signal wiring 465 when viewed from the noise source (game ball replenishment path). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence of the electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path affects the power failure signal. In this configuration, only one of the reset side noise countermeasure solid and the power failure side noise countermeasure solid may be provided.

(26) In the seventh to eighth embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the power failure monitoring devices 461 and 473 are mounted on the main control boards 451 and 471, the power failure monitoring devices 461 and 473 are used as the main control boards 451 and 471. It may be configured to be mounted on a power failure monitoring board different from the above. Specifically, the main control board 451 and 471 and the power failure monitoring board are electrically connected by a plurality of signal lines. A male connector is provided at the end of the signal line connecting the main control board 451 and the power failure monitoring board on the main control board 451 side, and the main control board 451 is a female to which the male connector is mounted. A type of power failure connector is provided. The power failure response connector is electrically connected to the reset signal transmission terminals electrically connected to the reset signal terminals 461c and 473c of the power failure monitoring devices 461c and 473, and to the power failure signal terminals 461d and 473d of the power failure monitoring devices 461 and 473. It is equipped with a power failure signal transmission terminal.

On the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451, a solder surface which is a plate surface opposite to the element mounting surface 451a (in the eighth embodiment, on the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471, the element mounting surface 471a On the back surface of the board, which is the opposite side of the board, a reset signal wiring that is a part or all of the wiring pattern that connects the reset signal transmission terminal of the power failure response connector and the reset signal reception terminal 462 of the MPU 452 is provided. In addition, a power failure signal wiring that is a part or all of the wiring pattern that connects the power failure signal transmission terminal of the power failure response connector and the power failure signal receiving terminal 463 of the MPU 452 is provided.

On the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a of the main control boards 451 and 471, the influence of electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path is reset in the region corresponding to the reset signal wiring and the power failure signal wiring provided on the solder surface. Noise countermeasure solids are provided to prevent the signal and power failure signal from reaching. The noise countermeasure solid is formed by etching a metal foil (specifically, a copper foil), and is electrically connected to the ground provided on the main control boards 451 and 471.

The reset-side noise countermeasure solid exists between substantially the entire reset signal wiring and the power failure signal wiring and the game ball replenishment path. The electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path is absorbed by the noise countermeasure solid existing in front of the reset signal wiring and the power failure signal wiring when viewed from the noise source (game ball replenishment path). .. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence of the electrical noise generated in the game ball replenishment path affects the reset signal and the power failure signal.

(27) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the voice emission control device 70 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 90 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 70. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 70 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 70 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 70 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

(28) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

Historical information on the result of the lottery process of the winning combination executed when the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, for example, when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever. It may be configured to calculate the actual winning probability of each role by using the history information, and when a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history is stored. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special gaming state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special gaming state to the total number of digested games may be calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, or the gaming machine itself may perform notification corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters.

Further, the configuration of the other embodiment may be applied in any combination to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to eighth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A control board (main control board 61 in the first to third embodiments) that controls the game, and
A board box containing the control board (front case body 121 and back case body 122 in the first embodiment, front case body 232 and back case body 234 in the second embodiment, front case body in the third embodiment). 312 and back case body 313),
In a game machine equipped with
A predetermined connector (first connector CN1, second connector CN2, third connector CN3, and fourth connector CN4) is mounted on a predetermined plate surface (element mounting surface 61e) of the control board.
A connection opening (a connection opening through which the predetermined connector is inserted in order to enable connection of a signal transmission means (male connector corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) to the predetermined connector in the board box. First to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the first embodiment, first to fourth connector insertion holes 270 to 274 in the second embodiment, first to fourth front side connector insertion in the third embodiment Holes 362 to 365) are formed.
A predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector (lower side surface of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) and a predetermined peripheral edge portion (first) facing the predetermined side surface at the connection opening. In the second embodiment, the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, and in the second embodiment, the lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274, In the third embodiment, the distance between the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365) is the main body portion (housings 101 to 104 and the housing 101 to 104) of the predetermined connector in the predetermined connector. Specific side surfaces (upper side surfaces of upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b in the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) existing on the opposite side to the predetermined side surface with the terminals 111 to 116) sandwiched between them and the connection opening. A specific peripheral edge portion facing the specific side surface (in the first embodiment, the upper peripheral edge portions 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, and in the second embodiment, the first to fourth connector insertions). The distance is shorter than the distance between the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the holes 271 to 274 and the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment. A gaming machine characterized in that the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening is set.

According to the feature A1, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion, so that the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion are misused. It is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts of inserting a jig. Information on the interests of the player in the wiring for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board on the predetermined side surface side where the distance between the predetermined connector and the peripheral edge of the connection opening is short in the predetermined connector. By providing important wiring for transmitting information on the transition of the gaming state and information on the abnormal state, it is possible to make it difficult to cheat on the important wiring.

If the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion may be in contact with each other. The predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion may be separated from each other.

Feature A2. Predetermined connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board (one end side terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, third connector CN3, one end side terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4). ) Is described in the feature A1 characterized in that the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral edge portion of the connection opening extend so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface. Game machine.

According to the feature A2, the connector opening is provided with the configuration of the feature A1 so that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. In a configuration in which the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the portion is set, the predetermined connecting means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board straddles the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion along the predetermined plate surface. It extends to. Due to the shorter distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge as compared with the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion, misuse of conductivity such as a wire between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion. It is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts in which a jig is inserted to electrically contact a predetermined connecting means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the signal transmitted by the predetermined connection means is illegally changed.

Feature A3. As a connecting means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board, there is a connecting means extending so as to straddle the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which is characterized in that it is not provided.

According to the feature A3, the connection opening is provided with the configuration of the feature A1 so that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. In a configuration in which the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the portion is set, as a connecting means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board, the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion are straddled along the predetermined plate surface. There is no extended connection means. Although the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion is longer than the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion, the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion should be straddled along the predetermined plate surface. Since there is no connecting means extending to the above, it is necessary to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. Can be done.

Feature A4. A signal (payout reception) related to giving a predetermined profit (giving a game medium to a player, shifting to a state advantageous to the player) to a control means (MPU63) provided on the control board through the predetermined connecting means. Command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of the first operating port detection sensor 46a, detection signal of the second operating port detection sensor 47a, detection signal of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, second winning opening detection sensor The gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, wherein the detection signal of 43a, the detection signal of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a) are transmitted. ..

According to the feature A4, the present invention relates to the provision of a predetermined benefit in the configuration of the above feature A2 in which the predetermined connecting means extends so as to straddle the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface. The signal is transmitted through the predetermined connecting means. Further, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion are provided with the configuration of the above feature A1 because the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The possibility of fraudulent acts in which a conductive fraudulent jig is inserted between the two to electrically contact the predetermined connecting means is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts in which a fraudulent jig is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion to illegally change the signal relating to the provision of the predetermined profit.

Feature A5. The specific connection means (the other end side terminal 112 of the first connector CN1 and the other end side terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4) for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board are the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. It extends so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface.
A signal (payout reception) related to giving a predetermined profit (giving a game medium to a player, shifting to a state advantageous to the player) to a control means (MPU63) provided on the control board through the predetermined connecting means. Command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of the first operating port detection sensor 46a, detection signal of the second operating port detection sensor 47a, detection signal of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, second winning opening detection sensor A detection signal of 43a, a detection signal of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, a detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and a detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a) are transmitted, and a signal not related to the provision of the predetermined benefit is transmitted through the specific connection means. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein is transmitted.

According to the feature A5, the connection opening is provided with the configuration of the feature A1 so that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The configuration is such that the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the portion is set, and the configuration of the above feature A2 is provided, and the predetermined connecting means extends so as to straddle the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface. In this configuration, a signal relating to the granting of a predetermined profit is transmitted through a predetermined connection means, so that a conductive misuse jig such as a wire is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion. It is possible to prevent fraud in which the predetermined connecting means is electrically contacted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the signal regarding the granting of the predetermined profit from being illegally changed.

Further, a signal not related to the granting of the predetermined profit is transmitted through the specific connection means extending so as to straddle the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface. For this reason, even if a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge to bring it into contact with the specific connecting means is performed, the prescribed profit is given by the fraudulent act. It is possible to prevent the signal related to the signal from being changed illegally.

Feature A6. The predetermined connector is provided so as to exist on the predetermined side surface, and engages means (locking receiving portions 101h to 104h) that engage with the signal transmission means in a state where the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector. Prepare,
The game according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the engaging means exists on the free end side of the predetermined connector with respect to a region facing the connection opening on the predetermined side surface. Machine.

According to the feature A6, by providing the engaging means, the state can be maintained when the predetermined connector and the signal transmission means are connected to each other. Since the engaging means is provided on the free end side of the predetermined connector with respect to the region facing the connecting opening on the predetermined side surface, the predetermined peripheral edge portion of the connecting opening is caused by the presence of the engaging means. It is possible to prevent the distance between the surface and the predetermined side surface from being extended, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of inserting the fraudulent jig between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion by the engaging means.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the engaging means is not provided on the specific side surface.

According to the feature A7, the connection state between the predetermined connector and the signal transmission means can be maintained by having the configuration of the feature A6 and providing the engaging means so as to exist on a predetermined side surface. It is possible. By providing the engaging means only on the predetermined side surface among the predetermined side surface and the specific side surface, the predetermined connector has a configuration in which the engaging means is provided on both the predetermined side surface and the specific side surface. In order to allow the free end side to be inserted into the connection opening, the play provided between the predetermined connector and the peripheral edge of the connection opening can be reduced. As a result, the play existing between the predetermined connector and the peripheral edge of the connection opening can be reduced when the predetermined connector is inserted into the connection opening.

Feature A8. The board box
A predetermined forming portion in which the connection opening is formed (connector group corresponding plate portion 155a in the first embodiment, connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, connector group corresponding plate portion in the third embodiment). 361a) and
The position relative to the predetermined forming portion of the control substrate is set to the mounting position (in the first embodiment, the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral peripheral portions 156b to 159b is the upper standing wall portion 101b. A position smaller than the play existing between ~ 104b and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a, in the second embodiment between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b. A position where the existing play is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a, and in the third embodiment, the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower side. The predetermined formation in a state where the play existing between the peripheral edges 362b to 365b is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a). Preventing means for preventing the relative movement of the control board with respect to the unit (front side first case fixing boss 183 to front side third case fixing boss 185 and back side first case fixing boss 186 to back side third case in the first embodiment) Fixed boss 188, front side first case fixed boss 391 to front side third case fixed boss 393 and back side first case fixed boss 394 to back side third case fixed boss 396) in the third embodiment.
With
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is larger than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that the distance is short.

According to the feature A8, the relative of the predetermined control board to the predetermined forming portion in a state where the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. It is possible to prevent such movement and facilitate the maintenance of the state.

Feature A9. The blocking means is a blocking state (in the first embodiment) of blocking the relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. The front side 1st case fixing boss 183 to the front side 3rd case fixing boss 185 and the back side 1st case fixing boss 186 to the back side 3rd case fixing boss 188 are screw-fixed. The feature A8 is characterized in that the fixed boss 391 to the front side third case fixed boss 393 and the back side first case fixed boss 394 to the back side third case fixed boss 396 are fixed by screws). The game machine described in.

According to the feature A9, the state in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position can be maintained by setting the blocking state by using the blocking means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion.

Feature A10. The blocking state by the blocking means (in the first embodiment, the front side first case fixing boss 183 to the front side third case fixing boss 185 and the back side first case fixing boss 186 to the back side third case fixing boss 188 are screw-fixed. In the third embodiment, the front side first case fixing boss 391 to the front side third case fixing boss 393 and the back side first case fixing boss 394 to the back side third case fixing boss 396 are screw-fixed). In the released state, the position relative to the predetermined forming portion of the control board is set to the separation side position (in the first embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156. In the second embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located in the vertical direction of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. In the third embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are present in the center of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the vertical direction. It is a configuration that can be set to the position where it is in the state of being
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion are more than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. The gaming machine according to feature A8 or A9, characterized in that the distance between them is long.

According to the feature A10, in a configuration having the configuration of the feature A8 in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion can be set as the mounting position, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is set as the separation side position. Can be done. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is longer than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. Become. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening can be facilitated. After that, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion as the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is compared with the case where the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position. It is possible to create a state where the distance is short.

Feature A11. The predetermined connector is provided so as to exist on the predetermined side surface, and engages means (locking receiving portions 101h to 104h) that engage with the signal transmission means in a state where the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector. Prepare,
The engaging means exists on the free end side of the predetermined connector with respect to the region facing the connection opening on the predetermined side surface.
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is directed from the predetermined side surface of the engaging means toward the predetermined peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the size is equal to or larger than the protruding size.

According to the feature A11, since the engaging means is provided, the state in which the predetermined connector and the signal transmission means are connected can be maintained. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is equal to or larger than the dimension protruding from the predetermined side surface of the engaging means toward the predetermined peripheral edge portion. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening can be facilitated.

Feature A12. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, a space is generated between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion, and a space is also provided between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine according to the feature A10 or A11, characterized in that

According to the feature A12, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion as the separation side position, a space is created between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion, and the specific side surface It is possible to set a state in which a space is also generated between the specific peripheral edge portion. As a result, in the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening, it is not necessary to finely adjust the relative position of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening, and the work can be facilitated.

Feature A13. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is changed from the separation side position to the mounting position, the substrate box is the control board or the control so that the relative position becomes the mounting position. Any of the features A10 to A12, which comprises means for guiding an integral object with the substrate (second guide portion 182 in the first embodiment, second guide portion 306 in the second embodiment). The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature A13, in the process of assembling the board box, the control board or the integrated object of the control board is moved according to the guiding means, so that the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is directed from the separation side position to the mounting position. Can be changed. As a result, in the process, the work of changing the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion from the separation side position to the mounting position can be facilitated, and the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion can be easily changed. The state of the mounting position can be created with good reproducibility.

Feature A14. The range of the control board that exists on the control board side of the connection opening and is exposed to the outside of the board box through the gap between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion can be narrowed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, which comprises a possible shielding means (connector cover 233 in the second embodiment, connector-compatible plate 314 in the third embodiment).

According to the feature A14, by narrowing the range of the control board exposed to the outside of the board box through the gap between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion, the gap between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion is abused. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fraudulent jig will reach the terminals, wiring patterns, etc. existing on the surface of the main control board when the fraudulent act of inserting the jig is performed. As a result, the fraudulent activity can be prevented.

Feature A15. The shielding means includes a predetermined forming portion (connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment) in which the connection opening is formed in the substrate box. The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the game machine is interposed between a connection portion (fixing portions 111b to 116b) for electrically connecting the predetermined connector to the control board.

According to the feature A15, since the shielding means is present on the predetermined forming portion side with respect to the connecting portion, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent jig from coming into contact with the connecting portion by the shielding means. Since the shielding means is present on the control board side of the predetermined forming portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding means from being illegally removed.

Feature A16. The shielding means has a shielding side opening through which the predetermined connector is inserted (the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 in the second embodiment, and the first to fourth plate sides in the third embodiment). Insertion holes 336 to 339) are formed.
The gaming machine according to feature A14 or A15, wherein the opening area of the shielding side opening is narrower than the opening area of the connecting opening.

According to the feature A16, the area of the area exposed to the outside of the board box around the predetermined connector in the control board is increased as compared with the configuration in which the shielding means is not provided and the predetermined connector is inserted only through the connection opening. Can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts in which the conductive fraudulent jig is electrically contacted with the region exposed to the outside of the board box on the control board.

Feature A17. The gaming machine according to any one of features A14 to A16, wherein the shielding means is fixed to the control board.

According to the feature A17, in a state where the shielding means is fixed to the control board, the shielding means moves following the control board. Therefore, it is possible to change the relative position of the connection opening with respect to the predetermined connector while preventing the relative position of the shielding means with respect to the predetermined connector mounted on the control board from changing.

Feature A18. The board box
A predetermined forming portion (connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment) in which the connection opening is formed, and
Preventing means for preventing the relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion in a state where the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is set as the mounting position (the front side first case fixing boss in the third embodiment). 391-front side 3rd case fixing boss 393 and back side 1st case fixing boss 394 to back side 3rd case fixing boss 396)
With
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is larger than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. It is a short distance configuration,
In the state where the blocking state by the blocking means is released, the position relative to the predetermined forming portion of the control board is set to the separation side position (in the third embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are first. It is a configuration that can be set to a position (position that exists in the center in the vertical direction of the fourth front side connector insertion hole 362 to 365).
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion are more than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. The gaming machine according to feature A17, wherein the distance between the two is long.

According to the feature A18, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion can be set as the mounting position and can be set as the separation side position. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is longer than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening can be facilitated. After that, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion as the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is compared with the case where the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position. It is possible to create a state where the distance is short.

With the configuration of the above feature A17, the shielding means is fixed to the control board. Further, it has the configuration of the above feature A1 and the predetermined connector is mounted on the control board. The shielding means and the predetermined connector move following the control board. Therefore, while preventing the relative position of the shielding means with respect to the predetermined connector from changing, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion changes from the separation side position to the mounting position. Can be made to. By setting the relative position to the mounting position, the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion becomes longer than the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion, but the relative position is The relative position of the shielding means with respect to the predetermined connector does not change even in the mounting position. By fixing the shielding means to the control board and setting the relative position to the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion can be shortened, and the predetermined connector on the main control board. It is possible to reduce the area of the area exposed to the outside of the substrate box around a specific side surface of the substrate box.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A18, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C14, the features D1 to D11, and the features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of the features A1 to A18. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A control board (main control board 61 in the first to third embodiments) that controls the game, and
A board box containing the control board (front case body 121 and back case body 122 in the first embodiment, front case body 232 and back case body 234 in the second embodiment, front case body in the third embodiment). 312 and back case body 313),
In a game machine equipped with
A predetermined connector (first connector CN1, second connector CN2, third connector CN3, and fourth connector CN4) is mounted on a predetermined plate surface (element mounting surface 61e) of the control board.
The board box
A predetermined formation in which a connection opening through which the predetermined connector is inserted is formed in order to enable connection of a signal transmission means (male connector corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) to the predetermined connector. (1st to 4th connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the first embodiment, 1st to 4th connector insertion holes 271-274 in the 2nd embodiment, 1st to 4th front sides in the 3rd embodiment Connector insertion holes 362-365) and
The position relative to the predetermined forming portion of the control substrate is set to the mounting position (in the first embodiment, the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral peripheral portions 156b to 159b is the upper standing wall portion 101b. A position smaller than the play existing between ~ 104b and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a, in the second embodiment between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b. A position where the existing play is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a, and in the third embodiment, the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower side. The predetermined formation in a state where the play existing between the peripheral edges 362b to 365b is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a). Preventing means for preventing the relative movement of the control board with respect to the unit (front side first case fixing boss 183 to front side third case fixing boss 185 and back side first case fixing boss 186 to back side third case in the first embodiment) Fixed boss 188, front side first case fixed boss 391 to front side third case fixed boss 393 and back side first case fixed boss 394 to back side third case fixed boss 396) in the third embodiment.
With
In the state where the blocking state by the blocking means is released, the position relative to the predetermined forming portion of the control board is set to the separation side position (in the first embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are first. In the second embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth connectors. In the third embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located in the center of the holes 271-274 in the vertical direction, and the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. It is a configuration that can be set to the position where it exists in the center in the vertical direction of
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the predetermined side surface (first) of the predetermined connector is higher than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position. ~ The lower side surface of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the predetermined peripheral edge portion facing the predetermined side surface in the connection opening (the first to fourth in the first embodiment). Lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of connector insertion holes 156 to 159, lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b of first to fourth connector insertion holes 270 to 274 in the second embodiment, first to 274b in the third embodiment. A gaming machine characterized in that the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b) of the fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are located close to each other.

According to the feature B1, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion can be set as the mounting position and can be set as the separation side position. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is longer than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening can be facilitated. After that, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion as the mounting position, the predetermined peripheral edge portion facing the predetermined side surface can be formed as compared with the case where the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position. It is possible to create a state that exists in a close position.

Feature B2. The blocking means is a blocking state (in the first embodiment) of blocking the relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. The front side 1st case fixing boss 183 to the front side 3rd case fixing boss 185 and the back side 1st case fixing boss 186 to the back side 3rd case fixing boss 188 are screw-fixed. Fixed boss 391 to front side 3rd case fixed boss 393 and back side 1st case fixed boss 394 to back side 3rd case fixed boss 396 are fixed by screws). The game machine described in.

According to the feature B2, the state in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position can be maintained by setting the blocking state by using the blocking means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion.

Feature B3. The predetermined connector is provided so as to exist on the predetermined side surface, and engages means (locking receiving portions 101h to 104h) that engage with the signal transmission means in a state where the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector. Prepare,
The engaging means exists on the free end side of the predetermined connector with respect to the region facing the connection opening on the predetermined side surface.
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is directed from the predetermined side surface of the engaging means toward the predetermined peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, which is characterized in that the size is equal to or larger than the protruding dimension.

According to the feature B3, since the engaging means is provided, the state in which the predetermined connector and the signal transmission means are connected can be maintained. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is equal to or larger than the dimension protruding from the predetermined side surface of the engaging means toward the predetermined peripheral edge portion. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening can be facilitated.

Feature B4. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is changed from the separation side position to the mounting position, the substrate box is the control board or the control so that the relative position becomes the mounting position. Any of features B1 to B3, which comprises means for guiding an integral object with the substrate (second guide portion 182 in the first embodiment, second guide portion 306 in the second embodiment). The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature B4, in the process of assembling the board box, the control board or the integrated object of the control board is moved according to the guiding means, so that the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is directed from the separation side position to the mounting position. Can be changed. As a result, in the process, the work of changing the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion from the separation side position to the mounting position can be facilitated, and the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion can be easily changed. The state of the mounting position can be created with good reproducibility.

Feature B5. Predetermined connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board (one end side terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, third connector CN3, one end side terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4). ) Is a feature B1 to B4 characterized in that the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral edge portion of the connection opening extend so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature B5, when the configuration of the feature B1 is provided and the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion are more than when the relative position is the separation side position. The predetermined connecting means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board extends so as to straddle between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface in the configuration in which the predetermined connectors are close to each other. By setting the relative position as the mounting position and setting the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge to be close to each other, a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts of electrically contacting the predetermined connecting means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the signal transmitted by the predetermined connection means is illegally changed.

Feature B6. As a connecting means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board, the predetermined connector sandwiches the main body of the predetermined connector (housings 101 to 104 and terminals 111 to 116) on the side opposite to the predetermined side surface. A specific side surface (the upper side surface of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b in the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) and a specific peripheral edge portion facing the specific side surface in the connection opening (first embodiment). In the embodiment, the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, and in the second embodiment, the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274, the third embodiment. In the embodiment, there is a connecting means extending so as to straddle the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a) of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365) along the predetermined plate surface of the control board. The gaming machine according to feature B5, which is characterized in that it is not provided.

According to the feature B6, when the configuration of the feature B1 is provided and the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion are more than when the relative position is the separation side position. As a connecting means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board in a configuration in which the positions are close to each other, the connecting means extending so as to straddle between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface. Does not exist. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion becomes longer as compared with the case where the relative position is the separation side position. Since there is no connecting means extending so as to straddle the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface, a conductive wire or the like is provided between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. It is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts of inserting a fraudulent jig.

Feature B7. A signal (payout reception) related to giving a predetermined profit (giving a game medium to a player, shifting to a state advantageous to the player) to a control means (MPU63) provided on the control board through the predetermined connecting means. Command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of the first operating port detection sensor 46a, detection signal of the second operating port detection sensor 47a, detection signal of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, second winning opening detection sensor The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the detection signal of 43a, the detection signal of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a) are transmitted. ..

According to the feature B7, the present invention relates to the provision of a predetermined benefit in the configuration of the above-mentioned feature B5 in which the predetermined connecting means extends so as to straddle the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface. The signal is transmitted through the predetermined connecting means. Further, when the configuration of the above feature B1 is provided and the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion are closer to each other than when the relative position is the separation side position. By setting the relative position as the mounting position, a conductive fraudulent jig is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion to electrically contact the predetermined connection means. The possibility of being damaged can be reduced. Therefore, by setting the relative position as the mounting position, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of inserting a fraudulent jig between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion and illegally changing the signal regarding the granting of the predetermined profit may be performed. Can be reduced.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A18, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C14, the features D1 to D11, and the features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of the features B1 to B7. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A control board (main control board 61) that controls games and
A substrate box (front case body 232 and back case body 234 in the second embodiment, front case body 312 and back case body 313 in the third embodiment) for accommodating the control board, and
In a game machine equipped with
A predetermined connector (first connector CN1, second connector CN2, third connector CN3, and fourth connector CN4) is mounted on a predetermined plate surface (element mounting surface 61e) of the control board.
A connection opening (a connection opening through which the predetermined connector is inserted in order to enable connection of a signal transmission means (male connector corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) to the predetermined connector in the board box. The first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274 in the second embodiment and the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment are formed.
A predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector (lower side surface of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) and a predetermined peripheral edge portion (second side surface) facing the predetermined side surface in the connection opening. In the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274, the lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b, and in the third embodiment, the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365b. ) Is located on the opposite side of the predetermined connector with the main body (housings 101 to 104 and terminals 111 to 116) of the predetermined connector on the side opposite to the predetermined side surface (first to first). A specific peripheral edge portion (in the second embodiment, the first to fourth connector insertion holes) facing the specific side surface in the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the connection opening. The distance is shorter than the distance between the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of 271-274 and the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment. , The positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening is set.
The game machine exists on the control board side with respect to the connection opening, and is a range of the control board exposed to the outside of the board box through a gap between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine is provided with shielding means (connector cover 233 in the second embodiment, connector-corresponding plate 314 in the third embodiment) capable of narrowing.

According to the feature C1, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion, so that the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion are misused. It is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts of inserting a jig. Information on the interests of the player in the wiring for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board on the predetermined side surface side where the distance between the predetermined connector and the peripheral edge of the connection opening is short in the predetermined connector. By providing important wiring for transmitting information on the transition of the gaming state and information on the abnormal state, it is possible to make it difficult to cheat on the important wiring.

By using a shielding means to narrow the range of the control board exposed to the outside of the board box through the gap between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion, the gap between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion is abused. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fraudulent jig will reach the terminals, wiring patterns, etc. existing on the surface of the main control board when the fraudulent act of inserting the jig is performed. As a result, the fraudulent activity can be prevented.

If the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion may be in contact with each other. The predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion may be separated from each other.

Feature C2. The shielding means includes a predetermined forming portion (connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment) in which the connection opening is formed in the substrate box. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it is interposed between a connection portion (fixing portions 111b to 116b) for electrically connecting the predetermined connector to the control board.

According to the feature C2, since the shielding means is present on the predetermined forming portion side with respect to the connecting portion, it is possible to prevent the illegal jig from coming into contact with the connecting portion by the shielding means. Since the shielding means is present on the control board side of the predetermined forming portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding means from being illegally removed.

Feature C3. The shielding means has a shielding side opening through which the predetermined connector is inserted (the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 in the second embodiment, and the first to fourth plate sides in the third embodiment). Insertion holes 336 to 339) are formed.
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the opening area of the shielding side opening is narrower than the opening area of the connecting opening.

According to the feature C3, the area of the area exposed to the outside of the board box around the predetermined connector in the control board is increased as compared with the configuration in which the shielding means is not provided and the predetermined connector is inserted only through the connection opening. Can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts in which the conductive fraudulent jig is electrically contacted with the region exposed to the outside of the board box on the control board.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the shielding means is fixed to the control board.

According to the feature C4, in a state where the shielding means is fixed to the control board, the shielding means moves following the control board. Therefore, it is possible to change the relative position of the connection opening with respect to the predetermined connector while preventing the relative position of the shielding means with respect to the predetermined connector mounted on the control board from changing.

Feature C5. The board box
A predetermined forming portion (connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment) in which the connection opening is formed, and
The position relative to the predetermined forming portion of the control board is set to the mounting position (in the third embodiment, the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral peripheral portions 362b to 365b is present in the upper standing wall portion 101b. A blocking means (third) that prevents the control board from moving relative to the predetermined forming portion in a state where the play is smaller than the play existing between the ~ 104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a). The front side first case fixing boss 391 to the front side third case fixing boss 393 and the back side first case fixing boss 394 to the back side third case fixing boss 396) in the embodiment of the above.
With
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is larger than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. It is a short distance configuration,
The blocking state by the blocking means (in the third embodiment, the front side first case fixing boss 391 to the front side third case fixing boss 393 and the back side first case fixing boss 394 to the back side third case fixing boss 396 are screw-fixed. In the state in which the state is released, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is set to the separation side position (in the third embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are the first to fourth. The position is such that it exists in the center of the front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the vertical direction).
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion are more than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that the distance between them is long.

According to the feature C5, in the configuration in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion can be set as the mounting position, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion can be set as the separation side position. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is longer than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. Become. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening can be facilitated. After that, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion as the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is compared with the case where the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position. It is possible to create a state where the distance is short.

Feature C6. Predetermined connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board (one end side terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, third connector CN3, one end side terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4). ) Is a feature C1 to C5, wherein the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral edge portion of the connection opening extend so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature C6, the connector opening has the configuration of the feature C1 so that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. In a configuration in which the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the portion is set, the predetermined connecting means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board straddles the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion along the predetermined plate surface. It extends to. Abuse of conductivity such as wire between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge due to the shorter distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge as compared with the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. It is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts in which a jig is inserted to electrically contact a predetermined connecting means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the signal transmitted by the predetermined connection means is illegally changed.

Feature C7. As a connecting means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board, there is a connecting means extending so as to straddle the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface. The gaming machine according to feature C6, which is characterized in that it is not provided.

According to the feature C7, the connection opening is provided with the configuration of the feature C1 so that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. In a configuration in which the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the portion is set, as a connecting means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board, the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion are straddled along the predetermined plate surface. There is no extended connection means. Although the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion is longer than the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion, the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion should be straddled along the predetermined plate surface. Since there is no connecting means extending to the above, it is necessary to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. Can be done.

Feature C8. A signal (payout) related to granting a predetermined profit to the control means provided on the control board through the predetermined connecting means (giving a game medium to the player, shifting to a state advantageous to the player). Receive command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of the first operating port detection sensor 46a, detection signal of the second operating port detection sensor 47a, detection signal of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, second winning opening detection The game according to feature C6 or C7, wherein the detection signal of the sensor 43a, the detection signal of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a) are transmitted. Machine.

According to the feature C8, the present invention relates to the provision of a predetermined benefit in the configuration in which the predetermined connecting means extends so as to straddle the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface, which comprises the configuration of the above feature C6. The signal is transmitted through the predetermined connecting means. Further, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion are provided with the configuration of the above feature C1 because the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The possibility of fraudulent acts in which a conductive fraudulent jig is inserted between the two to electrically contact the predetermined connecting means is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts in which a fraudulent jig is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion to illegally change the signal relating to the provision of the predetermined profit.

Feature C9. The specific connection means (the other end side terminal 112 of the first connector CN1 and the other end side terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4) for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board are the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. It extends so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface.
A signal (payout reception) related to giving a predetermined profit (giving a game medium to a player, shifting to a state advantageous to the player) to a control means (MPU63) provided on the control board through the predetermined connecting means. Command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of the first operating port detection sensor 46a, detection signal of the second operating port detection sensor 47a, detection signal of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, second winning opening detection sensor A detection signal of 43a, a detection signal of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, a detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and a detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a) are transmitted, and a signal not related to the provision of the predetermined benefit is transmitted through the specific connection means. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein is transmitted.

According to the feature C9, the connection opening is provided with the configuration of the feature C1 so that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The configuration is such that the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the portion is set, and the configuration of the above-mentioned feature C6 is provided, and the predetermined connecting means extends so as to straddle the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface. In this configuration, a signal relating to the granting of a predetermined profit is transmitted through a predetermined connection means, so that a conductive misuse jig such as a wire is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion. It is possible to prevent fraud in which the predetermined connecting means is electrically contacted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the signal regarding the granting of the predetermined profit from being illegally changed.

Further, a signal not related to the granting of the predetermined profit is transmitted through the specific connection means extending so as to straddle the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface. For this reason, even if a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge to bring it into contact with the specific connecting means is performed, the prescribed profit is given by the fraudulent act. It is possible to prevent the signal related to the signal from being changed illegally.

Feature C10. The predetermined connector is provided so as to exist on the predetermined side surface, and engages means (locking receiving portions 101h to 104h) that engage with the signal transmission means in a state where the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector. Prepare,
The game according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein the engaging means exists on the free end side of the predetermined connector with respect to a region facing the connection opening on the predetermined side surface. Machine.

According to the feature C10, by providing the engaging means, the state can be maintained when the predetermined connector and the signal transmission means are connected to each other. Since the engaging means is provided on the free end side of the predetermined connector with respect to the region facing the connecting opening on the predetermined side surface, the predetermined peripheral edge portion of the connecting opening is caused by the presence of the engaging means. It is possible to prevent the distance between the surface and the predetermined side surface from being extended, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of inserting the fraudulent jig between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion by the engaging means.

Feature C11. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the engaging means is not provided on the specific side surface.

According to the feature C11, the connection state between the predetermined connector and the signal transmission means can be maintained by having the configuration of the feature C10 and providing the engaging means so as to exist on a predetermined side surface. It is possible. By providing the engaging means only on the predetermined side surface among the predetermined side surface and the specific side surface, the predetermined connector has a configuration in which the engaging means is provided on both the predetermined side surface and the specific side surface. In order to allow the free end side to be inserted into the connection opening, the play provided between the predetermined connector and the peripheral edge of the connection opening can be reduced. As a result, the play existing between the predetermined connector and the peripheral edge of the connection opening can be reduced when the predetermined connector is inserted into the connection opening.

Feature C12. The board box
A predetermined forming portion (connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment) in which the connection opening is formed, and
The position relative to the predetermined forming portion of the control board is set to the mounting position (in the second embodiment, the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral peripheral portions 271b to 274b is the upper standing wall portion 101b. A position smaller than the play existing between ~ 104b and the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a, in the third embodiment between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b. The control board is relative to the predetermined forming portion in a state where the existing play is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a). The blocking means for blocking the movement (front side first case fixing boss 391 to front side third case fixing boss 393 and back side first case fixing boss 394 to back side third case fixing boss 396 in the third embodiment) and
With
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is larger than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, characterized in that the distance is short.

According to the feature C12, the relative of the predetermined control board to the predetermined forming portion in a state where the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. It is possible to prevent such movement and facilitate the maintenance of the state.

Feature C13. The blocking means is a blocking state (in the third embodiment) of blocking the relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. The front side first case fixing boss 391 to the front side third case fixing boss 393 and the back side first case fixing boss 394 to the back side third case fixing boss 396 are screw-fixed). The gaming machine according to the feature C12.

According to the feature C13, the state in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position can be maintained by setting the blocking state by using the blocking means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion.

Feature C14. The configuration is such that the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion can be set as the separation side position in the state where the blocking state by the blocking means is released.
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, a space is generated between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion, and a space is also provided between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine according to the feature C12 or C13, characterized in that

According to the feature C14, in the process of assembling the substrate box, by setting the relative position of the control substrate with respect to the predetermined forming portion as the separation side position, a space is created between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion, and the specific side surface and the specific side surface are formed. It is possible to set a state in which a space is also generated between the specific peripheral edge portion. As a result, in the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening, it is not necessary to finely adjust the relative position of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening, and the work can be facilitated.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A18, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C14, the features D1 to D11, and the features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of the features C1 to C14. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. In a game machine provided with a control board (main control board 401 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, main control board 431 in the sixth embodiment) for controlling the game.
The control board is
With the ground means connected to the ground (GND line 405 and GND contact portion 407 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, GND line 435 and GND contact portion 437 in the sixth embodiment),
Power supplied means (in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the fraud detection line 406 and the fraud detection contact portion 408, and in the sixth embodiment, the fraud detection line 436) are arranged side by side with respect to the ground means and supplied with electric power. And fraud detection contact part 438) and
With
The game machine is a continuity-corresponding means (step in the main CPU 64) for making a specific state (a state in which the abnormality notification process in step S903 is executed) when the ground means and the power supplied means are electrically connected. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the processes of S901, step S903, and step S904).

According to the feature D1, the power supply means is arranged side by side with the ground means. Therefore, when a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraudulent jig such as a minus driver closer to the control board is performed, there is a possibility that the ground means and the power supplied means are connected by the fraudulent jig. Has been enhanced. When the ground means and the power supply means are electrically connected, a specific state is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the ground means and the power supplied means are connected by a fraudulent act of bringing the fraudulent jig closer to the control board based on the occurrence of a specific state.

Feature D2. At least one of the ground means and the power supply means is soldered to a bulging portion (in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection contact portion 408) bulging from the plate surface of the control board. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the bulging portions 407d and 408d, and in the sixth embodiment, the solder bulging portions 437d and 438d of the GND contact portion 437 and the fraud detection contact portion 438) are provided.

According to the feature D2, since the bulging portion bulges from the plate surface of the control board, when the conductive tampering jig is brought close to the main control board, the bulging jig becomes the bulging part. The possibility of contact is increased. Since at least one of the ground means and the power supply means is provided with the bulging portion, the misuse jig is grounded when the conductive misuse jig is brought close to the main control board. It is possible to increase the possibility of electrical contact with at least one of the means and the power supplied means.

Feature D3. The ground means is a ground-side bulging portion (fourth and fourth) bulging from a predetermined plate surface (solder surface 401f in the fourth and fifth embodiments, and a substrate back surface 431f in the sixth embodiment) of the control board. In the fifth embodiment, the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 is provided, and in the sixth embodiment, the solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 is provided.
The power supply means is a solder bulging portion 408d, a sixth bulging portion of the fraud detection contact portion 408 that bulges from the predetermined plate surface of the control board (in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the fraud detection contact portion 408). In the embodiment, the solder bulging portion 438d) of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the ground-side bulge and the supply-side bulge are arranged side by side on the predetermined plate surface.

According to the feature D3, since the bulging portion on the ground side bulges from the predetermined plate surface, the illicit jig bulges on the ground side when the tampering jig is brought close to the predetermined plate surface. The possibility of contact with the part is increased. Since the bulging portion on the supplied side bulges from the predetermined plate surface, the illicit jig comes into contact with the bulging portion on the supplied side when the tampering jig is brought close to the predetermined plate surface. The possibility is increasing. Since the gland side bulge and the supplied side bulge are arranged side by side on the predetermined plate surface, the fraudulent jig is placed on the ground side when the fraudulent jig is brought close to the predetermined plate surface. There is an increased possibility that the ground means and the power supplied means will be in a conductive state by coming into contact with both the bulging portion and the bulging portion on the supplied side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fraudulent act will be overlooked when the fraudulent act of bringing the fraudulent jig close to the predetermined plate surface of the control board is performed.

Feature D4. The ground means is continuously formed over a predetermined range (peripheral portions of the main control boards 401 and 431), and the entire ground region is connected to the ground (the GND line in the fourth and fifth embodiments). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that it has 405a to 405d and, in the sixth embodiment, GND lines 435a to 435d).

According to the feature D4, since the ground region is continuously formed over a predetermined range, it is conductive to the control substrate as compared with the configuration in which the ground region is intermittently formed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the fraudulent jig comes into contact with the ground region when the fraudulent jig is brought close to the ground area. Since the entire ground area is connected to the ground, when the illegal jig comes into contact with the ground area and the power supply means and the ground means and the power supply means become conductive, the power is supplied. It is possible to create at least one of a state in which the amount of current flowing through the supplied means is reduced and a state in which the voltage in the power supplied means is reduced. This makes it easier to identify that the ground means and the power supply means are in a conductive state.

Feature D5. The ground means is connected to the ground through the ground region, and the ground-side bulging portion bulging from the plate surface of the control board (in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407, In the sixth embodiment, the solder bulging portion 437d) of the GND contact portion 437 is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein a plurality of bulging portions on the ground side are provided intermittently along the ground region.

According to the feature D5, since the bulge on the ground side bulges from the plate surface of the control board, there is a possibility that the illegal jig brought close to the plate surface comes into contact with the bulge on the ground side. It has been raised. Since a plurality of ground-side bulges are provided intermittently along the ground region, the plurality of fraudulent jigs brought close to the plate surface on which the ground-side bulges are provided on the control board are present. The possibility of contact with at least one of the ground-side bulges is increased.

Since the bulge on the ground side is connected to the ground through the ground region, the illegal jig comes into contact with the bulge on the ground side and the power supply means, and the ground means and the power supply means are electrically connected. In this case, it is possible to create at least one of a state in which the amount of current flowing through the power supply means is reduced and a state in which the voltage in the power supply means is reduced. This makes it easier to identify that the ground means and the power supply means are in a conductive state.

Feature D6. The power supply means has a specific range (a range in which fraud detection lines 406a to 406d are formed in the main control board 401 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, and fraud in the main control board 431 in the sixth embodiment. The power supply area (the range in which the detection lines 436a to 436d are formed) is continuously formed, and the power is supplied to the entire area (the fraud detection lines 406a to 406d in the fourth and fifth embodiments). , The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that it has fraud detection lines 436a to 436d) in the sixth embodiment.

According to the feature D6, since the power supply region is continuously formed over a specific range, the power supply region is formed intermittently with respect to the control board as compared with the configuration. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the conductive misuse jig comes into contact with the power supply area when the fraudulent jig is brought close to the power supply area. Since power is supplied to the entire power supply area, if the fraudulent jig comes into contact with the power supply area and the ground means, the fraudulent jig will be placed anywhere in the power supply area. Even in the case of contact, the power supply means and the ground means are in a conductive state, the amount of current flowing through the power supply means is decreasing, and the voltage in the power supply means is dropping. At least one of the states can be created. This makes it easier to identify that the ground means and the power supply means are in a conductive state.

Feature D7. The power supplied means is supplied with the power through the power supplied region, and the supplied side bulging portion bulging from the plate surface of the control board (in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the fraud detection contact portion 408). The solder bulging portion 408d of the above, and in the sixth embodiment, the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein a plurality of bulging portions on the supplied side are provided intermittently along the power supplied region.

According to the feature D7, since the bulging portion on the supplied side bulges from the plate surface of the control board, the illegal jig brought close to the plate surface can come into contact with the bulging portion on the supplied side. The sex is enhanced. By providing a plurality of bulging portions on the supplied side intermittently along the power supplied region, a jig for fraud that is brought closer to the plate surface on which the bulging portions on the supplied side are provided on the control board. Is more likely to come into contact with at least one of the plurality of supply-side bulges.

Since power is supplied to the bulging portion on the supplied side through the power supplied region, the fraudulent jig comes into contact with the bulging portion on the supplied side and the ground means, and the ground means and the power supplied means are electrically connected. In this state, it is possible to create at least one of a state in which the amount of current flowing through the power supply means is reduced and a state in which the voltage in the power supply means is reduced. This makes it easier to identify that the ground means and the power supply means are in a conductive state.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein each of the ground means and the power supply means is provided along a peripheral edge portion of a plate surface of the control board.

According to the feature D8, when the conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the control board from the peripheral side of the control board, the fraudulent jig comes into contact with the electronic components mounted on the control board. Also before, the fraudulent jig can create a state in which the ground means and the power supply means are electrically connected. As a result, the fraudulent activity can be grasped at an early stage.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein each of the ground means and the power supply means is provided over the entire circumference of a peripheral edge portion of the plate surface of the control board. ..

According to feature D9, misuse of conductivity with respect to the control board as compared to a configuration in which at least one of the ground means and the power supply means is provided only on a part of the peripheral edge of the plate surface of the control board. When the jig is brought closer from the peripheral edge side of the control board, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ground means and the power supplied means are in a conductive state by the fraudulent jig. As a result, the fraudulent activity can be grasped at an early stage.

Feature D10. Each of the ground means and the power supply means has a plate surface (fourth and fifth embodiments) in which at least various electronic components mounted on the control board and fixing points of the control board by solder are present. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized in that the solder surface 401f is provided on the solder surface 401f and the substrate back surface 431f) in the sixth embodiment.

According to feature D10, when a conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the plate surface where various electronic components mounted on the control board and the control board are fixed by soldering, the fraudulent jig is said to be fraudulent. It is possible to increase the possibility that the ground means and the power supplied means are in a conductive state by the jig. If a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraudulent jig into contact with the fixed location and its surroundings by soldering is performed, the signal transmitted from various electronic components or the signal received by various electronic components is illegally changed. There is a risk that it will be done. On the other hand, the configuration is such that it is possible to grasp the fraudulent act of bringing the conductive fraudulent jig close to the plate surface where the fixing point by solder exists, so that the fraudulent act is not noticed by the manager of the game hall. Is reduced.

Feature D11. In the continuity-corresponding means, the ground means and the power-supplied means are electrically connected in a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 402 in the fifth embodiment) provided on the control board is stopped. In some cases, the specific state is reached.
The game machine has means for executing a specific process (abnormality notification process in step S1002) based on the continuity-corresponding means in the specific state (a function of executing the processes of steps S1001 and S1002 in the main CPU 64). When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10.

According to the feature D11, in a situation where the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped, a fraudulent act of bringing the conductive fraudulent jig closer to the control board is performed, and the fraudulent jig causes the ground means and the electric power. When the supplied means becomes conductive, the specific process is executed. As a result, it is possible to grasp a fraudulent act performed in a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, based on the execution of the specific process.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A18, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C14, the features D1 to D11, and the features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of the features D1 to D11. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, and the feature D group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front surface of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided by a game ball launcher. It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is a game ball launching device. The game ball that has become surplus in the upper dish storage section is discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given the privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

These game machines include a control device that controls the main control of the game, and the control device includes a control board. The control board is configured by mounting electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and connectors on a printed wiring board.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to suitably suppress fraudulent acts on electronic components mounted on a substrate, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A control board (main control board 451 in the seventh embodiment, main control in the eighth embodiment) on which control means for controlling the game (MPU 452 in the seventh embodiment, MPU 472 in the eighth embodiment) is mounted. Board 471) and
The control means using a predetermined signal path provided on the control board (reset signal wiring 464 or power failure signal wiring 465 in the seventh embodiment, reset signal wiring 476 or power failure signal wiring 477 in the eighth embodiment). A signal transmission means (power failure monitoring device 461 in the seventh embodiment, power failure monitoring device 473 in the eighth embodiment) capable of transmitting a predetermined signal (reset signal or power failure signal).
With
In the control means, the reception status of the predetermined signal through the predetermined signal path is a specific status (the reset signal is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state, or the power failure signal is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state. The configuration is such that the processing for advancing the game (main processing and timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 64) is not executed based on the situation).
The control board is a first plate surface provided with the predetermined signal path (a solder surface opposite to the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 in the seventh embodiment, and a main control board in the eighth embodiment. The second plate surface (element mounting surface 451a in the seventh embodiment, element mounting surface 471a in the eighth embodiment) which is the plate surface opposite to the element mounting surface 471a on the opposite side of the substrate). Suppressing means capable of suppressing the addition of electrical noise from the second plate surface side to the predetermined signal path in the region opposite to the predetermined signal path with the control board in the above. A gaming machine characterized by having a noise countermeasure solid 466 in the seventh embodiment and a noise countermeasure solid 485) in the eighth embodiment.

According to the feature E1, the control means is in a state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed based on the reception status of the predetermined signal becoming the specific status. Therefore, when the predetermined signal is affected by electrical noise and the reception status of the predetermined signal becomes a specific situation due to the noise, a process for advancing the game in a situation where the game should normally proceed. Will not be executed. In the control board, a suppressing means is provided in a region opposite to the predetermined signal path across the control board on the second plate surface which is the plate surface opposite to the first plate surface on which the predetermined signal path is provided. ing. Therefore, when electrical noise is generated on the side opposite to the predetermined signal path across the suppressing means, the noise affects the predetermined signal transmitted to the control means using the predetermined signal path. Can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed due to electrical noise.

Feature E2. The suppression means is a circuit region formed on the control board and connected to the ground (noise countermeasure solid 466 in the seventh embodiment, noise countermeasure solid 485 in the eighth embodiment). The gaming machine described in E1.

According to the feature E2, in the control board, the region opposite to the predetermined signal path across the control board on the second plate surface which is the plate surface opposite to the first plate surface provided with the predetermined signal path. A circuit area connected to the ground is provided as a suppression means. Therefore, the electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the predetermined signal path with the suppressing means sandwiched between them can be absorbed by the suppressing means existing in front of the predetermined signal path and released to the ground. This makes it possible to prevent the influence of electrical noise on the predetermined signal transmitted to the control means using the predetermined signal path.

Feature E3. Fixed points by soldering the control means and the control board (reset signal receiving terminal 462 or power failure signal receiving terminal 463 in the seventh embodiment, reset signal receiving terminal 474 or power failure signal receiving terminal 475 in the eighth embodiment). The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2, wherein the plate surface on which is present is the first plate surface.

According to the feature E3, in the configuration having the above-mentioned feature E1 and in which a predetermined signal path is provided on the first plate surface of the control board, the fixing portion between the control means and the control board by solder is the first plate surface. Exists in. Therefore, in the control board, the entire signal path for the signal transmitting means to transmit a predetermined signal to the control means can be provided on the first plate surface, and the control board on the second plate surface is sandwiched in the control board. Therefore, the suppression means may be provided in the region opposite to the entire signal path. As a result, before the electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the signal path across the suppression means reaches the signal path, the suppression exists in front of the signal path when viewed from the noise source. The noise can be blocked by means.

Feature E4. The plate surface on which the fixing portion (reset signal receiving terminal 474 or power failure signal receiving terminal 475 in the eighth embodiment) of the control means and the control board by solder exists is the second plate surface.
The signal path (reset signal wiring 476 or power failure signal wiring 477 in the eighth embodiment) capable of transmitting the predetermined signal from the signal transmitting means to the control means is
A specific signal path (third wiring on the reset side in the eighth embodiment) provided on the second plate surface and electrically connected to the control means by using the fixed portion between the control means and the control board. 476c or the third wiring on the power failure side 477c) and
A conduction path (second through hole 482 on the reset side or second through hole 484 on the power failure side in the eighth embodiment) that is provided so as to penetrate the control board and conducts the specific signal path and the predetermined signal path.
The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2, characterized in that

According to the feature E4, a fixed portion of the control means and the control board by solder exists on the surface of the second plate, and the first plate serves as a signal path for transmitting a predetermined signal transmitted from the signal transmission means to the control means. A predetermined signal path on the surface, a specific signal path on the second plate surface electrically connected to the control means, and a conduction path for conducting the specific signal path and the predetermined signal path are provided. The control board has the configuration of the above-mentioned feature E1, and the suppression means is provided in the region on the second plate surface opposite to the predetermined signal path with the control board interposed therebetween. The influence of electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the signal path is prevented from reaching the predetermined signal path. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which all the signal paths for transmitting the predetermined signal transmitted from the signal transmitting means to the control means are provided on the second plate surface, the side opposite to the predetermined signal path across the suppressing means. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence of the electrical noise generated in the above affects the predetermined signal.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the control means is mounted on the second plate surface side of the control board.

According to the feature E5, the first plate surface is provided with a predetermined signal path which has the configurations of the feature E1 and the feature E4 and is a part of a signal path for transmitting a predetermined signal from the signal transmitting means to the control means. At the same time, in the control board, the suppression means is provided in the region on the second plate surface opposite to the predetermined signal path across the control board. Therefore, the possibility that the predetermined signal is affected by electrical noise while the predetermined signal is transmitted by the predetermined signal path is reduced. Therefore, even if the control means is mounted on the second plate surface side, the possibility that the predetermined signal is affected by electrical noise can be reduced.

Feature E6. The signal transmitting means transmits the predetermined signal when the operating power is compatible with a power failure.
The specific situation is a situation in which the predetermined signal is received.
The control means executes the processes of steps S1101 to S1104 in the main CPU 64 to execute a power failure response process (power failure information storage process) for stopping the operation thereafter based on the reception of the predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the feature E6, the control means executes the power failure response process based on the reception of the predetermined signal. By executing the power failure response process before the supply of operating power is completely stopped, the operation of the control means can be safely terminated. Further, after the power is restored, the operation of the control means can be appropriately started.

If the predetermined signal is affected by electrical noise and the control means is mistakenly grasped as a specific situation due to the noise, the operating power may not be compatible with a power outage. Regardless, the power failure response process is executed by the control means. On the other hand, the control board has the configuration of the above-mentioned feature E1, and the suppression means is provided in the region on the second plate surface opposite to the predetermined signal path across the control board, and the suppression means. It is prevented that the influence of electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the predetermined signal path across the means reaches the predetermined signal path. As a result, it is possible to prevent the control means from executing the power failure response process due to the influence of noise even though the operating power is not compatible with the power failure.

Feature E7. The signal transmitting means stops the transmission of the predetermined signal when the operating power becomes compatible with a power failure.
The specific situation is a situation in which the predetermined signal is not received.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the control means stops its operation based on a situation in which the predetermined signal is not received.

According to the feature E7, the control means stops the operation based on the situation that the predetermined signal is not received. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped, the operation of the control means can be appropriately stopped.

If the predetermined signal is affected by electrical noise and the control means does not receive the predetermined signal due to the noise, the operating power may not be compatible with the power failure. Regardless, the operation of the control means stops. On the other hand, the control board has the configuration of the above-mentioned feature E1, and the suppression means is provided in the region on the second plate surface opposite to the predetermined signal path across the control board, and the suppression means. It is prevented that the influence of electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the predetermined signal path across the means reaches the predetermined signal path. As a result, it is possible to prevent the control means from being stopped due to the influence of noise even though the operating power is not compatible with the power failure.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A18, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C14, the features D1 to D11, and the features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of the features E1 to E7. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front surface of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided by a game ball launcher. It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is a game ball launching device. The game ball that has become surplus in the upper dish storage section is discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given the privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

These game machines include a control device that controls the main control of the game, and the control device includes a control board. The control board is configured by mounting electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and connectors on a printed wiring board.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to suitably suppress the influence of noise on the signal, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 42a ... 1st winning opening detection sensor, 43a ... 2nd winning opening detection sensor, 44a ... 3rd winning opening detection sensor, 45a ... Special electric detection sensor, 46a ... 1st operating opening detection sensor, 47a ... No. 2 Operating port detection sensor, 49a ... Gate detection sensor, 61 ... Main control board, 61e ... Element mounting surface, 63 ... MPU, 64 ... Main CPU, 101-104 ... Housing, 101b to 104b ... Upper upright wall, 101c ~ 104c ... Lower upright wall part, 101h ~ 104h ... Locking receiving part, 111 ... One end side terminal, 111b ~ 116b ... Fixed part, 112 ... Other end side terminal, 113 ... Terminal, 114 ... Terminal, 115 ... One end side Terminal, 116 ... Other end terminal, 121 ... Front case body, 122 ... Back case body, 155a ... Connector group compatible plate portion, 156 to 159 ... First to fourth connector insertion holes, 156a to 159a ... Upper peripheral edge portion, 156b to 159b ... Lower peripheral edge, 182 ... Second guide, 183 ... Front side first case fixing boss, 184 ... Front side second case fixing boss, 185 ... Front side third case fixing boss, 186 ... Back side first case fixing Boss, 187 ... Back side 2nd case fixed boss 188 ... Back side 3rd case fixed boss 232 ... Front case body 233 ... Connector cover 234 ... Back case body 267a ... Connector group compatible plate part, 271-274 ... 1st to 4th connector insertion holes, 271a to 274a ... Upper peripheral edge, 271b to 274b ... Lower peripheral edge, 275-278 ... 1st to 4th cover side insertion holes, 306 ... 2nd guide, 311 ... Board box , 312 ... Front case body, 313 ... Back case body, 314 ... Connector compatible plate, 336 to 339 ... First to fourth plate side insertion holes, 361a ... Connector group compatible plate portion, 362 to 365 ... First to fourth Front side connector insertion holes, 362a to 365a ... Upper peripheral edge, 362b to 365b ... Lower peripheral edge, 391 ... Front side first case fixing boss, 392 ... Front side second case fixing boss, 393 ... Front side third case fixing boss, 394 ... back side first case fixing boss, 395 ... back side second case fixing boss, 396 ... back side third case fixing boss, 401 ... main control board, 401f ... solder surface, 402 ... MPU, 405 ... GND line, 405a to 405d ... GND line, 406 ... Fraud detection line, 406a to 406d ... Fraud detection line, 407 ... GND contact part, 407d ... Solder bulge part, 408 ... Fraud detection contact part, 408d ... Solder bulge part, 431 ... Main control board, 431f ... Solder surface, 435 ... GND line, 435a ~ 435d ... GND line, 436 ... Fraud detection line, 436a to 436d ... Fraud detection line, 437 ... GND contact part, 437d ... Solder bulge part, 438 ... Fraud detection contact part, 438d ... Solder bulge part, 451 ... Main Control board, 452 ... MPU, 461 ... Power failure monitoring device, 462 ... Reset signal receiving terminal, 463 ... Power failure signal receiving terminal, 464 ... Reset signal wiring, 465 ... Power failure signal wiring, 466 ... Noise countermeasure solid, 471 ... Main control board , 472 ... MPU, 473 ... Power failure monitoring device, 474 ... Reset signal receiving terminal, 475 ... Power failure signal receiving terminal, 476 ... Reset signal wiring, 476c ... Reset side third wiring, 477 ... Power failure signal wiring, 477c ... Power failure side first 3 wirings, 482 ... reset side 2nd through hole, 484 ... power failure side 2nd through hole, 485 ... noise countermeasure solid, CN1 to CN4 ... 1st connector to 4th connector.

Claims (1)

In a game machine equipped with a control board that controls games.
The control board is
With the ground means connected to the ground,
A power supply means that is installed side by side with respect to the ground means and is supplied with power, and a power supply means.
With
The game machine is characterized by comprising a continuity-corresponding means for making a specific state when the ground means and the power supplied means are electrically connected.

Images